New Holland D350 EN PDF

Copyright © New Holland
D350
CRAWLER DOZER
Workshop Manual
Print No. 604.13.532.00 English
THIS ALERT SYMBOL SIGNALS IMPORTANT MESSAGES INVOLVING YOUR SAFETY.
Read and heed carefully the safety instructions listed and follow the precautions recommended to avoid
potential risks and to safeguard your health and your safety.
You will find this symbol in the text of this Manual referred to the following key words:
WARNING - Cautions directed to avoid improper repair interventions involving potential consequences for
the safety of the personnel performing the repairs.
DANGER - These warnings qualify specifically potential dangers for the safety of the operator or other
persons directly or indirectly involved.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
All maintenance and repair interventions explained in this Manual must be performed exclusively by the Service
Organisation of the Manufacturer, observing strictly the instructions explained using, whenever necessary, the
recommended specific tools.
Whoever performs the operations reported without following exactly the precautions is responsible on his own,
for the damages that may result.
Neither the Factory nor any Organisations in its Distribution Network, including but not limited to national, regional
or local distributors, are responsible for any liability arising from any damage resulting from defects caused by parts
and/or components not approved by the Factory for use in maintaining and/or repairing products manufactured
or merchandised by the Factory.
In any case, no warranty of any kind is made or shall be imposed with respect to products manufactured or
merchandised by the Factory, when failures are caused by the use of parts and/or components not approved by
the Factory.
AVOID ACCIDENTS
Most accidents, whether they occur in industry, on the

farm, at home or on the road, are caused by the failure
of some individuals to follow simple and fundamental
safety rules and precautions. For this reason MOST
ACCIDENTS CAN BE PREVENTED by recognising
the real cause and doing something aboiut it before the
accident occurs.
Regardless of the care used in the design and construc-
tion of any type of equipment, there are many conditions
that cannot be completely safeguarded against without
interfering in the reasonable accessibility and efficient
operation.
A carefull operator is the best insurance against an
accident. The complete observance of one simple rule
would prevent many serious accidents.
The rule is simple: never attempt to clean, lubricate or
maintain a machine while it is in motion.
WARNING
Prior to engaging in any maintenance, adjustment
or repair operation on machines having hydrauli-
cally, mechanically, and/or cable controlled equip-
ment (such as shovels, loaders, dozers, excavators
etc.) be certain the equipment is lowered to the
ground.
If it is necessary to have the equipment partially or
fully raised to gain access to certain items, be sure
the equipment is suitably supported by means
other than the devices used for controlling the
equipment.
SUMMARY
GENERALITIES SECT. 0
ENGINE SECT. 1
TRANSMISSION SECT. 2
FINAL DRIVES SECT. 3

BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL SECT. 4
UNDERCARRIAGE SECT. 5
DOZING EQUIPMENT
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SECT. 6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECT. 7
7 1 6
5 2
D350M0001
SECTION 0
GENERALITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
SAFETY RULES ................................................................................................................. III-X
TABLE OF TECHNICAL DATA ...................................................................................................

Identification data .............................................................................................................. 0-3
Table of capacities ............................................................................................................. 0-4
Main dimensions D350 ...................................................................................................... 0-5
Specifications D350 ........................................................................................................... 0-6
CONTROL DATA ON THE MACHINE ................................................................................... 0-19
LIST OF WEIGHTS FOR MAIN SERVICE COMPONENTS ................................................ 0-20
STABILITY .......................................................................................................................... 0-21
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................ 0-22
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................................................... 0-26
UNITS OF MEASURE......................................................................................................... 0-27
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES ................................................................................... 0-29

II
SAFETY RULES
WARNING
Study carefully this Manual before starting, operating, maintaining, fuelling or servicing the
machine.
Read and heed all safety rules before any intervention.
SAFETY RULES - Check brakes, steering and attachment controls before

moving. Advise the proper maintenance authority of any
- Do not allow unauthorised personnel to operate service malfunctioning part or system.
or maintain this machine.
- Be sure all protective guards or panels are in place, and
- Do not wear rings, wrist watches, jewellery, loose or all safety devices provided are in place and in good
hanging apparels, such as ties, torn clothing, scarves, operating conditions.
unbuttoned or unzipped jackets that can catch on mov-
ing parts. Wear proper safety equipment as recom- - Be sure exposed personnel in the area of operation are
mended for the job. Examples: hard hat, heavy gloves, clear of the machine before moving it or its attachments.
ear protection, safety glasses or goggles, reflector vests, WALK COMPLETELY AROUND the machine before
respirator. Consult your employer for specific safety mounting. Sound horn.
equipment requirements.
- Before starting machine, check, adjust and lock the
- Keep operator's compartment, stepping points, grab- operator's seat for maximum comfort and control of the
rails and handles clear of foreign objects, oil, grease, machine.
mud or snow accumulation to minimise the danger of
slipping or stumbling. Clean mud or grease from shoes - Fasten your seat belt (when provided).
before attempting to mount or operate the machine. - Obey all flag signals and signs.
- Do not jump on or off the machine. Keep two hands and - Due to the presence on the machine of flammable fluids,
one foot, or two feet and one hand in contact with step never check or fill fuel reservoirs or batteries near open
grab rails and handles at all times. flames, smoking materials or sparks.
- Do not use controls or hoses as hand holds when - REMEMBER THAT STARTING FLUID IS FLAMMABLE.
climbing on or off machine. Hoses and controls are Follow strictly the recommendations printed on contain-
movable and do not provide a solid support. Also, ers and in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
controls may be inadvertently moved causing acciden-
tal machine or equipment movement. - DO NOT PUNCTURE OR BURN CONTAINERS.
- Never attempt to operate the machine or its tools from - Containers must be stored in fresh, well ventilated
any position other than seated in the operator's seat. places, out of reach of unauthorised persons. Follow
strictly the instructions provided by the Manufacturer.
- Keep head, body, limbs, hands and feet inside opera-
tor's compartment at all times, to reduce exposure to - Never use these products near open flames, smoking
hazards outside the operator's compartment. materials or sparks.
- Be careful of slippery conditions on stepping points,

hand rails, and on the ground. Wear safety boots or
shoes that have a high slip resistant sole material.
- Do not leave the machine until it is completely stopped. OPERATION

- Check the seat safety belt at least twice a year. If there - Do not run the engine of this machine in closed areas
are signs of wear or fraying or other signs of weakness without proper ventilation to remove deadly exhaust
that could lead to failure, replace it. gases.
- Roll Over Protective Structures are required on loaders,

dozers, graders, excavators. NEVER OPERATE ma-
chines without ROPS.
STARTING
- Make sure the Operator's compartment is free of foreign
- NEVER START NOR OPERATE AN UNSAFE MA- objects, especially if not firmly secured. Never use the
CHINE. Before operating a machine, always ensure that machine to transport objects, unless proper securing
any unsafe condition has been satisfactorily remedied. points are provided.
III
SAFETY RULES
- Check monitoring instruments at start-up and frequently - Avoid kinking chains or cables. Do not pull through a
during operations. in case the brake pressure gauge kinked chain or cable to the high stresses and possibility
shows a pressure lower than the minimum operating of failure of the kinked area. Always wear heavy gloves
pressure, stop immediately the machine . when handling chains or cables.
- DO NOT CARRY RIDERS ON MACHINE - Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the anchor
points are strong enough to handle the expected load.
- Study and familiarise with escape routes alternate to Keep exposed personnel clear of anchor points and
normal exit routes. cables or chains.
- Seat belts are required by current regulations to be - DO NOT PULL UNLESS OPERATOR's COMPART-
provided with Roll Over Protection Structures or cabs. MENT OF MACHINES INVOLVED ARE PROPERLY
Keep safety belts fastened around you during operation. GUARDED AGAINST POTENTIAL CABLE OR CHAIN
BACKLASH.
- For your personal protection, do not climb on or off
machine while machine is in motion. - Be alert to soft ground conditions close to newly con-
structed walls. The fill material and weight of the machine
- Make sure that exposed persons in the area of operation
may cause the wall collapse under the machine.
are clear of the machine, before starting the engine and
operating the equipment. Sound horn. Obey all indica-
- In darkness, check area of operation carefully before
tions provided by flags and signals.
moving in with machine. Use all lights provided. Do not
- NEVER COAST the machine down grades and slopes move into area of restricted visibility.
with the transmission in neutral or neutralised.
- If engine has a tendency to stall for any reason under
Choose and shift into the most appropriate gear to keep load or idle, report this for adjustment to proper mainte-
the speed required, thus preventing any loss of control. nance authority immediately. Do not continue to operate
machine, until condition has been corrected.
- Do not operate machinery in a condition of extreme
fatigue or illness. Be especially careful towards the end - On machines supplied with suction radiator fans, be sure
of working shift. to periodically check engine exhaust parts for leaks, as
exhaust fumes are dangerous to the operator.
- Do not operate machine with brakes out of adjustment.
- In case of closed type cabs, always keep an opening with
- Operate the machine at speeds slow enough to ensure the outside, to ensure a constant air circulation.
complete control at all times.
- Operators must know thoroughly the performances of
- Travel slowly over rough terrain, on slopes or near drop- the machine they are operating. When working on
offs, in congested areas or on ice or slippery surfaces. slopes or near sudden level drops of the terrain, avoid
areas where ground is loose or soft since rolling-over or
- When backing, always look to where the machine is to loss of control of machine could result.
be moved. Be alert to the position of exposed personnel.
DO NOT OPERATE if exposed personnel enter the - Where noise exposure exceeds 90 dBA for 8 hours, wear
immediate work area. STOP THE MACHINE. approved ear protection.
- Maintain a safe distance from other machines. Provide - When counterweights are provided, do not work ma-
sufficient clearance for ground and visibility conditions. chine if they have been removed.
Yield right-of-way to loaded machines.
- Overtaking manoeuvres must be performed only when
- Maintain clear vision of areas of travel or work. Keep cab
absolutely necessary and unavoidable. Beware of pos-
windows clean and repaired.
sible uneven terrains, poor visibility conditions, the pres-
- When machines are operating in tandem, the pusher ence of other machinery or persons out of sight.
(rear) must be equipped with the appropriate deflectors
to protect the unit in front from the air stream coming from - Operate the machine at a speed adequate to the working
the radiator. conditions in the site and slow enough to ensure com-
plete control at all times.
- When pulling or towing through a cable or chain, do not
start suddenly at full throttle; take-up slack carefully. - Never use the machine as a work platform or scaffolding,
nor other inappropriate operations (i.e. pushing railway
Inspect carefully for flaws or troubles before using. cars, trucks or other machines).
IV
SAFETY RULES
- Be alert of people in the operating area of the machine. - NEVER DRIVE OVER THEM or other surface irregulari-
ties that brake traction with the ground, especially when
- When operating a machine, know in advance what on slopes or near drop-offs.
clearances will be encountered, overhead doors, ca-
bles, pipes, bearing load limitations of ground, bridges, - Be alert to avoid changes in traction conditions that could
floors or ramps. cause loss of control. DO NOT DRIVE on ice or frozen
ground conditions when working the machine on steep
- When roading, find-out what conditions are likely to be slopes or near drop-offs.
encountered, clearances, traffic congestion, type of road
- Working in virgin and rough terrains is characterised by
surfacing, etc. Beware of fog, smoke or dust elements
the presence of all the perils and risks listed above. In
that obscure visibility.
these conditions, it is emphasised the danger repre-
sented by large tree limbs (possibly falling on the ma-
- When crossing gullies or ditches, move at an angle with
chine), large roots (acting as a leverage under the
reduced speed after ensuring ground conditions will
machine when up-rooted causing the roll-over of the
permit a safe traverse.
unit) etc.
- Explore the working area to identify potential risks such
as: slopes, overhangs, pits, demolition rubble, fires,
ravines, ditches, soft terrain, heavy traffic, crowded park-
ing areas, closed ambients. In such conditions, proceed
with extreme care. STOPPING
- When the machine is stopped for whatever reason,

- Whenever possible, avoid going over obstacles such as
follow the instructions of chapters "Stopping the ma-
rough terrain, rocks, logs highly irregular ground, steps,
chine" and "Stopping the engine" of the Operation and
ditches, railroad tracks. When obstructions must be
Maintenance Instruction Manual.
crossed, do so with extreme care at an angle, if possible.
Reduce speed, shift-down. Ease up to the break over - Always remember to position the transmission drive
point, pass the balance point slowly on the obstruction control in neutral and engage the control lock to secure
and ease down on the other side. the machine.
- In steep down-hill operation, do not allow engine to over- - The parking brake is automatically set, when the trans-
speed. Select proper gear before starting down grade. mission safety lever is lowered.
- Avoid side hill travel, whenever possible. Drive up and - NEVER LEAVE THE MACHINE UNATTENDED with the
down the slope. Should the machine slipping sideways, engine running.
turn it immediately downhill. - Always, before leaving the operator's seat and after
making sure all people are clear of the machine, slowly
- The grade of slope you should attempt will be limited by lower the attachments or tools flat to the ground in a
factors such as condition of the ground, load being positive ground support position.
handled, type of machine, speed of machine and visibil-
ity. - Return the controls to rest position. Place the gearshift
lever in neutral. Disconnect the master switch and ex-
- There is no substitute for good judgement when working tract the key.
on slopes.
- Park in a non- operating and no-traffic area or as in-
- Avoid operating equipment too close to an overhang or structed. Park on firm level ground if possible. Where not
high wall, either above or below the machine. Be on the possible, position machine at a right angle to the slope,
look-out for caving edges, falling objects and slides. making sure there is no danger of uncontrolled sliding
Beware of concealment by brush and undergrowth of movements.
these danger. - If parking in traffic lanes cannot be avoided, provide
appropriate flags, barriers, flares and signals as re-
- When pushing-over trees, the machine must be
quired. Also provide advance warning signals in the
equipped with proper overhead guarding. Never allow
traffic lane of approaching traffic.
a machine to climb up on the root structure particularly
while the tree is being felled. Use extreme care when - Keep head, body, limbs, feet, fingers or hands away from
pushing over any tree with dead branches. bucket, blade or ripper when in raised position.
- When pushing trees with dead limbs, proceed with - Always disconnect the master switch before any inter-
extreme care. Avoid brush piles, logs or rocks. vention (i.e. cleaning, repairing, maintaining, refuelling
V
SAFETY RULES
etc.). Do the same when parking for prolonged periods - Keep operator's compartment, stepping points, grab-
of time to avoid accidental or unauthorised starting. rails and handles clear of foreign objects, oil, grease,
mud or snow accumulation to minimise the danger of
- Never lower attachments or tools other than seated in slipping or stumbling.
operator's seat. Sound horn. Make sure area near the
attachment is clear. Lower the attachment slowly. DO Clean mud or grease from shoes before attempting to
NOT USE FLOAT POSITION of hydraulic system. mount or operate the machine.
- Place master switch in OFF, securely block the machine - Keep shoes free of mud or grease before climbing or
and lock it every time you leave it unattended. Return driving the machine.
keys to authorised security. Heed all shut-down opera-
- Never attempt to operate the machine or its tools from
tions of the Operation and Maintenance Instruction
any position other than seated in the operator's seat.
Manual are followed.
- When maintenance operations require moving hydrau-
lically operated attachments by means of machine's
hydraulic system remember that all manoeuvres must
be made only when seated in the operator's seat. Before
starting machine or moving attachment or tools, set
MAINTENANCE brakes, sound horn and call for an all clear. Raise
attachment slowly.
GENERALITIES
- Always block booms or parts of the machine which must
- Before operating or performing any intervention on the be raised to perform interventions under them with
machine: external devices. Do not allow persons to move into the
• read carefully all the rules contained by this Manual; vicinities nor standing under equipment not being
• read and obey all safety related plates and instruc- blocked. Unless you are totally sure about your safety,
tions located on the machine. avoid staying under raised equipment, even in case it is
blocked.
- Do not allow unauthorised personnel to perform any
maintenance operation. Do not perform maintenance - Do not place the body, limbs or fingers into sharp
operation without prior authorisation. Follow all recom- articulation uncontrolled openings of the machine and
mended maintenance and service procedures. without proper protections, unless they are blocked in a
safe manner.
- Keep operator's compartment free of all loose objects
- Never perform interventions with engine running, ex-
that are not properly secured.
cept as called for in a Manual. Do not wear loose clothing
or jewellery near moving parts.
- Do not wear rings, wrist watches, jewellery, loose or
hanging apparels, such as ties, torn clothing, scarves, - When servicing or maintenance require access to areas
unbuttoned or unzipped jackets that can catch on mov- that cannot be reached from the ground, use a ladder or
ing parts. Wear proper safety equipment as recom- step platform that meet local and national regulations, to
mended for the job. Examples: hard hat, heavy gloves, reach the service point. If such ladder or platform are not
ear protection, safety glasses or goggles, reflector vests, available, use the machine hand holds and steps as
respirator. Consult your employer for specific safety provided. Perform all service or maintenance carefully.
equipment requirements.
- Shop and/or field service platforms or ladders must be
- Do not use controls or hoses as hand holds when constructed and maintained in accordance with local
climbing on or off machine. Hoses and controls are and national regulations.
movable and do not provide a solid support. Also,
controls may be inadvertently moved causing acciden- - Disconnect batteries and tag all controls according to
tal machine or equipment movement. current regulations to warn that work is in progress. Block
machine and all attachments that must be raised accord-
- Do not jump on or off the machine. Keep two hands and ing to current regulations.
one foot, or two feet and one hand in contact with step
Due to the presence of flammable fluids, never check or
grab rails and handles at all times.
fill fuel tanks, batteries, nor use starting fluid near lighted
smoking materials or open flames.
- Do not perform any service operation on the machine
with a person seated in the operator's compartment, - BRAKES ARE INOPERATIVE when manually released
unless he is an authorised operator co-operating in the for servicing. Provisions must be made to maintain
operation to be performed. control of the machine by blocking or other means.
VI
SAFETY RULES
- The fuel filling nose must be kept constantly inside the - Move with extreme care when working under the ma-
filling neck. Keep this contact from the beginning to the chine, its attachments and or on or near them. Always
end of the fuelling operation to avoid the possibility that wear protective safety equipment as required, such as
sparks due to static electricity are generated. hard hat, goggles, safety shoes, ear plugs.
- Use only designated towing or attaching points. Use - When performing operations requiring running of the
care in making attachments. Make sure pins and/or locks engine, have a qualified operator in the operator's seat
are secure before pulling. Stay clear of drawbars, cables at all times with the mechanic on sight. Place the trans-
or chains under load. mission in neutral and set the brakes and safety lock.
- To move a disabled machine, use a trailer or a low-boy, - KEEP HANDS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVING
if available. In case towing is needed , use all necessary PARTS.
signals required by local and national regulations, and
follow the directions provided in this Manual. - For field service, move machine to level ground, if
possible, and block it. If work on an incline is absolutely
- To load/unload a machine from transporter, choose a necessary, first block machine and its attachments se-
level surface ensuring firm support to the wheels of truck curely, than move it to level ground as soon as possible.
or trailer. Use strong access ramps, with adequate
height and angle. Keep surface free of mud, oil or - Do not trust worn and /or kinked chains and cables: do
slippery materials. not use them for lifting or pulling operations. To handle
them, always use heavy gloves.
- Anchor the machine securely to the bed of truck or trailer
and block wheels or tracks with appropriate wedges. - Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the anchor
points are strong enough to handle the expected load.
- Never align holes with fingers or hands; always use Keep exposed personnel clear of anchor points and
appropriate aligning tools. cables or chains.
- Eliminate all sharp edges and burrs from re-worked
- No bystanders are allowed near the hooking points,
parts.
chains or cables.
- Use only approved grounded auxiliary power sources
- DO NOT PULL UNLESS OPERATOR's COMPART-
for heaters, chargers, pumps and similar equipment to
MENT OF MACHINES INVOLVED ARE PROPERLY
reduce the hazards of electrical shocks.
GUARDED AGAINST POTENTIAL CABLE OR CHAIN
- Lift and handle heavy parts with a lifting device of proper BACKLASH.
capacity. Be sure parts are supported by proper slings
and hooks. Use lifting eyes if provided. Watch-out for - Keep the area where maintenance operations are per-
people in the vicinity. formed CLEAN and DRY. Eliminate immediately all
water and oil spillages.
- Never pour gasoline or diesel fuel into open, wide and
low containers. Never use gasoline, solvent or other - Do not pile oily or greasy rags; they represent a fire
flammable fluid to clean parts. Use exclusively qualified, hazard. Store in closed metal container.
non-flammable, non-toxic commercial solvents.
- Before starting machine, check, adjust and lock the
- When using compressed air for cleaning parts, use operator's seat for maximum comfort and control of the
safety glasses with side shields or goggles. Limit pres- machine. Be sure exposed personnel in the area of
sure to 2 bar (29 psi), in accordance with local and operation are clear of the machine before moving it or its
national regulations. attachments. Sound horn.
- Do not run the engine in closed areas without proper - Rust inhibitors are volatile and flammable Use only in
ventilation to remove deadly exhaust fumes. well ventilated areas. Keep open flames away - DO NOT
SMOKE - Store containers in a cool well ventilated place,
- Do not smoke or permit any open flames or spark near secure against unauthorised personnel.
when re-fuelling or handling flammable materials.
- Do not carry loose objects in pockets that might fall
- Do not use an open flame as a light source to look for unnoticed into open compartments.
leaks or for inspection anywhere on the machine.
- Wear proper protective equipment such as safety gog-
- Make sure that all mechanic's tools are in good condi- gles or safety glasses with side shields, hard hat, safety
tions. NEVER USE tools with mushroomed heads or shoes, heavy gloves when metal or other particles are
frayed. Always wear eye protections. apt to fly or fall.
VII
SAFETY RULES
- Wear welders protective equipment such as dark safety - Do not run engine when refuelling and use care if the
glasses, helmets, protective clothing, gloves and safety engine is hot due to the increased possibility of a fire if
shoes, when welding or burning. Wear dark safety fuel is spilled.
glasses near welding zones.
- Never attempt to check or adjust fan belts when engine
DO NOT LOOK AT ARC WITHOUT PROPER EYE PRO- is running.
TECTION.
- Do not adjust engine fuel pump when machine is mov-
- Know your jacking equipment and its capacity. Be sure ing.
the jacking point used on the machine is appropriate for
the load to be applied. Be sure the support of the jack at - Do not lubricate the machine with engine running.
the machine and under jack is appropriate and stable.
- Do not run the engine with air intakes, door or protections
- The load lifted by jacks is always dangerous: it is neces- open.
sary to transfer loads to appropriate blocking as a safety
measure, before proceeding with service or mainte-
nance work, according to local or national regulations.
- Steel cables are frayed after prolonged use; always

wear appropriate protections (heavy gloves, goggles
etc.). ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
- Handle all parts carefully. Keep hands and fingers away - Disconnect batteries prior to any intervention on ma-
from structures, gears or moving parts. Use and wear chine or electrical system (cleaning, repair, mainte-
always the appropriate protections nance).
- Compressed air systems can have water deposits cre- - Should booster batteries be used, remember to connect
ated by moisture condensation due to changes of atmos- both ends of the booster cables in the proper manner (+)
pheric conditions. If required, discharge deposits, as with (+) and (-) with (-). Avoid short-circuits of the termi-
instructed. nals. Follow thoroughly the instructions of this Manual.
- Before any intervention, make sure that the main switch

is OFF.
- BATTERY GAS IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. Leave battery

box open to improve ventilation when recharging batter-
ies. Never check charge by placing metal objects across
the posts. Keep sparks or open flames away from batter-
STARTING ies. Do not smoke near battery to guard against the
possibility of causing an explosion.
- Do not run the engine in closed areas without proper
ventilation to remove deadly exhaust fumes. - Before any intervention, make sure that there are no fuel
or electrolyte leakages; eliminate them before proceed-
- Do not place head, body, limbs, feet, hands or fingers, ing with further work. When recharging batteries in
near rotating fans or belts. Be especially alert near closed ambients, make sure that there is appropriate
pusher fans. ventilation to prevent possible accidental explosions
due to the accumulation of gases generated during the
recharge.
ENGINE
- Loosen the radiator cap very slowly, to release pressure

from the system, before removing it. All coolant level top- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
ups must be performed with engine OFF.
- Fluid escaping under pressure from a very small hole
- Avoid that flammable materials touch exhaust parts. can be almost invisible and can have sufficient force to
Should this be possible, provide the necessary protec- penetrate the skin. Use a piece of cardboard or wood to
tions. search for suspected pressure leaks. DO NOT USE
VIII
SAFETY RULES
HANDS. If injured by escaping fluid, see a doctor at once. - In case equipment on the machine must be operated by
Serious infection or reaction can develop if proper medi- hydraulic systems, remember to proceed only after seat-
cal treatment is not administered immediately. ing in the operator's compartment. Make sure that there
are no persons in the operating area of the machine.
- Stop the engine and release all pressures in the system Alert people before operating using the horn and by
before removing panels, housings, plugs or covers. voice. Move the equipment very carefully.
- In case pressures must be measured, use instruments - Do not use machine to transport loose objects, unless
of adequate capacity. Always follow the recommended proper devices for this purpose are provided.
procedures.
- Clutches and brakes of this machine and eventual
auxiliary equipment and attachments (such as operat-
ing cylinder or winches control valves) must always be
properly adjusted in accordance with the instructions
provided by the Manuals of the Manufacturer.
TOOLS - Never perform adjustments with engine running, except

when called for by the above instructions.
- Keep head, body, limbs, feet, fingers or hands away from
bucket, blade or ripper when in raised position. When changing work shift, check that wheel or rim
securing screws and brackets are not loosen; if neces-
Prior to any intervention, install all safety devices accord- sary, retighten to the prescribed torque.
ing to current rules and regulations.
WARNING
On machines having hydraulically, mechanically, and/or cable controlled equipment (such as shovels,
loaders, dozers, excavators etc.) be certain the equipment is lowered to the ground before servicing,
adjusting and/or repairing. If it is necessary to have the hydraulically, mechanically, and/or cable control-
led equipment partially or fully raised to gain access to certain items, be sure the equipment is suitably
supported by means other than the hydraulic lift cylinders, cable and/or mechanical devices used for
controlling the equipment.
IX
SAFETY RULES
SAFETY RULES FOR SEALS
VITON SEALS (FLUOROELASTOMER)
Seals, especially VITON O-Rings, (normally coloured red) black and tacky;
are used in systems operating at high temperatures, since 2) identify the type of material of the seals, if they are
this materials resists the effects of heat. However, in the VITON, performing the test illustrated below, on the
event this material is subject to heat exceeding 315 °C (599 spare parts;
°F) (in practice, only in case of fire or when using welding 3) in case it is verified, or there is a reasonable doubt that
flames) fluoridic acid is generated. This acid is highly the components are made of VITON, the contaminated
corrosive and could cause severe burns, if in contact area MUST be decontaminated before proceeding with
with the skin. further operations;
Every time it is necessary to intervene on components 4) wear neoprene rubber or PVC gloves and protection
equipped with VITON rings, for which an exposure to goggles or face screen, and wash accurately the con-
excessive temperatures is suspected, the following proce- taminated zone with a solution of hydraulic lime (found
dures must be applied: at building stores) and water, so that a milky liquid is
obtained. Rinse carefully with steam or running water;
1) inspect visually, without touching them, all seals show- 5) dispose of the materials removed and the protective
ing signs of damage due to high temperature. They look gloves in a safe manner, without burning them.
TEST FOR THE DISCRIMINATION OF RUBBER (BUNA N) MATERIALS

AND "VITON" (FLUOROELASTOMER) MATERIAL
WATER WATER
TRICHLORO-
ETHYLENE
NITRILIC/BUNA N RUBBER "VITON"

FLUOROELASTOMER
FLOATS
SINKS
X
D350 GENERALITIES 0-1
D350
DOZERS
TABLE OF TECHNICAL DATA
Carefully read personal and machine SAFETY PRECAUTIONS at the beginning of this Manual
0 -2 GENERALITIES D350
IDENTIFICATION DATA
A. Engine data plate
The data plate can be seen opening the left side panel
of the engine compartment, containing the identifica-
tion data and other important information on the en-
gine.
1. Serial number of the engine

(E.S.N. Engine Serial Number Cummins)
1
IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION :
Engine No. 35048946 Advert. Power HP/KW at
330/246 2100
RPM Idle Speed RPM
650 - 1000 NOx FEL This engine conforms to
U.S. EPA and California Tier 2 and EU
Family 1CEXLO661AAC CID/L
661/10.8 PM FEL 2001 Stage II regulations for heavy
duty nonroad compression ignition diesel cycle
FR Fuel rate at Advert. Power mm 3 engines as applicable.
Inj. Timing
155 stroke KV s THIS ENGINE IS CERTIFIED TO
Date of Mfg. Inj. Set IN/mm CPL m min OPERATE ON DIESEL FUEL.
.025 LASH 2828 Cu Warranty Start Date
11/01
Model Valve Lash Cold IN/mm Int. WARNING; Injury may result and warranty is voided if
QSM11-C .025 / .356 .027/.686 Exh. fuel rate, RPM, or altitudes exceed published maximum
values for this model and application.
Ref. No. Cummins Engine Company, Inc.
S052008 Assembled in the U.S.A.
4060493
D350M0002 D350R0411
B. Machine identification plate
The identification plate contains the main data of the

machine and it is visible under the operator's seat.
D350M0134
D350R0464
C. Marking and serial number of frame
The MARKING of the machine is seen on the left

side of the transmission housing.
In the lower side it is readable:
- manufacturer code (the first 3 digits) FNH;
- the machine code 35000;
- check letter "N";
- year of production "5" for 2005;
- manufacturing plant H (Lecce Plant);
- product line "C" (Dozer);
- the serial number (last 5 digits).
MODEL MARKING
D350 * FNH35000N5HC30001 *
D350M0005
TABLE OF CAPACITIES 0 -4
ITEM Q.TY Fluids and lubricants VISCOSITY Ambient temperature International

Litres (gal.) GRADE of reference classification
Cooling system 37 (9.8) AMBRA - Agriflù Agriflù mixed 50% Down to - 35 °C 50 -50 mixture of water and anti-
with water ensures (- 31 °F) freeze. The mixture has anti-oxida-
anti-freezing down tion, anti-corrosion, anti-scaling,
to - 35 °C (-31 °F) anti-foaming properties and anti-
freezing down to -35 °C (-31 °F).
Fuel tank 675 (178.3) – – – DIESEL FUEL ASTM No. 2D
Grade TT of reputable quality and make
Engine 35 (9.2) AMBRA - Super Gold SAE 15W - 40 -15 to 40° C (5 to 104 °F) API CF-4/SG or
CCMC D4 or
SAE 10W - 30 -25 to 20 °C (-13 to 68 °F) MIL-L-2104 E
Torque converter - Transmiss. 70 (18.5) AMBRA - Hydropower SAE 10W All season ATF Type A Suffix A
SAE 15W - 40 -15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F) API CF-4/SG or
Steering / brakes
175 (46.2) AMBRA - Super Gold CCMC D4 or
transmission housing SAE 10W - 30 -25 to 20 °C (-13 to 68° F) MIL-L-2104 E
DIN 51524 PART - 1
Hydraulic system 145 (38.3) HI-TECH 46 ISO 46 -20 to 50 °C (5 to 104 °F) DIN 51524 PART - 2
GENERALITIES
ISO VG 46
Final drives (each) 51 (13.5) AMBRA - Hypoide 90 SAE 80W - 90 All season API GL5 or
MIL-L-2105
Various grease fittings - AMBRA - MG2 NLGI2 Consistency All season –
Note: The quantities of fluids indicated are the ones required for periodic changes. If the content of sulphur exceeds 0.5%, change the
engine oil as follows:
Up to 0.5 % S Periodic change

from 0.5 to 1 % Half the normal interval
Over 1 % One quarter the normal interval
D350
MAIN DIMENSIONS D350
(*)
3375 3500
(132.9) (137.8)
520 (20.5)
3243 (127.7) 2134 (84)

5282 (207.9) 2744 (108)
8234 (324.2)
(*) 610 mm (24 in) shoes or 711 mm (28 in) shoes D350M0006
Blade Blade Blade Tilt Pitch Digging Blade lifting

BLADE TYPE width height capacity depth from ground
mm (in) mm (in) m3 (ft3) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
Semi-U (HSU) 3975 (156.5) 1700 (66.9) 9.1 (321.3) 900 (35.4) 13° 600 (23.6) 1220 (48)
Angolable (HA) • 4620 (181.9) 1145 (45.1) 4.5 (158.9) 470 (18.5) 10° 685 (26.9) 1140 (44.9)
Full-U (HU) 4295 (169.1) 1650 (64.9) 11.4 (402.6) 975 (38.4) 13° 600 (23.6) 1220 (48)
• Maximum angle: ± 25°.
SPECIFICATIONS D350
SPECIFICATIONS DATA
Max. speeds
FORWARD
1 st Km/h (mph) 3.8 (2.4)
nd
2 Km/h (mph) 6.1 (3.8)
rd
3 Km/h (mph) 10.3 (6.4)
REVERSE
1 st Km/h (mph) 4.4 (2.7)
2 nd Km/h (mph) 7.0 (4.3)
rd
3 Km/h (mph) 11.4 (7.0)
Max Trazione alla Barra

FORWARD
1 st daN 58172
2 nd daN 33144
rd
3 daN 16300
REVERSE
1 st Km (mile) 48590 (30192.4)
nd
PERFORMANCES 2 Km (mile) 27515 (17097.0)
3rd Km (mile) 13332 (8284.1)
Bearing pressure on ground

Under work conditions bar (psi) 0.90 (13.0)
Under work conditions + single shank ripper bar (psi) 0.98 (14.2)
Climbing capacity (FWD) Maximum speed

rd
3 10% Km/h (mph) 8.5 (5.3)
nd
2 30% Km/h (mph) 4.4 (2.7)
1st 60% km/h (mph) 2.7 (1.7)
Front equipment cycle times (ref. semi-U blade)

Raising time (from ground to max. height) sec 2.7
Controlled lowering sec 1.6
Floating sec 1
Noise
Inner LwA dB(A) 83
Outer LwA dB(A) 118
Outer with sound suppression option dB(A) 113
Back-up alarm.
Left safety lever.
SAFETY DEVICES It blocks the equipment, cuts-off the transmission and engages the parking brake.
Right safety lever.
It blocks the equipment, cuts-off the transmission and engages the parking brake.
cont.ed SPECIFICATIONS D350
Engine manufacturer - Cummins

Engine model - QSM11-330/365 HP
Engine type: direct injection, turbocharged,

after-cooled, 4-stroke diesel.
Bore and stroke mm (in) 125 x 147 (4.9 x 5.8)
Total displacement lt (gal.) 10.82 (2.8)
Number of cylinders - 6
D350 kW HP
Net power nom. @ 2100 rpm max. @1800 rpm nom. @ 2100 rpm max. @1800 rpm
DIN 6270 224 257 300 345
SAE J1349 221 253 296 339
ISO9249 223 255 299 342
EEC 80/1269 224 257 300 345
Max. torque daNm (lb.ft.) 167.4 (1234.2)

Fuel consumption (MAX. POWER) KG/h (lb/h) 50 (110.2)
Starting capacity
ENGINE Standard configuration °C (°F) -12 (10)
AND With cold starting system °C (°F) -17 (1.4)
ACCESSORIES
Electrical system
System voltage Volt 24
Capacity of starter motor kW (HP) 9.5 (12.7)
Capacity of alternator Amp 70
Radiator
Dimension of transmission heat exchanger - -
2 2
Dimension of core (water) dm 64.4 (6.9 ft ) mm (in) 114 x 1180 x 540 (4.5 x 46.4 x 21.2)
Material of core brass
No of tube rows - 6
Fin pitch mm (in) 3.5 (0.1)
Cap pressure bar (psi) 1.0 (14.5)
Air/air radiator
Fan diameter mm (in) 600 (23.6)
No. of tubes - 37
Pitch mm (in) 2.8 (0.1)
2 2
Radiator surface dm (ft ) 42.5 (4.6)
Operating pressure bar (psi) 2 (29)
Water pump flow (at normal speed) lt/min (gpm) 438 (115.7)
Sound suppressed fan (blowing)/fan TRUFLO TECNOVENT

(sucking)
Fan diameter mm (in) 1066.8 (42) 1067 (42)
Blade angle pitch deg 45° 30°
Number of blades - 8 12
Dimension of blade mm (in) 203 x 2.3 x 375 -
(7.9 x 0.1 x 14.8)
Drive ratio (fan/engine) - 0.67 : 1 0.57 : 1
Air cleaner
Brand Donaldson
Type FRG15-0092
ENGINE
AND Dry type, two stages with safety element
ACCESSORIES and centrifugal separator.
Setting of clogging indicator bar (in H 2O) 0.06 (25)
Initial clogging (@ 15 cum /min, 529.7 ft3/min) -
Cummins limit: 0.04 bar (15 in H2O) bar (in H2O) 0.02 (10.8)
3
Dust containment capacity (@ 13 cum /min, 459.1 ft /min) -
Cummins limit : 25 gr./CFM gr/CFM 19.2
Dimensions mm (in) 381 (15)
Rain protected pre-filter Donaldson
Silencer Donaldson
Horizontal type. Under hood.
Dimensions mm (in) 275 x 813 (10.8 x 32)
Max. counter-pressure (Cummins limit: 76 mmHg, 1.5 psi) mmHg (psi) 40 (0.8)
FUEL TANK Total volume lt (gal.) 675 (178.3)

Specifications of filler cap lt (gal.) 670 (176.9)
Brand: Twin disc

Model: 8F-1600 MS-480
Type: Single stage, dual phase.
TORQUE Stall ratio - 2.3 : 1
CONVERTER Nominal diameter mm (in) 406.4 (16.0)
AND Setting of pressure relief valve delivery @ 10 lt/min (2.6 gpm)bar (psi) 10 to 11 (0.19 to 0.21)
HOUSING
Transmission pump nominal flow @ 16 bar lt/min (gpm) 101 (26.7)
Transmission scavenge @ 1 bar (14.5 psi) lt/min (gpm) 194 (51.2)
Tc pump nominal flow @ 3.5 bar (50.8 psi) lt/min (gpm) 89 (23.5)
Tc scavenge pump @ 1 bar (14.5 psi) lt/min (gpm) 37 (9.8)
Type: POWER SHIFT

Model: TM400
Brand: CNH
TRANSMISSION
Specifications: 3+3 speeds, speed and direction modulating valves
Electronic control + automatic mode
Integrated CPU and TM control.
PTO capacity
Max. torque @ 0 rpm daNm (lb.ft.) 294.3 (17326.5)
Max. speed @0 torque rpm 2350
Specifications
Clockwise rotation (from rear of machine) driven by Torque Converter.
Shaft specifications
Number of teeth - 24
Module mm (in) 2.58 (0.1)
Outer diameter mm (in) 63.68 (2.5)
Filters
Intake:
TRANSMISSION Metal mesh + magnetic rod (Q.ty 2) mesh 100

In-line
Spin-on Micron 30 abs.
By-pass valve setting bar (psi) 2 (29)
Transmission pressure relief valve setting @ 10 lt/min (2.6 gpm) bar (psi) 10 to 11 (145 to 159.5)
Aluminium made oil radiator core mm (in) 500 x 1170 x 150 (19.7 x 46 x 5.9)
Controls
Fingertip type, FNR pivoting control, neutral switch.
Safety lever.
Description of auto mode

AS Allows the operator to pre-select the 1st speed in froward and the 2nd in reverse at
direction changes.
Dimension of shaft
PROPELLER
Mechanical 8.5 °C (47.3°F)
SHAFT
Nominal length mm (in) 452.2 (17.8)
Gleason type, modular pinion assembly.

BEVEL Forced lube pinion bearings.
GEAR
GROUP Ratio: 23/35
Module: M 10
The machine uses a differential steering system; this consists of a hydraulic pump, a hydraulic
motor, controls, two planetary modules and a steering gear train.
The rear transmission has two power inlets. One from the bevel gear for the speed and
STEERING Forward reverse, the other from the motor, to turn.
SYSTEM The steering system is actuated by two "finger tip" potentiometric levers, located on the left
D350 side of the operator's seat.
The levers send an electric signal to the microprocessor controlling the two proportional
solenoid valves; these valves convert the electric signal into a hydraulic one, piloting the
steering section of the main valve.
This section controls the pump flow to the hydraulic motor that through the steering gear train,
actuates the two planetary modules and the right track chain.
0 - 10 GENERALITIES D350
The open hydrostatic circuit includes:

- Main pump
The same of the equipment
(see hydraulic system) cm3/rev (in3/rev) 190 (11.6)
- Hydraulic motor
Bent axis design, axial pistons, fixed
displacement motor
(with bolt-on movement control valve)
Displacement cm3/rev (in3/rev) 180 (10.9)

Max. operating pressure bar (psi) 350 (5076.3)
- Steering control valve.
Closed centre.
This section is included in the implement control valve.
- Steering control.
Electro-Hydraulic control
with two proportional valves.
Integrated CPU for steering and TM control.
- Priority valve.
It provides priority to the steering
over the equipment control.
- Make-up valve.
STEERING t provides pressure to both equipment
SYSTEM control pilot valves
D350 and to the proportional solenoid valves bar (psi) 30 (435.1)
- Oil radiator
Aluminium body mm (in) 865 x 602 x 63 (34 x 23.7 x 2.5)
By-pass setting bar (psi) 5 (72.5)
Planetary modules
See "power train" diagram
Gear ratio straight travel conditions - 1.52
Steering line
See "power train" diagram.
Gear ratio.
Hydraulic motor to sprocket - 244
Performance
Min. steering radius m (ft) 2.0 (6.6)
Max. differ. track chain speed, no load condition Km/h (mph) 2.8 (1.7)
Max. differ. track chain torque at 350 bar (5076.3) KNm 124
The steering system is controlled by two levers installed on the left side of the operator’s seat.
When the lever is moved, a modular pressure is forwarded through the controller and the
proportional solenoid valves to the steering control valve.
The service brakes system is negatively controlled by the brake pedal or when pulling the two
levers at the same time.
The actuation of the pedal cuts with a modulation the backpressure of the brake piston so that
the springs apply a braking load.
D350 GENERALITIES 0 - 11
Steering/brakes filters
Suction, spin-on Micron 150
In-line filters
Spin-on Micron 25
By-pass valve setting bar (psi) 3.44 (49.9)
Multiple-disc, spring actuated,
released by oil, oil-cooled
No. of clutch discs - 8
BRAKES
Outer diameter mm (in) 407.98 (16.1)
Inner diameter mm (in) 320.92 (12.6)
2 2
Total friction area cm (in ) 8046 (1247.1)
Friction material - -
No. of springs - 16
Max. braking torque daN 2116
Steering pump flow lt/min (gpm) -
System pressure bar (psi) 350 (5076.3)
STEERING/BRAKES
Welded housing.
COMPARTMENT
Countershaft single reduction,
FINAL plus one planetary reduction.
DRIVE
Total ratio - 15.6
Segments. 3 Elements
SPROCKET No. of teeth - 27
Pitch diameter mm (in) 936.62 (36.9)
Tubular, torsion
TRACK and flexion resistant fabricated structure.
FRAME
Sealed track tensioner compartment.
Link pitch mm (in) 215.9 (8.5)

No. of links - 44
Link height mm (in) 150 (5.9)
Shoe height mm (in) 84 (3.3)
Weight of shoes per metre Kg/m (lb/m) 28.4 (62.6)
Width of standard shoe mm (in) 610 (24)
Width of optional shoes mm (in) 711 (28)
UNDERCARRIAGE
No. of track rollers (2 twin rim and 5 single rim) - 7
Sequence from sprocket - SF-DF-SF-SF
-DF-SF-SF
Diameter of rollers mm (in) 242 (9.5)
No. of support rollers - 2
Roller diameter (support) mm (in) 191 (7.5)
Idler diameter mm (in) 813 (32)
Sliding idler guides with replaceable wear strips.

Grease piston to track adjuster.
Single spring.
TRACK TENSION
Nominal load of spring assembly daN 28910
SYSTEM
Outside diameter of spring mm (in) 285 (11.2)
Diameter of wire mm (in) 63.5 (2.5)
Diameter of grease piston mm (in) 101.5 (4.0)
Setting of relief valve KPa (psi) 68.95 (10.0)
Pivot shaft (near sprocket) and fixed frond cross-member.
Al joints permanently lubricated

TRACK
SUSPENSION Pivot shaft diameter mm (in) Ø 189 (7.4) - Ø 149 (5.9)
SYSTEM Thickness of crossbar mm (in) 125 (4.9)
Oscillation stroke (track) deg 10°30'
Stroke of idler (total) mm (in) 480 (18.9)
Fabricated structure with two boxed beams, centrally connected by the suspension cross-
member support, frontally to the radiator and hood support and at the rear to the transmission
MAIN housing.
FRAME Frame length mm (in) 1314 (51.7)
Width of beam mm (in) 114.3 (4.5)
Bolted to rear transmission housing.

TOWING
Pin diameter mm (in) 50.8 (2.0)
HOOK
Fork opening mm (in) 95 (3.7)
Load sensing system, flow partition with piloted variable displacement pump.
System pressure
Setting of dual pressure relief
valve (equipment/steering) bar (psi) 200/350 (2900.7/5076.3)
Pressure of piloting line bar (psi) 30 to 32 (435.1 to 464.1)
Main pump: axial pistons

HYDRAULIC variable displacement
SYSTEM Regulators:
Constant power control kW (HP) 90 kW@ 1950 rpm
(120.7 HP@ 1950 rpm
CUT-OFF pressure bar (psi) 350 (5076.3)
Load sensing bar (psi) 20 to 21 (290.1 to 304.6)
Brand Rexroth
Model A11VL0 190 LRS/11
max. displacement cc/rev 192.7
Pump speed at engine max. speed rpm 2003
Max. pump flow l/min (gpm) 386 (101.9)
Min displacement cc/rev 15

Stand-by pressure bar (psi) 33 to 37 (478.6 to 536.6)
Equipment control valve:

Piloted, Closed centre, flow partition,
with discharge valve 4-spool
Brand Rexroth
Model 4M7 - 22
Nominal dimensions mm (in) 22 (0.8)
1st spool
Ripper (lift, lowering)
at max. flow l/min (gpm) 350 (92.5)
nd
2 spool
Blade tilt (left, right) at max. flow l/min (gpm) 100 (26.4)
rd
3 spool
Blade (lift, lowering,
floating w/detent) l/min (gpm) 350 (92.5)
th
4 spool
Steering motor
Pilot valve
HYDRAULIC Blade and tilt
SYSTEM
Brand Rexroth
Model 5THF6Z97
Auxiliary lever
Single lever for ripper spool
Brand Rexroth
Model 2TH6-L97
Cylinders:
Blade q.ty 2 cylinders

Bore mm (in) 120 (4.7)
Rod diameter mm (in) 70 (2.8)
Stroke mm (in) 1255 (49.4)
Tilt (bulldozer blade)

Bore mm (in) 180 (7.1)
Stroke mm (in) 180 (7.1)
Ripper (lift) q.ty 2 cylinders

Bore mm (in) 180 (7.1)
Ripper (pitch) q.ty 2 cylinders

Bore mm (in) 160 (6.3)
Hydraulic tank
HYDRAULIC Total capacity of tank l (gal.) 205 (54.1)
SYSTEM Oil tank volume l (gal.) 145 (38.3)
Capacity of oil circuit l (gal.) 310 (81.9)
Return filter
Filtering capacity micron (absolute) 25
By-pass valve setting mPa (psi) 200 to 15 (29007 to 2175.6)
2 2
Surface cm (in ) 7392 (1145.8)
Canopy rops fops:

Standard with 2-beam rigid structure.
Cab:
Fully enclosed, modular, fops cab.
Two doors, two side windows, 4 resilient supports.
Description of cab arrangement

Left console:
With fully adjustable armrest (satellite) including the Steering and Transmission controls.
The console holds: Auto T/M switches, left safety lever, Conditioning dashboard.
Right console:
Support for hydraulic pilot valve and 3rd function lever, adjustable armrest, starter key, horn,
ashtray.
Front control module:
DRIVER'S Monitor, control switches, manual throttle (RH).
COMPARTMENT
Pedal support:
Brake central pedal, decelerator pedal (RH) footrest (2).
Cab accessories:
Rear mirror.
Front wiper, door window wipers.
Rear window wiper.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Ceiling light (2).
Radio FM-AM (12 Volt).
Drink holder.
Fridge 12 Volt socket.
No. of air ducts - 8
Seat
Brand Bostrom
Model Viking 301K

Adjustment range mm (in) 150 (5.9)
Adjustment height mm (in) 100 (3.9)
Other features
Cloth lining, with safety belt and connections
Heater group
Heating capacity (air inlet temp. - 10 ° C - 14 °F;
air flow 600 cum/h, water inlet temp. 85 ° C - 185 °F,
water flow 800l/h, 211.3 gal./h) kW (HP) 10.4 (13.9)
Filter:
Glass paper, inorganic fibre
Efficiency % > 65
Capacity micron 0.3
Dimensions cm2 (in2) 19600 (3038)
Re-circulation percentage:
Q.ty of fans (type: SPAL 006-839-22 3 -
speed-total free flow 1160 cum/h) 2
No. of fan speeds 3
Max. cab airflow
(total air free flow 1160 cum/h) m3/h (ft3/h) 500 (17657.3)
Max. pressurisation Pa (psi) 20 (0.003)
DRIVER'S
COMPARTMENT Air conditioner group
Max. gas charge gr (lb) 1600 (3.5)
Cooling capacity (air inlet temperature + 30°C-86 °F,
air flow 600 cum/h) air humidity 55%) kW (HP) 6 (8.0)
Re-circulation percentage % na
Compressor
Brand Sanden
Model SD7H1SMD7948
Total displacement (max. allowable speed 700 rpm) cuc/rev 160
Setting of thermostat valve +1°C (33.8°F) open: setting of
diff. temperature 3.5°C (38.3°F)
Pressure switch (2 lever model):
LOWER LEVER: open 2 bar (29 psi), closed 2.1 bar (30.4 psi)
LOWER LEVER: open 25 bar (362 psi), closed 19 bar (275.5 psi).
Expansion valve 2 TON - 6000kcal/h
Condenser
Dimensions (front surface) mm (in) 690 x 200 (27.2 x 7.9)
no. of fans (model SPAL VA14-BP7/C-34A) - 3
Fan diameter mm (in) -
Fan dimensions kW (HP) -
Alternator
Brand Delco-Remy
Model 22SI 350/355
Capacity 24V - 70A
Starter motor
Brand Delco-Remy
Model 42MT - TYP0400
Capacity 24V - 9.5 KW (12.7 HP)
Batteries
No. of elements 2
Connections series
Brand Multi-brand,
maintenance free
Capacity Ah 180 - 12V
Discharge A 770
Lighting system
ELECTRICAL
No. of elements -
SYSTEM
2 front lights + 2 side work lights W (HP) 60 (0.08)
2 rear work lights W (HP) 60 (0.08)
Other main components

Main switch manual
Link fuses A 50 & 80
Fuse boxes 2 x 11 fuses
4-position starter key -
Dashboard 24 V MC electronic
Engine revolution counter digital
Hourmeter digital
Fuel level level indicator
Coolant temperature Digital temperature gauge
Transmission/steering display digital
Steering valve (q.ty 2) proportional
Transmission control solenoids (q.ty 4) on-off
Reverse signal P.I. 109 dB(A)-1000Hz
Transmission and Steering electronic control unit Rexroth
Two push beams hinged to the track frame by ball joint. hydraulic tilt adjustment and mechanical
BULLDOZER pitch. Equistatic compensator.
EQUIPMENT
Pins
Diameter mm (in) 137.7 to 137.9 (5.3 to 5.4)
Push beams
Beam height mm (in) 305 to 3642 (12 to 143.4)
Diameter of front ball joint mm (in) 138 (5.4)
HSU blade:
Width (blade) mm (in) 3850 (151.6)
Width (tip of corner bits) mm (in) 3975 (156.5)
Height mm (in) 1700 (66.9)
Nominal capacity m3 (ft3) 9.1 (321.4)
Max. lift mm (in) 1220 (48)
Digging depth mm (in) 600 (23.6)
Max. tilt mm (in) 900 (35.4)
Max pitch deg ± 6 ° 30'
Wear components:
Two corner bits + two reversible cutting edges
BULLDOZER Thickness of cutting edges mm (in) 25 (0.9)
EQUIPMENT
Break-up force (lift cylinders) daN 32380
Break-up force (tilt cylinder) daN 49850
Full-U, HU blade:
Height mm (in) 1650 (64.9)
3 3
Nominal capacity m (ft ) 11.35 (400.8)
Max. raising mm (in) 1220 (48)
Penetration into the ground mm (in) 600 (23.6)
Max. tilt mm (in) 980 (38.6)
Max. pitch deg ± 6 ° 30'
Wear components:
Two corner bits + three reversible cutting edges
Thickness of cutting edges mm (in) 25 (0.9)
C-frame, hinged to track frame by ball trunnions

Hydraulic tilt adjustment and mechanically
adjusted pitch.
ANGLEDOZER Side guides (with 711 mm, 28 in shoes)
EQUIPMENT
Height of C-frame
Diameter of front ball trunnion mm (in) 170 (6.7)
Angledozer blade

Height mm (in) 1143 (45)
3 3
Nominal capacity m (ft ) 4,53 (159.9)
Max. lift mm (in) 1140 (44.9)
Digging depth mm (in) 685 (26.9)
ANGLEDOZER
EQUIPMENT Max. tilt mm (in) 470 (18.5)
Tilt deg ± 25 °
Max pitch deg ±5°
Two corner bits + three reversible cutting edges
Thickness of cutting edges mm (in) 25.4 (1)
Model PVD-350
Parallelogram type, actuated by four double stroke cylinders,
equipped with a three position single semi-curve shank with
interchangeable tip
Mass kg (lb) 2960 (6525.7)
Mass of shank kg (lb) 425 (936.9)
Dimensions mm (in) 355 x 90 x 2100 (13.9 x 3.5 x 82.7)
Ground clearance under shank bar
SINGLE with ripper lowered mm (in) ø
SHANK RIPPER Ground clearance under shank bar cyl. extended cyl. retracted
with ripper lifted
position 1 mm (in) 124 (4.9) 584 (23)

position 2 mm (in) 381 (15) 737 (29.1)
position 3 mm (in) 630 (24.8) 1020 (40.1)
Break-up force daN 22000

Penetration force daN 14000
Ripping depth mm (in) 1194 (47)
Ripping width mm (in) 90 (3.5)
Increment of hydraulic oil l 34 (8.9)
TECHNICAL DATA
ENGINE
Net power at flywheel at 2100 rpm (ISO 9249) kW (HP) 299 HP/223 kW
Net power at flywheel at 1800 rpm (ISO 9249) kW (HP) 342 HP/255 kW
Low idle speed rpm 800 to 900
High idle speed rpm 2300 to 2350
Equipment stall rpm 2180 to 2280
Converter/transmission stall rpm 1730 to 1830
Total stall rpm 1528 to 1628
Lubrication
At low idle (minimum allowed) bar (psi) 0.69 (10)
At max. idle (minimum allowed) bar (psi) 1.9 (27.6)
By-pass filter pressure bar (psi) 6.2 (89.9)
Thermostat opening temperature °C (°F) 81° to 83° (177.8 to 181.4)
Fully open thermostat opening pressure °C (°F) 92° (197.6)
Injector pressure bar (psi) 345 to 1900 (5003 to 27557.2)
TRANSMISSION
Main pressure relief valve bar (psi) 16 (232.1)
Converter safety pressure bar (psi) 10 to 11 (145 to 159.5)
Lubrication oil pressure relief valve bar (psi) 2 to 3,5 (29 to 50.8)
Main pressure bar (psi) 14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
First speed pressure bar (psi) 14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Second speed pressure bar (psi) 14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Third speed pressure bar (psi) 14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Fourth speed pressure bar (psi) 14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Reverse pressure bar (psi) 14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
BRAKE SYSTEM
Main pressure relief valve bar (psi) 28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
Safety valve pressure bar (psi) 45 (652.7)
Pressure regulated by brake pedal valve bar (psi) 18 to 22 (261.1 to 319.1)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (accessories/steering)

Piloting pressure bar (psi) 28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
Max. pressure (equipment/steering) bar (psi) 200/350 (2900.7/5076.3)
Pressure in neutral bar (psi) 28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
Pressure in float bar (psi) 28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
Delta LS bar (psi) 20 to 21 (290.1 to 304.6)
Float engagement pressure bar (psi) 25 (362.6)
Unloading valve pressure (@ 10 l/min, 2.6) bar (psi) 28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
UNDERCARRIAGE
Discharge valve pressure bar (psi) 689 (9993.1)
LIST OF WEIGHTS OF MAIN SERVICE COMPONENTS
KG (LB)
Cummins engine QSM11 1160 (2557.4)

Engine complete with torque converter (w/ pumps) 1450 (3196.7)
Intercooler group 52 (114.6)
Main pump 110 (242.5)
Brake pump 10 (22)
Transmission & converter pump 50 (110.2)
Radiator assembly (empty) 233 (513.7)
Universal joint 23 (50.7)
Transmission assembly 725 (1598.3)
Bevel gear set 57.5 (126.8)
Steering module (each) 235 (518.1)
Hydraulic motor 70 (154.3)
Final drive assembly (each) 1210 (2667.6)
Pivot shaft 150 (330.7)
Swing bar 390 (859.8)
Track chain assembly (610 mm, 24 in shoes, 44 elements) 2783 (6135.4)
Track chain assembly (711 mm, 28 in shoes, 44 elements) 3022 (6662.4)
Shoes (610 mm, 24 in each) 32 (70.5)
Shoes (711 mm, 28 in each) 37.6 (82.9)
Track frame assembly 4000 (8818.5)
Track roller (each) 88/96 (194/211.6)
Support roller (each) 51 (112.4)
Idler assembly 308 (679)
Fuel tank (empty) 408 (899.5)
Hydraulic tank 228 (502.6)
Battery (each) 50 (110.2)
Rops canopy 596 (1313.9)
Operator compartment (cab) 450 (992.1)
Canopy (rops) 200 (440.9)
Rear engine hood support 108 (238.1)
Engine hood 37 (81.6)
Front grill assembly 80 (176.4)
Hydraulic control valve 106 (233.7)
Lift cylinder (each) 139 (306.4)
Tilt cylinder 170 (374.8)
Semi-U blade (w/equistatic) 3200 (7054.8)
Push beam and rod (each) 1100 (2425.1)
HA angle blade 1660 (3659.7)
C-frame 1628 (3589.1)
Single shank ripper assembly (without tool) 2960 (6525.7)
Ripper tool 425 (936.9)
Ripper cylinder 140 (308.6)
Main frame (with lower guards) 5040 (11111.3)
STABILITY
POSITION OF THE CENTRE OF GRAVITY D350 PS

In transportation condition WARNING
The machine, as delivered by the plant, is not in-
Note – The centre of gravity depends upon the posi-
tended for any other application and, in particular,
tion of the equipment.
should not be considered for use as a mean for
hooking, lifting or moving suspended loads.
Any different usage, therefore, MUST BE AVOIDED,
MACHINE W/ BLADE & RIPPER LG mm (in) HG mm (in) unless the machine has been originally provided,
by the FK Organisation, with special equipment
W/ blade and ripper on the ground 1680 (66.1)1960 (37.8)
and particular instructions for specific applica-
W/ blade on ground and ripper tions.
1665 (65.5)1990 (38.9)
atmax. height
W/ blade at max. height and ripper

1670 (65.7) 1095 (43.1)
on ground
W/blade at max. height and ripper
1660 (65.3) 1115 (43.9)
at max. height
MACHINE W/ BLADE ONLY
Blade on the ground 1940 (76.4)1880 (34.6)
Blade at max. height 1910 (75.2) 1015 (39.9)
MACHINE W/OUT BLADE

AND W/OUT RIPPER 1465 (57.7) 1000 (39.4)
Note - LG = Horizontal distance from sprocket C/L

HG = Ground clearance
ä
HG
ä
ä
ä
LG
D350M0007
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION OF SEALS CLEANING

FOR ROTATING SHAFTS
After disconnecting the electrical system, clean
Osservate le seguenti avvertenze: accurately all the parts to be disassembled, preferably
using steam.
- prior to installation, keep the seals half an hour
In many repair or service workshops, caustic
dipped into the same oil they are going to seal;
compounds are used to eliminate all traces of grease,
dirt, paint or remains of sealing materials etc. from
- clean accurately the shaft and make sure that its
the parts. These compounds are very useful and
working surface is undamaged;
efficient when used correctly; however they can cause
considerable damages to certain components.
- direct the sealing lip towards the fluid; in case of an
Materials such as aluminium, rubber, fibres, sintered
hydro dynamic lip, the grooves must be oriented
bronze and alloying elements are particularly sensitive
so that the rotating direction of the shaft, tend to
to all highly concentrated caustic compounds.
return the oil inside the seal;
Some heat exchangers are made with aluminium fins.
To clean internally or outside these parts, the use of
- smear the sealing lip with a film of lubricant (oil is
solvents not reacting with aluminium are
preferred to grease);
recommended.
- install the seal into its seat by pressing it or using a
punch with a flat contact face; absolutely avoid
DISASSEMBLY
hammering it;
It is always recommended, for any intervention on
- when pressing the seal, make sure that it is entered engines or other assemblies removed form the
perpendicularly to its seat and once the pressing is machine, that appropriate stands are used.
over, make sure, when requested, that is seated Make available baskets or containers sufficient to
against the shoulder; store all the smaller size parts disassembled. Take
particular care of machined faces of the components,
- in order to avoid damaging the sealing seat with placing them, after the disassembly, on shelves or
the shaft, it is recommended, during the installation wooden blocks.
of the two parts, to insert an appropriate seal. When identical parts are disassembled, such as
valves, tappets etc., place them in appropriate
containers to ensure the same mating order when
INSTALLATION OF O-RINGS reassembling.
Lubricate the seals before placing them into the
relevant seats so as to avoid that, during the
ASSEMBLY
installation, they tend to roll, thus altering their correct
positioning, being furled, causing prejudice to their Clean accurately all the components to be
sealing function. reassembled, as described by the various chapters
of the Manual.
The use of the proper special tools shown in the Manual
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE DISASSEMBLY is recommended.
AND REASSEMBLY OF GROUPS
The following information, of a general nature, are
Note – When applying sealing adhesive compounds,
intended to facilitate the disassembly and reassembly
comply with the instructions provided with commercial
of groups.
products.
Consequently, read and heed them when performing
this type of operations.
The manufacturer prescribes, unless differently

specified, the following adhesive compounds:
RHODORSIL CAF 1, or LOCTITE 510.
Whenever possible, press bushes into their correct
position using a press.
In the event it is necessary to use a hammer to install
a bush, use an appropriate punch to avoid damaging
the bush.
Lubricate ball bearings prior to their installation. Lubri- Max = 0,6 mm
cate the sealing lip of all seals, prior to their installa-
tion.
Whenever possible, install new seals; in particular new
gaskets must be used on engine cylinder heads.
D350R0406
Use screws with the dimensions and grade indicated,
referring to the part number of the Spare Parts Cata-
logue.
When indicated, safety washers, split pins and lock-
ing wires etc. must be used.
Comply with the prescribed tightening torques indi-
cated in the "Tightening torques" section of this
Manual, using an appropriate torque wrench.
Self-locking nuts must be replaced at each disassem-
bly, to ensure a constant good performance against
loosening.
HIGH PRESSURE PIPES, CONNECTIONS,

HOSES AND PIPES Wrong Correct
This chapter provides correct recommendations and

D350R0407
procedures to be followed during the disassembly of
pipes and relevant connections.
- Keep all internal and external threads clean;
- Remove the plugs just before connecting the pipes

and plug at once all open connections.
- Do not use or reuse semi flanges out of shape more

than 0.6 mm (0.02 in) in the centre (see figure).
- Make sure that the seats of O-rings are undamaged. Wrong Correct
- Lubricate all O-Rings.
- Make sure that O-Rings are in place in the relevant

seat. D350R0408
- Tighten regularly so as to avoid distortions or dam-

ages to O-Rings;
- Install pipes and support bands letting the latter

slightly loosen (tighten the band only after tighten-
ing the connections).
- Make sure that the hoses reach the corresponding

part to be connected to without forcing their posi-
tion.
- In the event a hose is mounted straight, let enough

space to absorb contractions caused by pressure.
- Hoses must not be rolled (see figure) or touching

one another or touching other parts, especially if
moving. D350R0409
- Make sure that the dimension of the bands is

appropriate for the outer diameter of the pipe to be
tighten to avoid possible rubbings (see figure).
Wrong
- Do not install bands on small diameter curves, to
avoid that, under pressure, forces are generated in
the pipe (see figure: the dotted lines indicate the
contraction that the hose could be subject to under
the action of the pressure). Correct
- Make sure that bands are installed in a correct po-

sition so that the hose is kept away from obstacles
(see figure).
D350R0410
O-RINGS - Field of application
DESIGNATION BASE ELASTOMER TEMPERATURE FIELD OF APPLICATION

of OPERATION
(*)
MINERAL OIL AND GREASE, COOL-

- 40 to 120°C ANTS, FUEL, WATER UP TO 70°C
(- 40 to 248°F) (158°F), AIR UP TO 100°C (212°F)
NBR NITRIL BUTADIENE

SAME COMPATIBILITY OF NBR 60 "
- 30 to 125°C 75 IRHD, BETTER RESISTANCE TO
(- 22 to 257°F) EXTRUSION, USED ONLY AS STATIC
SEAL
GENERAL FUELS, NON FLAMMABLE

FLUOROCARBON FLUIDS, ACIDS, SOLVENTS, MIN-
FPM (VITON) - 40 to 200°C ERAL OIL
(- 40 to 392°F) TO BE USED WITH TEMPERATURES
> 100°C (212°F)
BRAKE FLUID (DOT 3), STEAM, HOT

WATER, SILICON OIL AND GREASE.
EPDM ETHYLENE PROPYLENE - 40 to 150°C WARNING: NOT TO BE USED WITH
(- 40 to 302°F) MINERAL OIL AND GREASE
AIR, GAS, WATER, HIGH ANILINE

POINT MINERAL OIL, STEAM USED
MVQ SILICON - 60 to 200°C AS STATIC SEAL ONLY
(- 76 to 392°F)
Note – (*) Temperature indicated for static applications, provided as indication only.
O-RING PROPERLY O-RING O-RING O-RING

INSTALLED PRESSURISED EXTRUDED BROKEN
TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERALITIES d) Inspection of the machine

For a fast troubleshooting, we recommend the com- After the test described in item c, stop the machine
pliance with the following rules: and perform a visual inspection. Check whether leak-
ages of fluids, loosening of fixtures, breakages or
a) Knowing the machine various deformations etc. occurred.
It is impossible to research the causes and formula
e) Diagnosis
te a diagnosis of troubles without having a good knowl-
edge of the machine. Thus it is recommended Once the trouble is identified. prepare a list of the
that the descriptions regarding the arrangement and possible causes with the help of the suggestions of
the operation of the various groups provided by the the chapter for the group involved and identify the
Repair Manuals are carefully read. correct one, using practical tests, starting from the
most probable causes and the easiest tests.
b) Inspection with the operator
Many trouble originate from a bad use or insufficient
maintenance. Check with the operator if the machine
was previously subject to the current trouble and even-
tual interventions have been performed with appropri-
ate equipment and genuine spare parts. Also,
check the environmental working conditions of the
machine and make sure that current maintenance is
performed.
c) Operating the machine

The best way to ascertain the conditions of the
machine is to test it under real working conditions.
During such test, check:
- the correct operation of the monitoring instrumen-

tation;
- the performance of the machine;
- eventual odours or signs of overheating;
- noises different from normal operation noises; iden-

tify their origin and the operating conditions during
which they occur.
UNITS OF MEASURE
The units of measure used in this Manual are those CLASSIFICATION OF STANDARD COMPONENTS
adopted by the International System (I. S.) supersed- TO DETERMINE THE TIGHTENING TORQUES
ing those previously used by the M.K.S. system.
Force: decanewton (daN) supersedes kilogram Note – In case, in the different sections, the tighten-
(kg) ing torque is not listed, refer to the table "TIGHTEN-
ING TORQUES", only after identifying exactly the
Pressure: bar, supersedes kg/sqcm
component.
Torque: decanewton x meter (daN - meter) su-
persedes kg-m
The latter is identified by a coded eight digit number,
To convert the units of measure, the following table allowing a complete description of the item.
applies:
Example:
multiply by to obtain I / a b c d e / f g
Force kg 0.9807 daN
Pressure kg/cm2 0.9807 bar

I - Standard index digit
Torque kg m 0.9807 daN m It is always represented by the digit 1. This number
indicates that the item can be fabricated in different
versions, differing for the material and coating.
Note – For current repair needs, the following equiva-
lencies can be considered valid:
kg = daN; kg/sqcm = bar; kgm = daNm. a - b - c - d - e - Standard base digit
It is a number always composed of five digits identi-
fying the dimensional specifications of the item
To convert the units of measure of the International
System into an Anglo Saxon system, please refer to
the following table: f - Material index digit
This digit indicates the material used fro a defined
multiply by to obtain item. Its meaning is indicated in the table to follow.
Mass kg 2.205 Ib
Length mm 0.03937 in. g - Coating index digit

It indicates the coating applied to a defined item.
Pressure bar 14,5 p.s.i.
Torque daN m 7.373 lb.ft
Flow l/min 0.2642 gal/min (US)

9
Temperature °C 9 °C + 32 °F
5
Power kW 1.341 Hp
Capacity l 0.2642 US gal.
Speed Km/h 0.6213 mph
Class of resistance and type of material

Material
index no. (f) FIAT UNI DIN SAE BSI BNA
0 R 40 D - 4S - 4A 1 A 42
1 R 50 5S - 6S 3 P 56
2 R 80 8G 5 T 80
3 R 100 100 10K 8 V 100
4 Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
5 Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium
6 Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper
7 Free for other metal materials
NOTICES
- Lubricate with engine oil the fixtures up to diameter

24, with tallow for larger diameters.
- The tolerance on tightening torques is ± 5%.
- The strength classes R80, R100, R120, must be

intended as follows:
10.9 supersedes R 100
12.9 " R 120

} for screws
10
12
supersedes R 80
supersedes R 100
} for nuts
CDT=cadmium plated;FOSF=phosphatised;ZNT=
zinc plated.
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES
In the event, the tightening torque of bolts and nuts is not specifically indicated in the single sections, the same
can be found in the table listed here below:
NUTS (ZNT) SCREWS (ZNT / DEIDR)
Class of strength: 10 (R 80) Class of strength: 10.9 (R 100)
Diameter normal low type with polyamaide ring Diameter normal autoblocc.
and pitch and pitch ZNT ZNT
normal low type
mm daNm (lb.ft.) daNm (lb.ft.) daNm (lb.ft.) daNm (lb.ft.) mm daNm (lb.ft.) daNm (lb.ft.)
M6 x 1 1.3 (9.6) 1.2 (8.8) - - M6 x 1 1.3 (9.6) -
M8 x 1.25 3.2 (23.6) 2.6 (19.2) 3.9 (28.7) 3.2 (23.6) M8 x 1.25 1.3 (9.6) 3.5 (25.8)
M10 x 1.25 7.2 (53) 5.2 (38.8) 8.2 (60.4) 6.2 (45.7) M10 x 1.25 7.1 (52.3) 7.9 (58.2)
M10 x 1.5 6.5 (47.9) 5 (36.8) 7.7 (56.8) 6 (44.2) M10 x 1.5 6.5 (47.9) 7 (51.6)
M12 x 1.25 13 (95.8) 8.7 (64.1) 14.5 (106.9) 10.2 (75.2) M12 x 1.25 12.7 (93.6) 13.9 (102.5)
M12 x 1.75 11 (81.1) 8.1 (59.7) 12.9 (95.1) 9.6 (70.8) M12 x 1.75 11 (81.1) 12 (88.5)
M14 x 1.5 19.5 (143.8) 13 (95.8) 21.6 (159.2) 15 (110.6) M14 x 1.5 20 (147.5) 22 (162.2)
M14 x 2 18 (132.7) 12.5 (92.2) 20 (147.5) 14.6 (107.6) M14 x 2 18 (132.7) 19 (140.1)
M16 x 1.5 30 (221.2) 17 (125.3) 34 (250.7) 20 (147.5) M16 x 1.5 30 (221.2) 33 (243.3)
M16 x 2 - - - - M16 x 2 - -
M18 x 1.5 45 (331.8) 25 (184.3) 50 (368.6) 29 (213.8) M18 x 1.5 45 (331.8) 48 (353.9)
M18 x 2.5 - - - - M18 x 2.5 - -
M20 x 1.5 60 (442.3) 30.5 (224.9) 64.5 (475.5) 35 (258) M20 x 1.5 60 (442.3) 65 (479.2)
M20 x 2.5 - - - - M20 x 2.5 - -

M22 x 1.5 80 (589.8) 41 (302.2) - - M22 x 1.5 80 (589.8) 90 (663)
M22 x 2.5 - - - - M22 x 2.5 - -
M24 x 2 100 (737.3) 47 (346.5) 108 (796.2) 52.5 (387) M24 x 2 100 (737.3) 110 (811)
M24 x 3 - - - - M24 x 3 - -
M27 x 2 95 (700.4) 40.1 (295.6) - - M27 x 2 100 (737.3) -

M30 x 2 130 (958.4) 49.9 (368) - - M30 x 2 140 (1032) -
M33 x 2 170 (1253.4) - - - M33 x 2 190 (1400.9) -

-
M36 x 3 220 (1622.1) - - - M36 x 3 240 (1769.5)
SECTION 1
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER SUBJECT PAGE
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 1-3
1.2 SERIES "Q" ENGINE DATA ................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3 DIAGRAMS OF SERIES "Q" ENGINE ................................................................................. 1-8
1.4 MOUNTING OF ENGINE ON FRAME ................................................................................. 1-11
1.5 DIAGNOSTICS FOR CUMMINS ENGINES QSM11............................................................ 1-12
1.6 FAN AFTERCOOLER CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................ 1-17
1.7 THROTTLE LINKAGE ......................................................................................................... 1-19

1-2 ENGINE D350
D350 ENGINE 1-3
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. The Series Q engine is a diesel for heavy duty ap-

plications characterised by several design concepts
tending towards simplicity and a high compactness.
D350R0069
Length Width Height Weight

mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) Kg (lb)
Series Q 1340 848 1185 1160
(52.7) (33.4) (46.6) (2557.4)
2. The engine incorporates, in a single solution, all

the most important characteristics and advantages
of modern diesel technology. TECHNOLOGY
• In-line cylinders
• Water cooled
• 4 stroke
• Turbocharger with aftercooler
• Double impulse direct injection
• Metric dimensions
• Air flow cooling
3. The engine has been entirely designed with metric

dimensions. the only discrepancy with these speci-
fications involves the use of connections for pipes ENGINE COMPONENTS
and plugs with SAE standards. The specifications
of accessories change depending upon the Sup- • Metric specifications
plier. Technical publications list metric values with
the equivalent SAE values.
PIPES CONNECTIONS
AND PLUGS
• SAE standards
1-4 ENGINE D350
IDENTIFICATION OF THE ENGINE
Engine data plate

The engine data plate provides the identification data
and other important information about the engine.
Have the engine data here below available when con-

tacting a Cummins Authorised Repair Centre. The in-
formation data on the plate are compulsory when pro-
curing Spare Parts.
1. Serial number of the engine (E.S.N.)

2. Control Parts List (CPL)
3. Model
Note – Do not change the engine data plate unless

authorised by Cummins Engine Company, Inc.
1 3
2
D350M0003
IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION :
Engine No. 35048946 Advert. Power HP/KW at
330/246 2100
RPM Idle Speed RPM
650 - 1000 NOx FEL This engine conforms to
U.S. EPA and California Tier 2 and EU
Family 1CEXLO661AAC CID/L
661/10.8 PM FEL 2001 Stage II regulations for heavy
duty nonroad compression ignition diesel cycle
FR Fuel rate at Advert. Power mm 3 engines as applicable.
Inj. Timing
155 KV ins
stroke THIS ENGINE IS CERTIFIED TO
mm
Date of Mfg. Inj. Set IN/mm CPL OPERATE ON DIESEL FUEL.
.025 LASH 2828 Cu Warranty Start Date
11/01
Model Valve Lash Cold IN/mm Int. WARNING; Injury may result and warranty is voided if
QSM11-C .025 / .356 .027/.686 Exh. fuel rate, RPM, or altitudes exceed published maximum
values for this model and application.
Ref. No. Cummins Engine Company, Inc.
S052008 Assembled in the U.S.A.
4060493
D350M0002
4. The Cummins engine nomenclature provided the

following data as illustrated in the diagram. QSM 11 - C 335
Note – The following digits designate some applica-

tions of the Cummins engine for different markets.
= Power at dynamometer
• A = agriculture brake
= Market application (see note)
• C = construction
• M = marine. = Total displacement (Litres)
= Engine model description
5. The total displacement of the engine is 10.82 litres

(2.8 gal.), the bore is 125 mm (4.9 in) and the stroke
147 mm (5.8 in).
The firing order is the same as for the other in-line, ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
6 cylinder Cummins engines, 1-5-3-6-2-4.
Total displacement 10.82 litri (2,8 gal.)
Bore 125 mm (4.9 in)
Stroke 147 mm (5.8 in)
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
D350 ENGINE 1-5
1.2 SERIES "QSM 11" ENGINE DATA
Generalities
Bore ......................................................................................................... 125 mm (4.9 in)

Stroke ...................................................................................................... 147 mm (5.8 in)
Total displacement ................................................................................... 10.8 litres (28 gal.)
Max. power rated speed ........................................................................... 1800/2100 rpm
Net power at flywheel (SAE J1349) .......................................................... 272/246 Kw [364.7/329.9 HP]
Maximum torque ...................................................................................... 167.4 daNm (1234.2 lb.ft.) (at 1360 rpm)
Engine speed at idle with different stalls
Low idle .............................................................................................. 800 ± 50 rpm
High idle .............................................................................................. 2350 ± 50 rpm
Equipment stall ................................................................................... 2230 ± 50 rpm
Converter stall .................................................................................... 1780 ± 50 rpm
Total stall (equipment + converter) ...................................................... 1578 ± 50 rpm
Compression ratio .................................................................................... 16.3 : 1
Firing order ............................................................................................... 1-5-3-6-2-4

Valve clearance
Intake ................................................................................................. 0.36 mm (0.014 in)
Exhaust .............................................................................................. 0.69 mm (0.027 in)
Engine rotation (seen from front side of engine) ....................................... Clockwise
Intake ...................................................................................................... Turbocharged
Engine weight (with standard accessories)

Dry ...................................................................................................... 1124 kg (2477.9 lb)
Filled (with engine fluids) ..................................................................... 1160 kg (2557.4 lb)
Lubrication system
Oil pressure
At low idle (minimum allowed) ............................................................... 0,69 bar (10 psi)
At nominal rpm (minimum allowed) ....................................................... 2 bar (29 psi)
Pressure differential for oil filter by-pass valve opening ............................... 6,2 bar (89.9 psi)
Oil flow at rated speed (minus the flow through the pressure relief) ............. 176 lt/min (46.5 gpm)
Oil temperature at rated spee ...................................................................... 121 °C (249.8°F)
Oil temperature thermostat
Fully open (oil flowing through heat exchanger) ..................................... 106 °C (222.8°F)
Oil sump capacity (all engines) (high - low) ................................................. 30 to 34 lt (7.2 to 8.9 gal.)
Total capacity of system ............................................................................. 35 lt (9.2 gal.)
1-6 ENGINE D350
Cooling system
Thermostats
Beginning of opening:..................................................................... From 82 to 93 °C (from 179.6 to 199.4°F)
Fully open: ..................................................................................... 96 °C (204.8°F)
Temperature of upper tank
Maximum allowed: ......................................................................... 100 °C (212°F)
Minimum recommended: ................................................................ 70 °C (158°F)
Cap pressure with system at 99°C (210°F) .......................................... 0.42 bar (6.1 psi)
Cap pressure with system at 104°C (220°F) ........................................ 1.3 bar (18.8 psi)
Coolant pressure (Upper manifold) at rated speed of 2000 rpm ........... From 1.3 to 2.7 bar
(from 18.8 to 39.2 psi)
Coolant flow (thermostats fully open,
at rated speed of 2000 rpm) ........................................................... 438 lt/min (115.7 gpm)
Coolant capacity ................................................................................. 9.5 lt (2.5 gal.)
Intake and exhaust
Maximum restriction allowed at nominal speed and load

(with dry air cleaner element) ......................................................... 63.5 cm H2O (12.3 psi)
Maximum restriction turbocharger outlet at intake
manifold inlet ................................................................................. 152 mm Hg (2.9 psi)
Maximum restriction after-cooler radiator outlet ................................... 152 mm Hg (2.9 psi)
Fuel system
Maximum restriction at fuel pump inlet ................................................ 203 mm Hg (3.9 psi)

Minimum output pressure of fuel pump at rated speed
low delivery .................................................................................... 10.3 bar (149.4 psi)
high delivery .................................................................................. 12.4 bar (179.8 psi)
Restriction on fuel return (maximum) ................................................... 63 mm Hg (1.2 psi)
D350 ENGINE 1-7
Electrical system
System voltage Ambient temperature
-18 °C (-0.4°F) 0 °C (32°F)
Cold starting Reserve Cold starting Reserve

Amp Cap.1 Amp Amp Cap.1 Amp
24 Volt 900 320 640 240
1. The quantity of plates for a determined size of batteries determines its capacity.
The reserve capacity determines the duration of the period during which a sustained starting is maintained.
2. The CCA specifications are based upon two 12-Volt batteries in series.
Batteries (Specific gravity)
Specific gravity at Charge status

27 °C (80 °F)
1.260 - 1.280 100%

1.230 - 1.250 75%
1.200 - 1.220 50%
1.170 - 1.190 25%
1.110 - 1.130 Exhausted
1-8 ENGINE D350
1.3 DIAGRAMS OF SERIES "QSM 11-C" ENGINE
The illustrations here below provide information on the The illustrations and the configuration of the compo-
engine components, the location of filters, the drain- nents shown in these diagrams are of a general na-
ing points and the access locations for engine instru- ture. The locations of some components change de-
mentation and controls. pending upon the application and the installation.
For the removal, inspection, overhaul and reinstallation of the

engine, please refer to the specific manuals for this type
of engine contacting the Service Network.
Air manifold Oil filler neck

(after after-cooler) Dipstick
Fuel filter
ECM data
plate
Engine
coolant filter
Oil draining
plug
D350R0056
Fig. 1-8 View from injection pump side
D350 ENGINE 1-9
Turbocharger
exhaust outlet
Flywheel
housing
Centring
bearing seat
Flex disc
mounting holes
Flywheel
D350R0057
Fig. 1-9 Rear view
Coolant filter
Alternator
Belt Drive belt

tensioner
Compressor drive
pulley
Drive
pulley
D350R0058
Fig. 1-10 Front view
1 - 10 ENGINE D350
Air manifold
Air manifold (before
(after after-cooler) after-cooler)
Alternator
Exhaust
manifold
Turbocharger
Oil
sump
Starter
motor
D350R0059
Fig. 1-11 View from turbocharger side
D350 ENGINE 1 - 11
1.4 MOUNTING OF ENGINE ON FRAME
C1
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C5
C1
C4
C4
C1
C2
C3
C2
C4 C3
C6 C3
C2 D350R0060
Tightening torques
C1. Nut EM16 x 1,5 .................... (47.5 to 52.5 daNm) (350.2 to 387.1 lb.ft.)
C2. Screw TE M24 x 2 x90 ......... EM16 x 1,5
C3. Self-locking nut .................... (22.5 to 25 daNm) (165.9 to 184.3 lb.ft.)
C4. Screw TE M16 x 1,5 x 45
C5. Screw TE M16 x 1,5 ............ (32 to 32.5 daNm) (235.9 to 239.6 lb.ft.)
C6. Screw TE M10 ..................... (6.8 to 6.85 daNm) (50.1 to 50.5 lb.ft.)
1 - 12 ENGINE D350
1.5 DIAGNOSING THE ENGINES

CUMMINS QSM11
The QSM11 engine is equipped with an electronic Method

controller capable of self-diagnosing possible troubles Engine inoperative
occurring during the operation (electronic control Mod- Key on second step (ON)
ule). "Diagnosis" switch in ON
A panel with a signal indicator is located behind the
operator's seat in the cab that can be reached by re- Possible results:
moving a panel with screws. 1. Indicator lights Warning and Stop come ON and
stay ON until the "diagnosis" switch is returned to
FUNCTIONS: OFF. This behaviour indicates the absence of ac-
Test tive error codes and it is possible to return the "Di-
Every time the engine controller is activated a test of agnosis" switch into OFF and start the engine.
the integrity of the 3 indicator lights, staying ON for a
2. In the event error codes are memorised, on the
few seconds, is performed.
other hand, the Warning indicator flashes once,
then the red indicator flashes the three digits of the
Diagnosis
first active error code. As an example, if the first
By actuating the switch "Diagnosis" it is possible to active code is 431, there is:
check the operation of the engine controller and to verify
the presence of active error codes. a. 1 flash of the Warning indicator
b. 4 flashes of the Stop indicator
c. pause
d. 3 flashes of the Stop indicator
e. pause
f. 1 flash of the Stop indicator
g. pause
ON
ENGINE
DIAGNOSTIC
DIAGNOSTIC
INCREMENT
STOP ON
Fig. 1-7
CUMMINS ENGINE QSM11 - LIST OF ERROR CODES (ECM 570)
D350
ERROR COLOUR
INDICATOR EFFECT
CODE INDICATOR
111 Red Internal trouble of ECM controller correlated to hardware memory defects The engine fails to start.
or to supply voltage of controller inner circuits.
115 Red No signal measured on both engine position and speed sensor. The engine is cut-off and fails to start.
121 Yellow No signal measured on one of the two engine position and speed sensors. No effect on engine performances.
122 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on intake manifold air pressure sensor circuit. Reduced engine power.
123 Yellow Low voltage measured on intake manifold air pressure sensor circuit. Reduced engine power.
131 Red Excessive voltage measured on circuit relative to throttle pedal position. Heavy reduction of power and swing speed.
Operating mode "LIMP HOME".
132 Red Low voltage measured on circuit relative to throttle pedal position. Heavy reduction of power and swing speed.
Operating mode "LIMP HOME".
135 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on engine oil pressure circuit. No engine protection on for low oil pressure.
ENGINE
141 Yellow Low voltage measured on engine oil pressure circuit. No engine protection on for low oil pressure.
143 Yellow The engine oil pressure signal indicates a pressure below the lower limit. Progressive reduction of power and swing speed.
If engine protection is activated, the engine is cut-off after
30 seconds from beginning of flashing of indicator light.
144 Yellow Excessive voltage measured of coolant temperature sensor. Possible white smoke. No engine protection for
coolant temperature.
145 Yellow Low voltage measured of coolant temperature sensor. Possible white smoke. No engine protection for
coolant temperature.
151 Red The coolant temperature signal indicates a value higher than 104 °C (220°F). Progressive reduction of power and swing speed.
153 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on intake manifold air temperature sensor circuit. Possible white smoke. No engine protection for
intake air temperature.
154 Yellow Low voltage measured on intake manifold air temperature sensor circuit. Possible white smoke. No engine protection for
intake air temperature.
155 Red The intake manifold air temperature signal indicates a value higher than Progressive reduction of power and swing speed.
93.3°C (200°F). If engine protection is activated, the engine is cut-off after
1 - 13
CUMMINS ENGINE QSM11 - LIST OF ERROR CODES (ECM 570) 1 - 14
ERROR COLOUR
INDICATOR EFFECT
CODE INDICATOR
187 Yellow Low voltage measured on ECM supply lines toward some sensors s verso. The engine is de-rated. No protection for oil pressure
and coolant level.
212 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on engine oil temperature sensor. No engine protection for oil temperature.
213 Yellow Low voltage measured on engine oil temperature sensor. No engine protection for oil temperature.
214 Red The engine oil temperature signal indicates a value exceeding 124 °C (255 °F). Progressive reduction of power and swing speed.
221 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on ambient temperature sensor circuit. Reduction of engine power.
222 Yellow Low voltage measured on ambient temperature sensor circuit. Reduction of engine power.
227 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on ECM supply lines toward some sensors s verso. The engine is de-rated. No protection for oil pressure
and coolant level.
234 Red The signal coming from sped sensor indicates a value exceeding 2650 rpm. The fuel SHUT-OFF valve
stays closed until the speed decreases. the valve
re-opens once the speed returns below
2000 rpm.
254 Red Voltage lower than 6 VDC measured on Shut Off solenoid valve supply circuit. ECM de-energises the Shut Off valve and cuts off
or defects on output current from ECM toward actuators. the engine.
255 Yellow ECM outer supply voltage measured on Shut Off valve solenoid. No effect on engine performance.
ENGINE
The Shut-Off remains energised. The Shut-Off remains energised.

311 Yellow Current measured on solenoid of injector solenoid of cylinder 1 when The injector of cylinder 1 is de-activated.
it should be deactivated.
322 Yellow No current measured on injector of cylinder 1 when it should The injector of cylinder 1 is deactivated.
be energised.
be energised.
be energised.
D350
CUMMINS ENGINE QSM11 - LIST OF ERROR CODES (ECM 570)
D350
ERROR COLOUR
INDICATOR EFFECT
CODE INDICATOR
325 Yellow No current measured on injector of cylinder 6 when it should be energised. The injector of cylinder 6 is deactivated.
341 Yellow Significant loss of data from ECM internal memor. Possible effects on performance not felt, or engine
is cut-off or difficult engine starting.
Diagnostic information can be inaccurate.
343 Yellow Internal ECM trouble. Possibly no effects on performance or heavy
power loss.
352 Yellow Low voltage measured on supply electronic circuit for some The engine is de-rated.
sensors inside the ECM controller.
386 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on supply electronic circuit for some The engine is de-rated.
sensors inside the ECM controller.
415 Red The engine oil pressure signal indicates a value highly below its lower limit. Progressive reduction of power and swing speed.
ENGINE
If engine protection is activated, the engine is cut-off

after 30 seconds from beginning of flashing
of indicator light.
418 Mainten. Water is monitored in fuel filter. Possible white smoke, loss of power or difficult starting.
(Blue)
419 Yellow Error measured on signal coming from intake air pressure sensor. The engine is de-rated.
428 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on water in fuel (WIF) sensor circuit. No effect on performances.
429 Yellow Low voltage measured on water in fuel (WIF) sensor circuit. No effect on performances.
431 Yellow No voltage measured simultaneously on pins relative to "idle on" No effect on performances.
(throttle pedal released) and "idle off" (throttle pedal pressed) circuits
432 Red Voltage measured on "idle on" (throttle pedal released) when Engine runs at idle only.
throttle pedal is pressed.
433 Yellow The signal of intake air pressure sensor indicates high pressure, The engine is de-rated.
whereas other engine parameters require a lower air.
1 - 15
CUMMINS ENGINE QSM11 - LIST OF ERROR CODES (ECM 570) 1 - 16
ERROR COLOUR
INDICATOR EFFECT
CODE INDICATOR
434 Yellow Supply voltage to ECM dropped below 6.2 V for a split second or the ECM Possible effects on performance not felt, or engine is
is prevented from cutting-off. cut-off or difficult engine starting.
Diagnostic information can be inaccurate.
435 Yellow Error on engine oil pressure measured by ECM. No effect on performances. No engine protection for
low oil pressure.
441 Yellow Battery voltage below normal operational level. Possible effects on performance not felt, or
irregular operation at idle speed is possible.
442 Yellow Battery voltage above normal operational level. No effect on performances.
443 Yellow Low voltage measured on ECM supply circuit to throttle potentiometer. Engine runs at idle only.
551 Yellow No voltage measured simultaneously "idle on" Engine runs at idle only.
(throttle pedal released) and "idle off" (throttle pedal pressed) circuits.
581 Yellow Excessive voltage measured on pin of fuel inlet clogging sensor. Fuel inlet clogging monitoring de-activated.
582 Yellow Voltage measured on pin of fuel inlet clogging sensor. Fuel inlet clogging monitoring de-activated.
583 Yellow Obstruction at fuel inlet monitored by clogging sensor. Fuel inlet clogging monitoring alarm is activated.
ENGINE
596 Yellow Excessive battery voltage measured by battery voltage feature. The yellow indicator light stays ON until normal battery
voltage value is re-established.
598 Red Excessively low battery voltage monitored by battery voltage feature. The red indicator light stays ON until battery voltage
value is re-established.
The red indicator light stays ON until battery voltage
value is re-established.
611 None The engine has been cut-off by the operator before reaching idle speed No intervention by ECM.
regime.
775 Mainten. A slow leakage is detected in the turbo-charging system. No effect on performances.
(Blue)
776 Yellow A fast leakage is detected in the turbo-charging system. No effect on performances.
951 None Unbalance of the power sharing on cylinders found. The engine could have an irregular idle speed
or jumping in firing order.
D350
D350
Sequence
valve
110 ± 2 bar
(1595.4 ± 29 psi)
with 21.8 lt/min
(5.8 gpm)
Gear motor
10.8 cu cm/rev.
8.4 cu cm/rev.
Gear pump
23 ± 1 bar
(333.6 ± 14.5 psi)
ENGINE
with 18.5 lt/min

(4.9 gpm)
Counter
pressure
valve
1.6 FAN AFTERCOOLER CONTROL SYSTEM
Tank
D350R0065
1 - 17
1 - 18 ENGINE D350
2
3
D350R0066
1. Gear motor - 2. Sequence valve - 3. Counter pressure valve - 4. Radiator - 5. Support - 6. Brake pump.
D350 ENGINE 1 - 19
1.7 THROTTLE LINKAGE
The control is an electric type and is composed of:

- q.ty 1 lever (A) potentiometer control (B) having the MIN
accelerator function.
- q.ty 1 decelerator pedal complete with potentiometer
(C).
A
MAX
The two components are installed in the cab in front
of the operator on the right side.
A - Control lever
B - Potentiometer "Williams Controls "Type WM531-
13032 B
C - Decelerator "Williams Controls "Type WM540-
13157
D350R0067
MIN
D350R0068
SECTION 2
TRANSMISSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAGE
2.1 OPERATION OF CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ........................... 2-3

2.1.1 Supply and scavenging ..................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.2 Torque converter ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Cooling, lubrication and flushing ........................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.4 Gearshifting 1st - 3rd - AV - IN ............................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.5 Speed engagement ........................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.6 Quick discharge valve ....................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2 HYDRAULIC TORQUE CONVERTER ................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.1 Removal of torque converter from the machine ................................................................. 2-7
2.2.2 Disassembly of torque converter ...................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.3 Inspection of parts and reassembly ................................................................................. 2-17
2.3 CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION OIL FILTERS .................................................................... 2-21
2.4 TRANSMISSION .............................................................................................................. 2-22

2.4.1 Removal of the transmission from the machine ................................................................2-22
2.4.2 Disassembly of clutches .................................................................................................. 2-31
2.4.3 Inspection of parts disassembled .....................................................................................2-34
2.4.4 Reassembly of transmission ............................................................................................ 2-35
2.4.5 Transmission lubrication oil pressure relief valve .............................................................. 2-39
2.4.6 Reinstallation of transmission .......................................................................................... 2-40
2.5 CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION OIL FILTERS .................................................................... 2-43
2.6 CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION-CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION

OIL SCAVENGER HYDRAULICPUMP ................................................................................ 2-44
2.6.1 Overhaul .......................................................................................................................... 2-44
2.7 TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE ................................................................................... 2-49

2.7.1 Removal and disassembly ............................................................................................... 2-49
2.7.2 Inspection of parts disassembled .....................................................................................2-51
2.7.3 Reassembly of control valve ............................................................................................ 2-51
2.7.4 Hydraulic tests of control valve on bench .........................................................................2-52
2.8 GEARSHIFT CONTROL...................................................................................................... 2-53

2.8.1 Transmission gearshift buttons and safety lever ............................................................... 2-53
2.8.2 Disassembly of gearshift components .............................................................................. 2-54
2.9 TRANSMISSION OIL RADIATOR ........................................................................................2-55

2.9.1 Cleaning and inspection of tightness of heat exchanger ................................................... 2-55
2-2 TRANSMISSION D350
2.10 TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................................................2-56

2.10.1 Troubles, causes, remediesi .............................................................................................2-56
2.10.2 Test of converter-transmission group on machine ............................................................2-60
2.10.3 Gearshifting test and converter stallingo .......................................................................... 2-60
2.10.4 Check of transmission-converter pressures .....................................................................2-60
2.10.5 Pump delivery test ........................................................................................................... 2-60
2.10.6 Torque converter safety valve setting test ........................................................................2-61
2-11 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA .............................................................................................2-62
2-12 TIGHTENING TORQUES ....................................................................................................2-66
2-13 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................................................2-67
D350 TRANSMISSION 2-3
2.1 OPERATION OF TORQUE CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2.1.1 SUPPLY AND SCAVENGING ing the converter, thus, the neutral general pressure
required to gradually engaging the transmission
The supply to the circuit is provided by a three sec- clutches as well.
tion pump (Pa, Pc, Pr, fig. 2-1) respectively for the The activation of indicator light (Sc) located on the
supply of the transmission-converter, the supply to dashboard, signals an insufficient lubrication pres-
the converter, the scavenging of the oil from the trans- sure.
mission housing, flanged on the converter housing In the event this occurs and the light stays ON with
support. the engine in operation, it is necessary to stop the
The oil tank is made by a portion of the transmission machine at once and investigate the problem in ac-
housing in which the oil is separated from the oil oc- cordance with the instructions listed by the relevant
cupying the gear and clutch compartment and it is paragraph.
kept low by scavenger pump (Pc) sucking through a Safety valve (18) limits the pressure in the lubrica-
filter with magnetic elements and supplying the above tion circuit by opening when the pressure value ex-
tank together with the oil scavenged from the con- ceeds 4 bar with the transmission in neutral. The oil
verter compartment, obtained by the depression is then collected in the gear compartment, filtered
("VENTURI" effect) from connection (V). by magnetic filter (Fr) and is sucked by scavenger
The oil in the transmission housing tank is sucked by pump (Pr) transferring it into the tank compartment.
twin pumps (Pa and Pc). Pump (Pa) has the function
of generating the pressure controlling the transmis-
sion. pump (Pc) has the purpose of sending an oil
2.1.4 GEARSHIFTING 1st - 3rd - AV - IN
flow into the converter added to the flow coming from
the same control pump (Pa). The gearshifting is provided by buttons controlling
the transmission electrically through an electronic
controller providing the engagement of solenoids
2.1.2 TROQUE CONVERTER powered by pump (Pa).
When the safety lever is in position "UNLOCKED"
With the transmission engaged, the torque converter the oil flowing from valve (26) power directly the so-
is supplied by the addition of the flow of pump (Pc) lenoids. When valve lever (25) is in position
and the flow from pump (Pa) through the upper gap of "LOCKED" the oil that previously was supplied to
the transmission oil pressure relief valve (11). With the pilot valve, is discharged.
the transmission disengaged, the converter flow is Valve (26) provides, when in neutral and the engine
reduced since a portion of the flow of pump (Pa) passes at low rpm, a pressure sufficient for a correct opera-
through the lower gap of pressure relief valve (11) di- tion of pushers (12 - 15) through the control sole-
rectly to the lubrication. noids.
2.1.3 COOLING, LUBRICATION AND

2.1.5 ENGAGEMENT OF SPEEDS
FLUSHING
The oil sucked by pump (Pa) passes into filter (Fm)
The lubrication circuit is supplied by the oil coming equipped with a paper made replaceable filtering ele-
out the converter that, with the transmission engaged, ment and safety pump (16) protecting it in case of
corresponds to the addition of the flows of pumps (Pc) clogging. The valve operates in the event the filtering
and (Pa) minus leakages and small spills. element causes an abnormal pressure drop and its
The oil coming out the converter is cooled by radiator function is to ensure under all conditions, an oil flow
(S) moves into the transmission housing and is dis- excluding partially or totally the cartridge, prevent-
tributed in the shaft and clutches lubrication ducts. ing its laceration.
Temperature gauge (T) located on the dashboard indi- When gearshift button (5) is in neutral position, the
cates the temperature of the oil measured before the oil coming from pomp (Pa) flows out transmission oil
heat exchanger. pressure relief valve (11) from both gaps; the upper
When the transmission is in neutral the plunger of one connected to the torque converter, the lower one
transmission oil pressure relief valve (11) is moved connected to the transmission lubrication circuit.
downward, as explained in paragraph 2.1.4. Under these conditions, the oil provided by pump (Pa)
In this manner also the lower gap of valve (11) is un- is at low pressure, since the plunger of valve (11) is
covered thus reducing the oil pressure of the oil enter- only subject to the action of the pump.
Also, during the neutral phase, the oil flowing out the Starting from this moment, under the effect of the
solenoid diverter keeps the second speed engaged, combined load by the two springs, the pressure regu-
being the two pushers (12 and 15) centred. lated by the modulating valve increases sharply to
During the first phase of the control button from neu- the maximum value of the system operating pressure.
tral into first reverse ball (15) and spool (12) move Orifice (23) provides small flows to be controlled by
providing the supply to spool (6) first and then to spool the modulating valve. The same sequence occurs
(19). Restriction (28) provides the priority to the en- when other gearshifting occur both forward and re-
gagement of the "reverse" of the solenoid, whereas verse.
ball (20) positioned as illustrated, provides the supply The function of the two modulating valves is there-
to the "reverse" duct. fore to:
Ball valve (9) prevents the pressure to discharge
through the actuating duct of the FORWARD speed, - regulate through time the increment of the clutch
which is in discharge. At this point, the operation of control pressure, to make the engagement gradual
the modulating valve of the reverse starts, as de-
scribed here below. - limit the maximum pressure for the control of the
The oil pressure that, as described here above, is transmission.
initially low, moves also under valve (11) helping the
pressure to create the pressure to be regulated that,
therefore, increases with respect to the initial value
determined by the spring only. 2.1.6 QUICK DISCHARGE VALVES (24)
Also, the same pressure reaches under the piston of
modulating valve (7) causing the beginning of its stroke The quick discharge valves, one for each speed clutch,
upward, thus the compression of the outer spring that, have the main purpose of providing the direct discharge
by actuating plunger (21) determines a gradual incre- of the oil into the gear compartment of the transmis-
ment of the pressure in the engagement circuit. sion when the pressure reaches zero value, eliminat-
Orifice (22) provides the setting of the time taken by ing the centrifugal effect of the oil inside the control
piston (7) to run its stroke until it touches the inner chamber that has the tendency to keep the clutch
spring that is pre-charged. engaged, causing unnecessary stresses.
D350 2-5
TRANSMISSION D350
Display Satellite
26
(Microcontroller)
Sc T P
15
28 9 20
17
12
11
23 10
19
21
Fm 18 8
C Fm 7
13 D 4
I A 6
22
16
3
V 22 1
Pc Pa Pr
24
S
p.
p.
c.
c.
s.
s.
l.l.
Fa Fr D350R0183
st
Fig. 2-1 Torque converter-transmission hydraulic system diagram with 1 REVERSE speed engaged
A. Forward speed engagement - C. Torque converter - Fa. Transmission-converter (Pa) and converter (Pc) supply pump suction filter - Fm.Transmission- converter supply pump delivery filter - Fr. Magnetic filter on scavenger pump suction (Pr) for oil scavenging from gear
compartment - D. Transmission control valve - I. Reverse speed engagement - P. Control oil pressure gauge - Pa. Transmission-converter supply pump - Pc. Converter supply pump - Pr. Oil scavenger pump - S. Transmission oil radiator - Sc. Lube oil low pressure indicator - T. Lube
oil temperature gauge - V. Converter scavenging suction connection - 1. First speed - 2. Second speed - 3. Third speed - 4. Third spool - 5. Gearshift solenoid valves - 6. First spool - 7. Modulating valve piston - 8. Second spool - 9. Block valve - 10. Forward spool - 11. Transmission
pressure relief valve - 12. Gearshift spool - 13. Converter pressure relief/safety valve - 15. Pusher - 16. Filter safety valve (Fm) - 17. Block balls - 18. Lube circuit safety valve - 19. Reverse spool - 20. Block valve - 21. Modulating valve plunger - 22. Orifice-check for modulating valve
- 23. Orifice for flow reduction - 24. Quick discharge valves - 26. Interceptor valve in neutral - 28. Orifice - Colour code: p = oil under pressure - c = converter circulating oil - s = suction or discharge oil - l = lube oil.
2.2 HYDRAULIC TORQUE CONVERTER
This chapter deals with the overhaul of the torque C1 1

converter, the operation relative to the hydraulic cir-
cuit is described together with the transmission cir-
cuit in section 6 "DOZER EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC
2
SYSTEM".
2.2.1 REMOVAL OF CONVERTER FROM

THE MACHINE
3
4 D350R0073
WARNING
Fig. 2-2 Torque converter
Handle all parts with utmost care. do not stick
hands and fingers between parts. C1. Screws securing the torque converter to the engine -1.
Torque converter - 2. Equipment pump - 3. Brakes pump -
4. propeller shaft.
Remove the cab and drain the transmission and
equipement oil (Refer to MAINTENANCE MANUAL)
Note – Illustration fig. 2-3 represents the lifting of the

torque converter from the machine without the trans- A
mission. The same operation can be performed with
the transmission mounted, removing first the hydrau-
lic pumps flanged on the torque converter cover
Operate as follows:
- disconnect the hydraulic pipes form the torque con-

verter;
- remove propeller shaft (4, fig. 2-2); 1
- apply bracket (A, fig. 2-3) on the transmission drive

sleeve cover.
WARNING
Lift and handle all heavy components with a lift-
ing device of appropriate capacity.
Make sure that all parts are attached to appropri-
ate slings and hooks. Use the lifting eyes provid-
ed for this purpose.
Beware of persons standing in the vicinity of the D350R0184
load to be lifted.
Fig. 2-3 Removal of the torque converter from the
machine
A. Lifting bracket 380000961 and 380000960 - 1. Torque
converter.
- remove screws (C, fig. 2-2) securing the converter 1 2 3

cover and remove it from the assembly;
Note – In the event the separation from the engine

block is difficult, use the appropriate threaded hole
(m10 x 1,25 mm, 0.05 in) to facilitate the extraction.
- mount the group on the stand (fig. 2-4);
- remove all pumps (1, 3, 4), valve (2) and sleeve (5)
of fig. 2-4;
- turn the torque converter cover upside down and

remove screws (C1 Fig. 2-4) securing the stator sup- 5 C1 4 D350R0185
port hub;
Fig. 2-4
- remove cover (1 fig. 2-5) and using a chain secured
to the screws securing the converter centring cover,
lift the group (fig. 2-6);
Note – When lifting, ensure that the gear teeth (1, fig.
2-6) driving the hydraulic pumps, do not force against
the relevant teeth of the converter drive gear.
D350R0186
Fig. 2-5
D350R0187
Fig. 2-6
2
11 12 13
3
4 7
5 13 15 10
6
8
14 14
9 8
9
10
17
11
12 16
18
a) b) c)
D350R0188
Fig. 2-7 Sections of hydraulic pump drives on torque converter cover
a. Equipment pumps drive - b. Converter-transmission pump drive - c. Fan drive, aftercooler pump drive - 1. Spacer - 2.
Bearing - 3. Sleeve - 4. Elastic ring - 5. Splined sleeve - 6. Elastic ring - 7. Gear - 8. Retaining ring - 9. Drive shaft - 10. Snap
ring - 11. Bearing - 12. Inner spacer - 13. Gear - 14. Gear (13) - retaining snap ring - 15. Centring ring - 16. Snap ring -
17. Hub - 18. Drive ring.
- remove the various hydraulic pump drives reference

sections a, b, and c, fig. 2-7.
2 - 10 TRANSMISSION D350
2.2.2 DISASSEMBLY OF TORQUE CONVERTER
7 1 10 4 C1
6
C4
11
13 9 15 8 13 12 14
C3
3
S1
B A
C5
C2
D350R0286
Fig. 2-8 Section view of torque converter
A. Converter oil inlet - B. Converter oil outlet - C1. Pump wheel securing screws - C2. Drive gear securing screws - C3.
Converter centring cover securing screws - C4. Turbine wheel securing screws - C5. Shaft (5) securing screws - S1. Shims -
1. Torque converter housing - 2. Front bearing (3) retaining disc - 3. Front bearing - 4. pump wheel - 5. Output shaft -
6. Turbine wheel - 7. Snap ring - 8. Stator hub support - 9. Intermediate bearing - 10. Stator - 11. Turbine wheel support -
12. Sealing elastic ring holder disc - 13. Sealing elastic ring - 14. Rear bearing - 15. Pump drive bearing.
D350 TRANSMISSION 2 - 11
Secure the torque converter to the bench using ap-

propriate protections to prevent damaging the drive
shaft with the jaws of the vice (fig. 2-9).
D350R0287
Fig. 2-9
Mark the housing and the pump wheel to re-obtain the
same mounting position when re-assembling the unit
(fig. 2-10).
D350R0288
Fig. 2-10
Remove the screws securing the torque converter
centring cover (fig. 2-11).
D350R0289
Fig. 2-11
Remove the torque converter centring cover as indi-
cated in fig. 2-12.
D350R0290
Fig. 2-12
Remove the screws securing the housing to the pump

wheel (fig. 2-13).
D350R0291
Fig. 2-13
Separate the parts using, if necessary, the appropriate
pulling holes located on the pump wheel (fig. 2-14).
D350R0292
Fig. 2-14
Remove the screw retaining the converter shaft (fig. 2-
15) and remove the bearing retaining disc underneath.
D350R0293
Fig. 2-15
Remove the adjusting shims on the torque converter
shaft (fig. 2-16).
D350R0294
Fig. 2-16
Using a puller, separate the converter housing com-

plete with inner bearing, as in fig. 2-17.
Note – A bearing inner race remains pressed fitted on

the toque converter shaft.
D350R0295
Fig. 2-17
Remove the screws securing the turbine to the rel-
evant flange (fig. 2-18).
D350R0296
Fig. 2-18
Remove the turbine as indicated in fig. 2-19.
D350R0297
Fig. 2-19
Install a puller on the turbine flange and warm-up the
bearing race to extract the parts of the torque con-
verter shaft (fig. 2-20).
Note – Mark the position of the race to return to origi-

nal position when reassembling.
D350R0298
Fig. 2-20
Remove the snap ring on the torque converter shaft

as indicated in fig. 2-21.
D350R0299
Fig. 2-21
Remove the snap ring securing the stator, as indi-
cated in fig. 2-22.
D350R0330
Fig. 2-22
Install a puller on the upper edge of the stator and
warm it up adequately to extract it from the shaft
(fig. 2-23).
WARNING
The stator is made with an aluminium alloy. Oper-
ate with the utmost care.
D350R0331
Fig. 2-23
Remove the snap ring located under the stator as in-
dicated in fig. 2-24.
D350R0332
Fig. 2-24
Pullout the pump wheel complete with hydraulic pump

drive gear as indicated in fig. 2-25.
D350R0333
Fig. 2-25
Unhook and remove the rotary sealing ring as indi-
cated in fig. 2-26.
D350R0334
Fig. 2-26
Remove the Allen screws securing the pump wheel
and the hydraulic pump drive gear (fig. 2-27).
Separate the parts.
D350R0335
Fig. 2-27
Extract the bearing inside the support gear using an
appropriate puncher, as indicated in fig. 2-28.
D350R0336
Fig. 2-28
Turn the drive shaft upside down and remove the snap
ring retaining the rear bearing (see fig. 2-29).
D350R0337
Fig. 2-29
Tap the drive shaft to remove it from the support
splined hub, as indicated in fig. 2-30.
D350R0338
Fig. 2-30
Remove the sealing elastic ring from its eat (see
fig. 2-31).
D350R0339
Fig. 2-31
Remove the ring seat from the drive shaft, as indi-
cated in fig. 2-32.
D350R0340
Fig. 2-32
Remove the snap ring retaining the rear bearing (see

fig. 2-33).
D350R0341
Fig. 2-33
Install an adequate puller to remove the rear bearing
from the drive shaft (fig. 2-34).
D350R0342
Fig. 2-34
2.2.3 INSPECTION OF PARTS AND

REASSEMBLY
Clean accurately all the parts removed.
Prior to re-assembly, check that:
- the bearing roll freely without hesitations and do not

show a radial play;
- the inner splines of the stator in correspondence

with the fitting with the relevant hub are not deformed
or worn (no radial play must exist once installed);
- the press fitting zones of the bearings do not show

signs of scoring or dragging indicating possible loos-
ening or rotation of the parts in their seat.
Note – Prior to the assembly it is recommended to

replace all snap rings and sealing elastic rings.
Re-install al the parts reversing the sequence de-

scribed for the disassembly, considering the follow-
ing special operations.
The Allen screws securing the hydraulic pump drive

gear must be lubricated and tightened to a torque of
5.2 to 6.2 daNm (38.3 to 45.7 lb.ft.) (fig. 2-35).
D350R0343
Fig. 2-35
The stator must be fitted on the hub after warming it
up with the wording "TURBINE SIDE" upward (turbine TU
RBIN
E SIDE
side) as indicated in fig. 2-36.
D350R0344
Fig. 2-36
The screws securing the splined hub must be lubri-
cated and tightened to a torque of 5.2 to 6.2 daNm
(38.3 to 45.7 lb.ft.) (fig. 2-37).
D350R0345
Fig. 2-37
After inserting the turbine complete with hub on the
drive shaft, install spacer (D) and using the same shaft 1
retaining screw (C1) with disc (1) press the turbine
C1 D
until it touches the inner snap ring, as indicated in
fig. 2-38.
D350R0346
Fig. 2-38
Warm-up the inner race (the one touching the turbine)

of the upper bearing and insert the torque converter
housing assembly matching the reference marks done
during the disassembly as indicated in fig. 2-39. Lu-
bricate the securing screws and tighten them to a
torque of 3.6 to 4.5 daNm (26.5 to 33.2 lb.ft.).
D350R0347
Fig. 2-39
Insert the upper bearing race (shaft retaining disc side)
after warming it up the, using a feeler gauge, meas-
ure the protrusion of the race with respect to the drive
S
shaft (S), as indicated in fig. 2-40.
D350R0348
Fig. 2-40
Prepare a pack of shims with the same value (S) previ-
ously measured with the feeler gauge (see fig. 2-41).
D350R0349
Fig. 2-41
Insert the shims on the drive shaft, matching the hole
made on the side with the shaft centring spring pin as
indicated in fig. 2-42.
D350R0350
Fig. 2-42
Lubricate the shaft securing screw and tighten it

(fig. 2-43) to a torque of 20 to 23.5 daNm (147.4 to
173.3 lb.ft.).
D350R0351
Fig. 2-43
Secure the converter centring cover tightening the

screws, previously lubricated to a torque of 3.6 to 4.5
daNm (26.5 to 33.2 lb.ft.) (fig. 2-44).
D350R0352
Fig. 2-44
2.3 TORQUE CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION PROPELLER SHAFT
Loosen the screws securing the spiders to the front

and rear connecting flanges. 1 2 3
Remove the propeller shaft assembly using a craw
bar to pry it. Remove screws (1, fig. 2-45) securing
the spiders to the shaft and remove it.
Check that the bearings turn freely on the spider sup-
port pins: If no signs of rust or poor sealing of the
grease are found around the base of the bearing caps,
the spider can be reused.
The failure of a bearing requires the replacement of
the entire spider.
D350R0192
Fig. 2-45 Parts of the propeller shaft
1. Spider securing screws - 2. Spiders - 3. Shaft.
NOTICE
In case of replacement of the spiders, they are
supplied as spare parts, lubricated and ready to
be installed.
Reassemble the assembly reversing the disassem-
bly sequence and tightening the screws to the pre-
scribed torque.
WARNING
Keep clothing away from moving parts and make
sure to prevent injuring your hands.
2.4 TRANSMISSION
This chapter deals exclusively with the overhaul of

the transmission.
For the operation of the relevant hydraulic system,
please refer to chapter "Operation of the torque con-
verter-transmission hydraulic system".
2.4.1 REMOVAL OF THE TRANSMISSION

FROM THE MACHINE
It is recommended that the machine is located on a
3
workshop pit.
Operate as follows: C1 1 C3
2
C2
WARNING C3 D350R0193
Do not work under or near the equipment of a

Fig. 2-46 Fixtures of the lower guards
machine or its parts that are not properly support-
ed or blocked. C1. Front guard securing screws - C2. Central guard (2)
securing screws - C3. Rear guard (3) securing screws -
- remove lower guards (1 and 3 Fig. 2-46); 1. Central guard - 2. Lower door to access the transmis-
sion housing - 3. Rear guard.
- drain the oil from the transmission as follows: re-
move draining plug (B, fig. 2-47); disconnect flanges
(A and C).
Note – Loosen flanges (A and C) gradually to prevent

a sudden draining of the oil.
- disconnect all pipes connected to the transmission

of the machine;
- install hooks D and F 380000964 e 380000963 to

the transmission (fig. 2-48);
- remove the propeller shaft assembly;
- with chain (E, fig. 2-48) under load, remove screws

(C3. fig 2-79) securing the transmission to the rear A B C D350R0194
transmission.
Fig. 2-47 Transmission oil draining
WARNING A. Converter-transmission pump suction pipe flange se-

curing screws - B. Draining plug - C. Transmission oil
Lift and handle all heavy components with a lift- scavenging pipe flange.
ing device of appropriate capacity.
Make sure that all parts are attached to appropri-
ate slings and hooks. Use the lifting eyes provided
for this purpose.
Beware of persons standing in the vicinity of the
load to be lifted.
- lift the transmission as illustrated in fig. 2-48 and

place it on an overhaul stand; E
D
- remove screws (C3, fig. 2-49) and disconnect the
clutch lubrication pipes;
- disconnect pipes (2 and 4 Fig. 2-49);

F
- remove screws (C4), relevant plate (7) and discon-
nect pressure pick-up pipes (3);
- remove oil manifolds (1 and 5) removing the rel-

evant screws (C1 and C2);
D350R0195
Fig. 2-48 Lifting the transmission out of the ma-

chine
D. Hook 380000964 - E. Chain 380000966 - F. Hook
380000963.
2 C1 3 4 7 C4 C2
5
C3
1 D350R0196
Fig. 2-49 Rear view of transmission

C1. Oil delivery manifold securing screw (1) - C2. Manifold
(5) securing screws - C3. Pipe (6) securing screw - C4.
Plate (7) securing screws - 1. Speed engagement oil
manifold - 2. Speed control pipes - 3. Pipes for pressure
pick-ups - 4. Directional speed control pipes - 5. Direc-
tional speed control manifold - 6. Lubrication pipes - 7.
Pressure pick-up retaining plate.
- install hooks (1) on transmission (fig. 2-50) and us-

ing adjustable chain (2) turn the transmission set-
ting it on the stand as indicated in fig. 2-51;
- remove front cover (2, fig. 2-79) and loosen screws

(C, fig. 2-79);
2
- remove screw (C, fig. 2-79), retaining disc and flange
(9) for the converter connecting propeller shaft;
1
D350R0197
Fig. 2-50 Positioning of the transmission on the

overhaul stand
1. Lifting hook 380000971 - 2. Adjustable chain.
3
2
4
1
a)
D350R0198
Fig. 2-51 View of transmission on overhaul stand
a. Lower view of transmission for the correct positioning of the shafts with respect to the stand shape - 1. Transmission
control valve - 2. Solenoid connecting pipes - 3. Solenoid support bracket - 4. Output shaft - 5. Directional speed shaft -
6. Stand 380000970.
- remove securing screws (C8, fig. 2-79) and remove

cover (10) complete with seal (11);
- remove the screws securing the 3rd speed clutch; A
- install two brackets (A, fig. 2-52) and remove the 3rd
speed pack complete with clutches, then extract
the bearings and spacers left on the shaft;
- remove screws (C4, fig. 2-79) securing disc (28, fig.

2-79) after bending the wings of the safety plate
1
then extract from output shaft (15, fig. 2-79) 3rd
speed driven gear (29, fig. 2-79);
D350R0199
WARNING
Handle all items with utmost care. Do not stick Fig. 2-52 Removal (re-installation) of third speed
hands or fingers between pieces. Wear authorised clutches
personal protection devices such as glasses,
gloves and safety shoes. A. Brackets - 1. Third speed driven gear
- separate cover (1, fig. 2-53) form the transmission

housing together with the bearing outer races using
puller screws (B) then lift it using chain (C);
B 1
C
D350R0200
Fig. 2-53 Removal (re-installation) of cover
B. Puller screws 380000969 - C. Lifting chain 380000966

- 1. Cover.
- remove reverse idle gear (1, fig. 2-54) from shaft (2);
1
D350R0201
Fig. 2-54
1. Reverse idle gear - 2. Shaft.
- using a general puller (D, fig. 2-55) remove reverse

driven gear (3);
D350R0202
Fig. 2-55
1. Reverse idle gear - A. General puller.
- extract gear (4, fig. 2-56) recover bearing inner race

(5) and spacer (6);
- secure hook (A fig. 2-59) to the nose of output shaft E

(1, fig. 2-59) and pull slightly the assembly with a
hoist;
5
6
4 D350R0203
Fig. 2-56
E. General puller - 4. Reverse speed driven gear - 5. Bear-
ing inner race - 6. Spacer.
- reach the lower side of the overhaul stand and re-

move carefully snap ring (7, fig. 2-57) and thrust
ring (8);
- extract the shaft from the bottom, recovering after-

ward the roller bearing; then remove the 1st speed
driven gear from the transmission housing;
7
8
D350R0204
Fig. 2-57 Removal (installation) of transmission

output shaft
7. Snap ring - 8. Thrust ring.
- set hook (F, fig. 2-58) on the transmission input shaft

and remove it pulling it out from the top, complete
with the clutch pack; F
D350R0205
Fig. 2-58 Removal (installation) of transmission

input shaft
F. Hook 380000964 - 1. Shaft-clutch - 2. Reverse speed

clutch - 3. Disc pushing piston seat - 4. Forward speed
clutch.
Note – The arrow indicates the direction in which the

shaft must be pulled out from the transmission housing.
3 1
2
D350R0206
Fig. 2-59
A. Hook 380000965 - 1. Output shaft - 2. Forward-re-

verse speeds clutch shaft - 3. Intermediate shaft.
- install hook (C, fig. 2-60) on the intermediate shaft.

Then lift the shaft assembly complete with the 2nd
and 1st speed clutches.
D350R0207
Fig. 2-60 Removal (installation) of intermediate

shaft
C. Lifting hook 380000968 - 1. Clutch shaft - 2. Second

speed clutch - 3. Disc pushing piston seat - 4. First speed
clutch.
7
6 8
5
4
3
2
1
C1
14
13
13 8 9
12 14
10 15
11
16
4
9
9
10
10 9
11
10
D350R0208
Fig. 2-61 Components of the transmission input shaft
C1. Sleeve (3) securing screws - 1. Disc - 2. O-Ring - 3. Motion input sleeve - 4. Shaft support bearings - 5. Shaft - 6. Piston -
7. Lubrication splitting pins - 8. Rotating sealing rings - 9. Thrust bearings - 10. Roller bearings - 11. Spacers -
12. "REVERSE" clutch pack - 13. Spacers - 14. Retaining half-rings - 15. "FORWARD" clutch pack - 16. Snap ring.
5 8
7 5
5 6 9
C1 10
3 12
5
4 11 6
11
11
6 12 13
5
2
9
14
18 16 17
15
D350R0209
Fig. 2-62 Components of the speed clutch
C1. Clutch pack (4) retaining screw - 1. Safety plate - 2. "SECOND" clutch pack - 3. Pack (4) retaining disc - 4. "THIRD" clutch
pack - 5. Thrust bearing - 6. Needle bearings - 7. Spacer - 8. Bearing (9) retaining flange - 9. Shaft support bearings - 10.
Reverse speeds driven gear (43 teeth) - 11. Rotating sealing rings - 12. Elastic retaining rings - 13. "FIRST" clutch pack -
14. Forward speed shaft driving gear (60 teeth) - 15. Piston seat - 16. Shaft - 17. Lube oil splitting spring pins - 18. O-Ring.
2.4.2 DISASSEMBLY OF CLUTCHES

Note – The disassembly-reassembly operations are A 2
equivalent for all the clutches.
The differences relate to the discs and location of
bearings, spacers and elastic rings on the transmis-
sion shafts.
The description here below refers to the disassembly
and reassembly procedure for the reverse clutch, but
it applies to the other clutches as well, except for the
items subject to specific references.
Proceed as follows: 1
B
- place the shaft in the hole on the stand and pull-out
the driven disc drum;
- remove the bearings and relevant spacers;

D350R0210
- install compression bracket (A, fig. 2-63) and re-
move the three retaining half-rings (2);
Fig. 2-63 Disassembly (reassembly) of the hub
retaining rings
- extract clutch pack (2, fig. 2-64) and remove spring (3);
A. Compression plate - B. Rod - 1. Driven disc hub - 2.
Retaining half-rings.
WARNING
2
Handle all items with utmost care. Do not stick
hands or fingers between pieces.
D350R0211
Fig. 2-64 Disassembly of the reverse disc pack
2. Reverse disc pack - 3. Drive disc hub retaining cup

spring.
DANGER
Highly compressed springs. Always comply with
the prescribed procedure when disassembling or C
re-assembling.
WARNING 4
5
hands or fingers between pieces. Wear authorised
gloves and safety shoes.
- place pressing rig (C, fig. 2-65) in the vice and press
D350R0212
the spring removing at the same time retaining ring
(4) and relevant plate (3); Fig. 2-65 Disassembly of clutch pack
C. Screw type pressing rig 380000972 - 4. Retaining elastic

ring - 5. Ring (1) backup plate.
4 5 11
6
3 7 13
2 10 12
9
8
9
16
14 3
15 4
2
8 5
6
10 7 D350R0213
Fig. 2-66 Components of FORWARD and REVERSE clutches
1. Driven disc drum "REVERSE" - 2. Drive disc hub - 3. Hub (2) retaining cup spring - 4. Spring - 5. Spring seat cup - 6. Ring
(7) backup plate - 7. Elastic ring - 8. Steel drive disc - 9. Ring type spacer springs - 10. Sintered material driven disc -
11. Mobile piston - 12. Safety wire - 13. Piston retaining elastic ring - 14. O-Ring - 15. Mobile piston - 16. Driven disc drum
"FORWARD".
a)
7 6
D350R0214
7 6
Fig. 2-67 Removal of safety wire (1)
a. Section view on elastic ring - 6. Safety wire - 7. Piston retaining elastic ring.
- disassemble the disc pack from drum (2, fig. 2-66);
- using appropriate pliers press the tips of mobile pis-

ton retaining elastic ring (D, fig. 2-68) and at the E
same time lift piston (E); 8
9
D
WARNING
hands or fingers between pieces.
- turn the shaft assembly upside down and proceed

in the same manner to disassemble the FOWARD
speed clutch. D350R0215
Fig. 2-68 Disassembly of two mobile pistons

(1 and 2)
D. Press the tips of the ring - E. Lift the mobile piston -

8. and 9. Pistons.
2.4.3 INSPECTION OF PARTS Clutch discs

DISASSEMBLED It is necessary to replace the clutch discs, not con-
sidering the wear of surfaces, every time they show
WARNING pitted zones, scratches or burns, generally due to
impurities in the oil or a dry operation of the clutches.
Never use gasoline, solvent or other flammable
The thickness of each single sintered disc is 3.55 to
fluid to clean parts. Use exclusively qualified, non-
3.65 mm (0.13 to 0.14 in). Replace when thickness is
flammable, non-toxic commercial solvents.
below 3.3 mm (0.12 in).
5 10
1 11
13
12
2
3
4 6 9
7 8
9 8
10 4
11 3
14
5
7 6
11
5 7
4 6
15 16
10
9
8
D350R0216
Fig. 2-69 Components of the speed clutches
1. "THIRD" piston seat - 2. Sealing elastic ring - 3. O-Ring - 4. Backup ring - 5. Piston - 6. Steel disc - 7. Sintered material disc -
8. Retaining elastic ring - 9. Spring seat cup - 10. Spring - 11. Driven disc hub - 12. Sintered material drum (THIRD) -
13. Retaining rings - 14. Sintered disc hub (SECOND) - 15. "SECOND and THIRD" piston seat - 16. Sintered disc drum
(FIRST).
The thickness of each individual steel disc is 2.42 to A

2.58 mm (0.09 to 0.10 in). Replace when the thick-
ness is lower than 2.3 mm (0.09 in). Check any possi- 1
ble weakening of the clutch disengagement springs,
making reference to what listed in the tables "SPECI-
FICATIONS AND DATA". Check the rolling faces of
the needle bearings. In the event they show scratches
or elongation, replace the entire part.
2.4.4 REASSEMBLY OF THE TRANSMISSION

Proceed with the reassembly of the clutches in ac-
D350R0217
cordance with what listed here below:
Fig. 2-70 Measuring the deformation of the ring
- place pressing rig (C, fig. 2-65) in a vice and install
spacer ring
on it the drive disc hub;
A. = 4.3 to 4.7 mm (0.169 to 0.185 in) - 1. Spring.
- form the clutch pack always starting with a sintered
material disc touching the drive disc drum;
- insert the ring spacer springs between the inner

toothed discs, checking first that they are not de-
formed as per fig. 2-70;
QUANTITY
composition of brakes
FORWARD 3rd 2nd 1st REVERSE
Inner toothed disc 9 7 7 7 10
Inner toothed disc with drive block 1 1 1 1 -
Outer toothed disc with

sintered material 10 8 8 8 10
Ring spacer springs 10 - - - 10
S (mm)
P (Kg)
FORWARD-REVERSE 1st- 2nd - 3rd
200 Kg 61.8 to 62.3 mm 49.5 to 49.8 mm

(440.9 lb) (2.43 to 2.45 in) (1.95 to 1.96 in)
Note – Springs (1, fig. 2-70) are present only in the

"FORWARD and REVERSE" clutch packs.
- install the piston return spring and secure the as-

sembly with the retaining ring inserting, for the for-
ward-reverse, the safety wire provided (6, fig. 2-67); S
- once the installation is over, check that the total

thickness is the one (S) listed in fig. 2-71. Correct,
as required, the thickness using inner toothed discs
provided with thickness equal to 3 mm (0.12 in);
D350R0218
- reassemble the transmission shafts without outer

toothed drums and measure the gap between pis- Fig. 2-71 Checking the total thickness of the
ton and first inner toothed disc with a feeler gauge clutch packs
(fig. 2-73);
WARNING 3
2
Lift and handle heavy parts with a lifting device of
proper capacity. Be sure parts are supported by
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if pro-
vided. Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
WARNING
1
Avoid kinking lifting chains or cables. Always wear P
protective gloves when handling chains or cables. D350R0219
Fig. 2-72 Detail of correct installation sealing of

1st, 2nd, 3rd speed pistons
- reinstall the shafts into the transmission housing
reversing the order described for the disassembly; P. Pressure chamber - 1. Piston - 2. O-Ring - 3. Backup
ring
S (piston stroke mm) CLUTCH 1
2.5 to 3.5 (0.09 to 0.14 in) FORWARD-REVERSE
3.3 to 4.3 (0.13 to 0.17 in) 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Note – Prior to reassembling the output shaft position

the first speed driven gear on the appropriate support S
pins (1, fig. 2-75). 2
D350R0220
Fig. 2-73 Measuring the piston stroke

- once the positioning of the shafts into the transmis-
sion housing is over, proceed with the check of the S. Piston stroke - 1. Piston - 2. Inner toothed first disc.
plays on the support bearings (fig. 2-76 and 2-77);
- complete the assembly of the transmission revers-

ing what described for the disassembly and secure A2
A0
the various covers previously smeared in the mat- 1
ing surfaces with an adequate sealing compound. A
3
45
43
47 2
35
37
60 21
WARNING 47

fluid to clean parts. Use exclusively qualified, non- 48
D350R0221
Fig. 2-74 Transmission shafts assembly
DANGER
Adhesive products are extremely flammable. Com-
ply with the instructions of the manufacturer for
their application. 1
D350R0222
Fig. 2-75 View of the first speed driven gear

support pins
1
B
3
2
D350R0223
Fig. 2-76 Measuring the mounting play between bearing and manifold cover
B=A = 0.020 to 0.920 mm (0.0007 to 0.0362 in). Mounting play - 1. Shaft "FORWARD-REVERSE" - 2. Manifold cover - 3. Bearing.
B 1
3 D350R0224
Fig. 2-77 Measuring the mounting play between

bearing and flange
A=B = 0.211 to 1.311 mm (0.008 to 0.051 in). Mounting
play - 1. Bearing - 2. Speed shaft - 3. Flange.
2.4.5 TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION OIL

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
WARNING
1
NEVER USE HANDS to search for suspected pres-
4
sure leaks. Fluid escaping under can have suffi-
cient force to penetrate the skin. 2
3 D350R0225
This valve is installed on the transmission cover in Fig. 2-78 Transmission lubrication oil pressure
correspondence with the return pipe from the heat relief valve
exchanger and it is only accessible by removing the
1. Retaining pin - 2. Spring - 3. Spring (2) support plates -
transmission front cover. 4. Valve body - 5. Spacer.
Disassemble the valve making reference to the sec-
tion view of fig. 2-78.
Check the specifications of spring (2) in accordance
with what listed in the data paragraph. No spring ad-
justing shims are provided; thus, in the event a pres-
sure value different from what specified is found, it is
necessary to replace the spring itself.
Normal lubrication pressure is 1.7 to 2.6 bar (24.6 to
37.7 psi) in neutral. The opening pressure is 4 bar (58
psi).
2.4.6 REINSTALLATION OF TRANSMISSION When reinstalling the transmission group on the ma-
chine please consider the following:
WARNING - clean accurately the two mating surfaces between

the transmission housing and the rear transmission
Never use gasoline, solvent or other flammable housing and apply adhesive compound before mat-
fluid to clean parts. Use exclusively qualified, non- ing the two parts;
- make sure that reverse clutch engagement oil de-
livery manifold (5, fig. 2-79) is complete with O-Rings
at the tips;
DANGER
- remove the transmission from the overhaul stand
Adhesive products are extremely flammable. Com- using adjustable chain (2) and lifting hook (1) (fig.
ply with the instructions of the manufacturer for 2-50);
their application.
- use the lifting eyes and auxiliary hook 380000963
already used for the removal, paying attention that
during this phase the O-Ring fitted at the tip of the
WARNING
bearing retaining cover is not damaged;
proper capacity. Be sure parts are supported by - lubricate adequately the matching splines with the
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if pro- bevel pinion with grease MOLYKOTE BR2 PLUS or
vided. MOLYGUARD LMP7180.
Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
D350 2 - 41
35 31 26 1 20 P 19
27
3
B A
C8
22
5
11
13
C1 12
9
C2
10
23
2 C9
24
18
17
14
C
16
C5 4
30
V M L
C4
28
29
32 33 34 Va
7
8
25
C6 15
6
C7 Fa 21 C3
D350R0353
Fig. 2-79 Longitudinal view of the transmission
A. Forward speed clutch - B. Reverse speed clutch - C. Retaining screws - C1. Flange retaining disc securing screw - C2. Screws securing manifold (5) to transmission housing - C3. Screws securing the transmission to rear transmission housing - C4. Screws securing disc (28)
retaining gear (29) onto shaft (30) - C5. Screws securing ring (30) - C6. Screws securing cover (2 and 3) to housing (1) - C7. Screws securing the transmission-converter power pump suction manifold - C8. Screws securing cover (10) to housing (1) - C9. Screws securing manifold
(4) to housing (1) - Fa. Transmission-converter power pump suction filter - L. 1st speed clutch - M. 2nd speed clutch - P. Diagnostic pressure pick-ups - V. 2nd speed clutch - Va. Quick discharge valve - 1. Transmission housing - 2. Transmission front cover - 3. Cover - 4. 1st, 2nd, 3rd clutch
engagement oil delivery manifold - 5. Reverser clutch engagement oil delivery manifold - 6. Pinion (7) taper roller bearing retaining cover - 7. Bevel pinion - 8. Taper roller bearing - 9. Converter-transmission propeller shaft flange - 10. Seal cover - 11, 12. Seal - 13. Forward-
reverse clutches shaft - 14. 1st, 2nd, 3rd clutches shaft - 15. Transmission output shaft - 16. 3rd speed clutch engagement duct - 17. 2nd speed clutch engagement duct - 18. 1st speed clutch engagement duct - 19. Reverse speed clutch engagement duct - 20. Forward speed
clutch engagement duct - 22. Ball bearing - 21, 23, 24, 25, 26. Roller bearings - 27. Reverse speed idle gear - 28. Gear retaining disc - 29. 3rd speed driven gear - 30. Front bearing (23) a ring - 31. - Clutch disengagement springs - 32. Reverse speeds driven gear - 33. 2nd
speed driven gear - 34. Spacer - 35. Ring type spacer springs.
2.5 TORQUE CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION OIL FILTERS
The filtration of the hydraulic system oil is provided by: - a filter (Fr, fig. 2-1) w/ full flow metal cloth filtering
element and magnetic rod located on the transmis-
- a filter (Fm, fig. 2-1) full flow with paper replaceable sion oil scavenger pump in the gear compartment.
element located on the delivery form the torque con- Access to the filter by opening the lower panel guard-
verter-transmission power pump. ing the converter-transmission group and discon-
The circuit, in the event of clogging of the filter, is necting pipe (C, Fig. 2-47).
supplied just the same by the opening of the by-
pass valve incorporated in the filter itself.
The filter is accessible opening the right panel un-
der the cab;
- a filter (Fa, fig. 2-1) of a total flow type with steel mesh
replaceable element and magnetic rod located on the
transmission-converter supply pump delivery. To reach
the filter it is necessary to open the lower panel of the
torque converter-transmission group and disconnect
the pipe on the transmission side;
2.6 CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION-CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION OIL

SCAVENGER HYDRAULIC PUMP
2.6.1 OVERHAUL
DANGER
Mark the different sections of the pump body to en-
Fluid under pressure. Always rest the hydraulic sure the correct reassembly. Remove securing nut
equipment on the ground. Cut-off the engine, ac- (C2, fig. 2-80) and disconnect drive joint (1) using a
tuate the control levers a few times idle, then universal puller.
loosen and tighten the hydraulic system cap to Then remove securing screws (C1) and disassemble
bleed the residual pressure, before disconnecting the single elements of the pump making reference to
the connections of the hydraulic system. the section of fig. 2-80.
Check the wear conditions of the pumps body, shafts
and gears, making reference to what listed in the ta-
ble SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA.
Insert bearing (4) thrust rings (6) taking care of the
The pump is of a gear type, three sections, and pow- contact with the surfaces of the gears. During the
ers the torque converter control hydraulic circuits (A, reassembly, lubricate all the parts, in order to prevent
fig. 2-80), transmission-torque converter (B) and oil seizing during the first period of operation.
scavenging from the transmission gear compartment
(C). The motion is transmitted by the torque converter
through a driven gear and a shaft connected to the
drive shaft of the pump. The pump is mounted on the
torque converter cover and is accessible from the
topside of the machine, removing the cab.
Tighten screws (C1) securing the pump elements and Before reinstalling the pump on the torque converter
coupling securing nut (C2) to the torque indicated in support housing, make sure that the drive shaft turns
the table "TIGHTENING TORQUES". freely without showing any kind of effort.
5 C2 1
D E
3
B
6
4
F
G
C1
2 I
a)
H
D350R0226
Fig. 2-80 Longitudinal section of the three section pump powering the transmission-converter, converter
and oil scavenger from the transmission gear compartment
a. View of the suction and delivery ducts of the relevant sections of the pump - A. Torque converter pump - B. Transmission-
converter pump - C. Oil scavenging pump in transmission gear compartment - C1. Screws securing the pump body
elements - C2. Coupling securing nut - D. Suction from transmission - E. Delivery to torque converter - F. Delivery to
transmission control filter delivery - G. Suction from transmission (gear compartment) - H. To transmission tank - I. Oil inlet
from converter housing - 1. Drive joint - 2. Rear cover - 3. Gasket - 4. Needle bearings for gear shafts - 5. Centring pin -
6. Needle bearing (4) backup rings.
2
1 3
C3 21 5 6
14
18
C1 11 7 8 10 9
16
15
17 19 20 12 13 C2 D350R0228
Fig. 2-81 Exploded view of the transmission control valve
1. Spring assembly for plunger (2) - 2. Neutral pressure valve plunger - 3. Block valve ball - 4. Transmission pressure relief
valve plunger - 5. Modulating orifice seat plug - 6. Modulating valve piston - 7. "REVERSE" control spool - 8. Spool return
spring - 9. Spool access cover - 10. "FORWARD" control spool - 11. 2nd speed control spool - 12. 3rd speed control spool -
13. 1st speed control spool - 14. Restrictions on delivery from pilot valve (FORWARD and REVERSE) - 15. Gearshifting
block balls - 16. Ball (15) centring pin - 17. Gearshifting distribution rod - 18. Selector valve (FORWARD-REVERSE) -
19. Gearshifting block - 20. Spool block - 21. Upper body - C1. Screws securing block (19) to control valve body - C2. Screws
securing cover (9) - C3. Screws securing upper body (21) to body (20).
D350 2 - 47
13 12
M 17
C2
15
19
16
B L
1 2 N
14 18 10
A
T
P1 U
P2 K
C1
C
C3 7 11
4
21
H
6
F
20
D E
G
7
8
D350R0229
Fig. 2-82 Section view of transmission control valve
A. From power pump - B. Solenoid diverter - C. To transmission lubrication - D. To 3rd speed clutch - E. To 1st speed clutch - F. To forward speed clutch - G. To 2nd speed clutch - H. To reverse speed clutch - K. To torque converter - L. To control pressure pick-up - M. From gearshift
solenoid (1st and 2nd speed) - N. From gearshift solenoid (2nd and 3rd speed) - P1 and P2. Modulating valves pick-ups - T. From transmission control solenoid (FORWARD) - U. From transmission control solenoid (REVERSE) - 1. Spring assembly for plunger (2) - 2. Neutral
pressure valve plunger - 3. Block valve ball - 4. Transmission pressure relief valve plunger - 5. Modulating orifice seat plug - 6. Modulating valve piston - 7. "REVERSE" control spool - 8. Spool return spring - 9. Spool access cover - 10. "FORWARD" control spool - 11. 2nd speed
control spool - 12. 3rd speed control spool - 13. 1st speed control spool - 14. Restrictions on delivery from pilot valve (FORWARD and REVERSE) - 15. Gearshifting block balls - 16. Ball (15) centring pin - 17. Gearshifting distribution rod - 18. Selector valve (FORWARD-
REVERSE) - 19. Gearshifting block - 20. Spool block - 21. Upper body - C1. Screws securing block (19) to control valve body - C2. Screws securing cover (9) - C3. Screws securing upper body (21) to body (20).
2.7 TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE
2.7.1 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY 1

Remove the control valve from the machine as follows:
- remove the fuel tank;

3
- disconnect the connecting pipes;
2
- remove the screws securing it to the transmission
and remove the group;
Disassemble the control valve as described:
- remove upper plug (3, fig. 2-83) and remove neutral D350R0271
pressure valve (1);
Fig. 2-83 Disassembly of neutral pressure valve
- with the valve in a vice remove plug (3, fig. 2-84)
and extract springs (2) with plunger (1); 1. Neutral pressure valve - 2. Transmission pressure re-
lief valve - 3. Upper plug.
1 2 3
Note – The two springs (2, fig. 2-84) are provided as
spare parts complete with the relevant mounting link
- extract plunger (1, fig. 2-85) and relevant springs (2,

fig. 2-85) from the upper side of the control valve;
- remove screws (C3, fig. 2-82) and separate the up-

per body from the spool body;
D350R0272
- remove screws (C1, fig. 2-86) retaining cover (1, fig.

2-86); Fig. 2-84 Disassembly of neutral pressure valve
- remove screws (C1, fig. 2-82) and remove the 1. Plunger - 2. Valve group - 3. Plug.
gearshifting block (1, fig. 2-87); 1
- mark the exact location of the spools (2, fig. 2-87)

in the relevant seats on the body and extract them; 2
D350R0273
Fig. 2-85 Disassembly of transmission pressure

relief valve plunger
1. Transmission pressure relief valve plunger - 2. Plunger
springs.
Z1
C1
2 2 S
1
3 1 A
D350R0274 D350R0276
Fig. 2-86 Disassembly of the control valve bodies Fig. 2-88 Disassembly of neutral pressure valve (1)
C1. Cover (1) securing screws - Z1. Calibrated orifices - A. Forward speed - I. Reverse speed - 1. To 1st speed
1. Speed spools retaining cover - 2. and 3. Control valve control - 2. To 2nd speed control - 3. To 3rd speed control.
bodies.
6 3 1
5
1 2 3 4
7 4 2
2 1
D350R0275 D350R0277
Fig. 2-87 Disassembly of gearshift block Fig. 2-89 View of oil passages in gearshifting block
1. Gearshift block - 2. Transmission spools. 1. Elastic rings - 2. Plugs - 3. Springs - 4. Balls - 5. Orifices -
6. Gearshifting spool - 7. Plunger.
- disassemble, further, all the parts of the block

(fig. 2-89) removing elastic rings (1) and extracting
plugs (2).
2.7.2 INSPECTION OF PARTS

DISASSEMBLED
Check the specifications of the various pressure regu-
lation springs, modulating valve springs and supply
spool return springs, making reference to the values
listed in the table "SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA".
Check that clutch control spools (2, fig. 2-87) and the
valve plungers are free from dents, scratches and
headings. Check the integrity of the O-Rings and make
sure that the ducts and the orifices are free from im-
purities (1, fig. 2-90).
1
D350R0278
Fig. 2-90 Cleaning the orifices on the "FORWARD

2.7.3 REASSEMBLY OF CONTROL VALVE and REVERSE" speed ducts.
Reassemble the control valve reversing the sequence
described for the disassembly. If the transmission
spools are replaced (2, fig. 2-87) install them in the
relevant body making the matching at the disassem-
bly. Tighten the securing screws to the prescribed 1 2 3 4 5 6 5
torque.
1 2 7 D350R0279
WARNING
Never use gasoline, solvent or other flammable Fig. 2-91 Composition of the modulating valve
1. Circlip - 2. Plug - 3. Valve piston - 4. Spring guide pin -
5. Springs - 6. Plunger - 7. Check valve and orifice.
1 2
D350R0280
Fig. 2-92 Installation of the direction combination

movement priority orifice
1. Orifice - 2. Connections to control valve.
2.7.4 HYDRAULIC TESTS OF CONTROL

VALVE ON BENCH - place the pilot valve in neutral and check that the
pressure measured on the pressure gauge, con-
Makeup the circuit of fig. 2-93. nected to the output of the 2nd speed is 4 to 5 bar
(58 to 72.5 psi).
- actuate electric motor (A) warm-up the test oil to
about 50 °C (122 °F);
WARNING
- actuate the control valve completely at least 10
times; NEVER USE HANDS to search for suspected pres-
sure leaks. Fluid escaping under can have suffi-
- shift all gears in sequence, forward and reverse, cient force to penetrate the skin.
checking that the pressures measured on the pres-
sure gauges is included between 13 and 16 bar (188.5
and 232.1 psi);
75296097
75294168 75294164 75295583/..86 75296097

75295583 75295586
C
75290544 75294166
75294107 75290373
75290544 75296092
P
75293157
75293156 A
75294106
75294108
75294141 75296098
75294143
B
75294099
G
F
75294161
D350R0281
Fig. 2-93 Bench test diagram of transmission control valve
A. Tank 75296155 - B. Test rig 75297784 - C. Pilot valve 75294165 - D. To pressure gauge kit 75294000 - P. Pump
75294140 - F. Electric motor 75294091 - G. Flow regulator.
2.8 GEARSHIFT CONTROL
2.8.1 TRANSMISSION GEARSHIFT

BUTTONS AND SAFETY LEVER
The gearshifting is done by electric buttons that

through an electronic controller control the solenoids
for the hydraulic connection to the transmission con-
trol valve (see fig. 2-94).
The group of buttons is incorporated in the left arm-
rest of the operator seat.
AS
P
R
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER
MICROCONTROLLER
12 9
S 11 17
18 10
D350R0282
Fig. 2-94 Gearshifting buttons
F. Forward speed - R. Reverse speed - P. Gear increment - S. Gear increment - N. Neutral - AS. Auto-shift function -
9. FORWARD speed solenoids - 10. REVERSE speed solenoid - 11. 1st speed - 12. 3rd speed solenoid - 17. FORWARD-
REVERSE control valve spool - 18. 1st - 3rd control valve spool.
Also, the transmission safety lever is included in the

electric circuit (fig. 2-95).
This device can get into two positions. A
- Position "A" (in neutral): in this position it is possi-
ble to start the engine. B
During the standing with the engine in operation, the

gearshift buttons are inhibited, to prevent unwanted
movements that could cause dangerous manoeuvres.
In this position the parking brake is engaged.
- Position "B" (work position) the lever allows the

gearshifting and disengages the parking brake.
The gearshifting is also inhibited by the "sentinel sys- D350R0283

tem brake" that in the event of a sudden pressure
drop of the brake system (11.5 bar, 166.8 psi) shifts Fig. 2-95
the transmission into neutral, so that severe damag-
es to the brakes group and the transmission clutches
are prevented.
2.8.2 DISASSEMBLY OF GEARSHIFT

COMPONENTS
To replace the gearshift buttons, access through the
left armrest directly form the operator seat.
To access the micro controller and replace it, remove
the panel on the left console (see fig. 2-96).
The gearshift solenoids are disconnected, reaching
them from the left side of the machine under the cab,
removing the left footrest and the relevant guards
underneath.
D350R0284
Fig. 2-96
2.9 TRANSMISSION OIL RADIATOR
The transmission oil radiator is incorporated in the

main radiator of the machine. IT uses its own alumin- Ss I
ium made core and is located on the left side of the
water radiator.
Cooling is provided by the main fan.
2.9.1 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF

TIGHTNESS OF HEAT EXCHANGER
Remove possible traces of calcium scaling using the
appropriate de-scaler for radiators in the solutions pre-
scribed by the "OPERATTION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL" of the machine.
The cleaning of the core is done by opening the con-
veyor upper panel and the conveyor lower panels to
remove the materials accumulated using a water or
compressed air jet (fig. 2-97).
C Si M
D350R0285
WARNING Fig. 2-97 Radiator

Wear proper protective equipment such as safety C. Transmission oil section - I. Hydraulic oil section -
goggles or safety glasses with side shields when M. Engine coolant section - S1. Lower panels - SS. Upper
using compressed air to clean parts to prevent panel.
injuries by metal or other particles apt to fly or
fall. Limit the pressure to 2.1 bar (30.5 psi) in ac-
cordance with current local or national regulations.
WARNING
2.10 TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING WARNING
Comply with all starting and cutting off- proce- NEVER USE HANDS to search for suspected pres-
dures and the NOTICES prescribed by the Opera- sure leaks. Fluid escaping under can have suffi-
tion and Maintenance Manual. cient force to penetrate the skin.
WARNING WARNING
Be sure exposed personnel in the area of opera- Cut-off the engine and make sure that pressure is
tion are clear of the machine before moving it or discharged from all systems prior to removing side
its attachments. WALK COMPLETELY AROUND the panels, containers, guards or covers.
machine before mounting. Sound horn.
2.10.1 TROUBLES, CAUSES, REMEDIES
Note – Unless differently directed, please refer to the diagram of fig. 2-1.
TROUBLES POSSIBLE CAUSES REMEDIES

1. Lube oil pressure indicator light (Sc) a. Insufficient quantity of oil in the Check level (*)
stays ON with engine operating at transmission housing.
high rpm.
b. Clogged filters. Inspect filters.
c. Oil leakages or air sucked due to Identify leakage and replace
broken or cracked pipes, or defec- defective parts.
tive seals.
d. Use of oil of wrong viscosity. Check and change oil if re-
quired.
e. Power pumps worn.
Check pumps.
f. Torque converter safety valve (13)
stuck in open position Check valve.
g. Lube safety valve (18) seized in Check valve.
open position.
(*) Note – To check the transmission oil level, proceed as follows:

- warm-up the oil to 70 to 90 ° C (158 to 195 °F) (temperature gauge about half way the green field);
- run the engine at low idle for 3-5 minutes, with transmission in neutral;
- cut-off the engine and check the level.

2. Oil pressure gauge (P) on pressure a. Insufficient quantity of oil in trans- Top-up level (*) and eliminate
pick-up panel indicates insufficient mission housing. possible leakages.
pressure both in forward and re-
b. Defective operation of pressure Check and replace if required.
verse, with engine at high idle and
gauge.
speed engaged.
c. Bad sealing of power pump (Pa) Inspect and tighten connec-
suction and delivery ducts. tions.
d. Clogged filters. Inspect filters
e. Poor performance of power pump. Overhaul and replace if required.
f. Transm. oil pressure relief valve Check free travel of valve.
(11) seized in open position.
g. Modulating valves (21) out of set- Replace valves.
ting.
3. Oil pressure gauge (P) on pressure a. Forward (or reverse) modulating Remove control valve and re-
pick-up panel indicates insufficient valve (21) out of setting. place valve.
pressure on all forward speeds Check tightness of pipes tak-
b. Transm. internal pipes or sealing
whereas for reverse speeds the ing oil to pressure pick-ups
segments on shafts broken.
pressure is normal (or viceversa). (3, fig. 2-49) and look for pos-
sible leakages.
c. Quick discharge valve stuck in Check valves.

open position.
4. Oil pressure gauge (P) on pressure a. See point 3b and 3c. Look for failure of brakes sys-
pick-up panel indicates insufficient tem.
b. Check pressure of brakes oil sys-
pressure in 1st, 2nd, 3rd speed only,
tem (sentinel system).
both forward and reverse.
5. Oil pressure gauge (P) on pressure a. Spool stuck in closed position. Remove control valve and
pick-up panel indicates insufficient check spools.
normal pressure and machine does
b. Simultaneous engagement of two See point above.
not start.
speeds due to seizing in open po-
sition of spools (2, fig. 2-87).
c. Clutch pack of one speed stuck. Overhaul transmission.


6. Transm. oil temperature gauge (T) a. Insufficient quantity of oil in trans- Check level (*).
on dashboard indicates an exces- mission housing
sive temperature.
b. Safety valve is stuck in open posi- Check valve.
tion.
c. Safety valve (13) is kept open by Inspect and clean radiator and
clogging in oil radiator or relevant relevant pipes.
delivery pipes.
d. Bad sealing of power pumps (Pc) Check and tighten connections
and (Pa) suction pipes with subse- and clamps.
quent entry of air.
e. Filter (Fa) on pump suction clogged. Check filter.
f. Power pump poor performance (in- Check pumps (Pc) and (Pa).
sufficient oil delivery).
g. Scavenger pump (Pr) poor perform- Check filter and check opera-
ance of suction filter (Fr) clogged. tion of pump.
h. Oil radiator, pipes clogged; water Clean outside of radiator and
pump inefficient. flush cooling circuit; check wa-
ter pump.
i. Accumulation of materials between Remove lower guards and

lower guards of machine and en- clean them.
gine and transmission groups.
l. Incorrect operation of the machine Avoid operating with torque
converter stalling frequently
and use lower speeds.

- run the engine at low idle for 3 - 5 minutes, with transmission in neutral;

7. The machine provides low power a. Insufficient transmission oil level. Check oil level (*).
in all gears (with engine efficient
b. Air sucked into pump power pipes. Check hydraulic circuit.
and normal gearshifting pressure).
c. Oil leakages inside the torque con- Overhaul torque converter.
verter (in this case the pressure in
the converter measured as per
point 2.10.2 is considerably lower
than the values indicated).

- warm-up the oil to a 70 to 90 °C (158 to 195°F) (temperature gauge about half way the green field);
2.10.2 TEST OF CONVERTER- 2.10.4 CHECK OF TRANSMISSION-

TRANSMISSION GROUP CONVERTER PRESSURES
ON MACHINE (with oil warmed-up and throttle
It is possible to perform operational checks without lever at maximum)
removing the transmission groups from the machine.
Checking the gearshifting pressures
Connect a set of pressure gauges (20 to 25 bar, 290.1
to 362.6 psi capacity) to the pressure pick-ups (see
2.10.3 GEARSHIFTING TEST AND
section 4 - STEERING BRAKES AND DIFFEREN-
CONVERTER STALLING TIAL) and check the engaging pressures of the vari-
warm-up oil and water to about 50°C (122 ° F); ous clutches operating with the torque converter stall-
ing, as described in the previous paragraph. With gears
engaged the engaging pressures must be included
between 14 and 16 bar (203 and 232 psi); with
gearshifting button in neutral position, the pressure
reading on the pressure gauge connected to 2nd speed
is about 4 to 5 bar (58 to 72.5 psi), whereas in the
NOTICE other positions it must be 0.
Warm-up the coolant to the value indicated above,

alternating short periods (a few seconds) of "stall" Checking the torque converter pressure
operation and longer cooling-off periods in "neu- Connect a pressure gauge to the torque converter pick-
tral". This is in order to make the warming-up of up and check that the pressure value is about 3.5 bar
coolants progressive and uniform. (50.8 psi) with a gear engaged (and torque converter
stalling).
Checking the lubrication pressure

check, with transmission in neutral, that maximum
rpm at high idle is between 2250 and 2350. Connect a pressure gauge to the lubrication pick-up
Hold the machine by pressing the brake pedal and and check that the pressure is included between 1.7
keeping it firmly blocked. and 2.5 bar (24.6 and 36.2 psi).
Engage the third gear forward and check that the throt-
tle lever is in maximum rpm position and the engine
rpm slows to 1780 ± 50 rpm.
Shift all the other gears and check that the engine
2.10.5 PUMP DELIVERY TESTS
decrement is the same, no matter what gear is en-
gaged. If for one gear the engine rpm does not de- Use the testing oil and the conditions as specified.
crease, it is possible that the clutch of the speed se- The deliveries measured must not be 20 5 below the
lected slips. relevant nominal deliveries (see table "SPECIFICA-
If during the test the engine rpm does not decrease to TIONS AND DATA").
the prescribed value in any speed, the trouble is lo- In case they are below the limits, it is necessary to
calised in the gearshifting circuit or in the torque con- overhaul the pump.
verter and more precisely:
- in the transmission, when the propeller shaft between
torque converter and transmission is rotating;
- in the torque converter, when the propeller shaft

does not turn.
2.10.6 TORQUE CONVERTER SAFETY

S
VALVE SETTING TEST
3
The torque converter safety valve is located on the
upper side of the torque converter support housing. 6
Remove it from the machine disconnecting the steel
pipe connecting it to transmission pump, then remove 1
the screws securing it to the torque converter hous- 2
ing.
Check the specifications of spring (3) in accordance 5
with he description of the data paragraph. 4
Set the valve using the devices and tooling CE-EST
380060081 Diagnostic Kit , see paragraph relative to
special tools.
Supply the valve with SAE 10 oil at a temperature of
about 20 °C (68 °F) with a flow of 10 litre/min.
Under such conditions, plunger (2, fig. 2-98) must open
the discharge port at a pressure of 10 ¸ 11 bar, other- D350R0190
wise change accordingly the quantity of adjusting

washers (S) located under the threaded plug. Fig. 2-98 Section of torque converter safety valve
1. Valve body - 2. Plunger cylinder - 3. Spring - 4. Plunger

stop pin - 5. O-ring - 6. Gasket - S. Adjusting shims.
2.11 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA
Torque converter type ............................................................ single stage, 2-phase

- mounting ............................................................................. mounted on flywheel splines
- conversion ratio at stall ....................................................... 2.32 : 1
- diameter .............................................................................. 406.4 mm (16 in)
TORQUE CONVERTER SAFETY VALVE (fig. 2-98)

Valve pressure setting ............................................................ 10 to 11 bar (145 to 159.5 psi)
Valve setting .......................................................................... by spring pre-loading washers
Pressure variation for each shim ............................................ 0.7 bar
Specifications of spring (3);
- free length of spring ............................................................ 4.5 mm (0.18 in)
- length under a load of 4.3 ÷ 4.8 daN ................................... 40 mm (1.57 in)
Outer diameter of piston (2) .................................................... 13.982 to 14.000 mm (0.550 to 0.551 in)
Diameter of piston (2) seat ..................................................... 14.016 to 14.043 mm (0.552 to 0.553 in)
Gap between piston and relevant seat ................................... 0.016 to 0.061 mm (0.001 to 0.002 in)
TRANSMISSION
Type ....................................................................................... "Full "Power-shift"
Speeds .................................................................................. 3 forward and 3 reverse
S peed engagement clutches ................................................. 5
TRANSMISSION RATIOS
Speed Ratio
1st forward 1 : 2.918
2nd forward 1 :1.714
3rd forward 1 : 0.904
1st reverse 1 : 2.457

2nd reverse 1 : 1.444
3rd reverse 1 : 0.761
Cont.ed: SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA
Thickness of inner toothed steel discs (6, fig. 2-69) ............... 2.42 to 2.58 mm (0.095 to 0.102 in)
Thickness of inner toothed sintered discs (7) ......................... 3.55 to 3.65 mm (0.139 to 0.144 in)
steel ........................................... 2.3 mm (0.090 in)
- maximum wear limit {
sintered ...................................... 3.3 mm (0.129 in)
Clutch disengagement spring (10, fig. 2-69):
- quantity per clutch one
- spring free length ................................................................ 93 mm (3.661 in)
- length of spring under a load of 141 daN ............................. 45 mm (1.771 in)
Outer diameter of internal fixed piston .................................... 201.728 to 201.800 mm (7.942 to 7.945 in)
Inner diameter of seat on mobile piston .................................. 202.050 to 202.165 mm (7.954 to 7.559 in)
- operating play ..................................................................... 0.250 to 0.437 mm (0.009 to 0.017 in)
Inner diameter of speed piston seats ..................................... 224.050 to 224.165 mm (8.821 to 8.825 in)
Outer diameter of pistons ....................................................... 223.500 to 223.600 mm (8.799 to 8.803 in)
- operating play ..................................................................... 0.450 to 0.660 mm (0.018 to 0.026 in)
LUBE OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (fig. 2-78)

Valve opening pressure ..........................................................
Specifications of valve spring (2): 4 bar (58 psi)
- spring free length ................................................................
- spring length under a load of 4.85 to 5.35 daN .................... 37 mm (1.457 in)
14 mm (0.551 in)
TRANSMISSION-TORQUE CONVERTER three sets of gears, one to power the trans-

OIL PUMP (fig. 2-80) ............................................................. mission-torque converter, one to power the
torque converter and the third one to scav-
enge the oil from the transmission gear com-
partment
Make ......................................................................................
Rotation seen from drive shaft ............................................... CNH-LECCE
Ratio between engine and pump rpm ...................................... anticlockwise
Rotal nominal delivery at maximum 1 : 1.24
pump speed (2604 rpm):
- transmission-torque converter power section ...................... 96.5 lt/min (25.5 gpm)
- torque converter power section (A) ...................................... 85 lt/min (22.5 gpm)
- oil scavenging from transmission gear compartment (C) ..... 217 lt/min (57.3 gpm)
Outer diameter of pump gear shafts ....................................... 19.979 to 20.000 mm (0.786 to 0.787 in)
Diameter of shaft seat on gears ............................................. 20.000 to 20.021 mm (0.787 to 0.788 in)
Play between shafts and relevant seat on gears .................... 0.000 to 0.042 mm (0.000 to 0.001 in)
Axial play between gears and relevant pump bodies .............. 0.040 to 0.099 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in)
- maximum play for wear ....................................................... 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
FILTERS
On transmission power pump suction
- torque converter .................................................................. full flow, steel cloth replaceable element with
magnetic rod
On transmission-torque converter
power pump delivery .............................................................. full flow with replaceable paper element
On oil scavenger pump from transmission full flow with metal cloth filtering element
gear compartment ..................................................................
GEARSHIFTING CONTROL VALVE (fig. 2-81 and 2-82) 29.979 to 30.000 mm (1.180 to 1.181 in)
Outer diameter pressure relief valve plunger (4) ..................... 30.020 to 30.041 mm (1.182 to 1.183 in)
Diameter of plunger seat on body (21) .................................... 0.020 to 0.062 mm (0.001 to 0.002 in)
Play between plunger and its seat ..........................................
Inner spring Outer spring
Specifications of pressure relief valve (4) springs:
- free length of spring ............................................................ 129 mm (5.079 in) 129 mm (5.079 in)
- check load .......................................................................... 7.00 to 7.08 daN 13.58 to 15.02 daN
- spring length under check load ............................................
62 mm (2.441 in)
Outer diameter of modulating valve piston (6) ........................ 21.987 to 22.000 mm (0.865 to 0.866 in)
Diameter of piston seat on body ............................................. 22.050 to 22.075 mm (0.868 to 0.869 in)
Play between piston and seat on body ................................... 0.050 to 0.088 mm (0.002 to 0.003 in)
Specifications of modulating valve outer spring:
- spring length under a load of 6.2 daNm ............................... 30 mm (1.181 in)
Specifications of modulating valve inner spring:
- spring length under a load of 11.7 daNm ............................. 25 mm (0.984 in)
Diameter of transmission-torque converter

clutch power spools (2, fig. 2-87) ............................................ 17.989 to 18.000 mm (0.708 to 0.709 in)
Diameter of seats for clutch power spools on body ................ 18.030 to 18.050 mm (0.709 to 0.711 in)
Play between spools and relevant seats ................................ 0.030 to 0.061 mm (0.001 to 0.002 in)
Specifications of transmission-torque converter
clutch power spool return springs:
- spring free length ................................................................ 41.5 mm (1.634 in)
- spring length under a load of 12.4 daNm ............................. 27 mm (1.063 in)
Outer diameter of spool (6, fig. 2-89) ...................................... 9.991 to 9.995 mm (0.393 to 0.394 in)
Inner diameter of seat ............................................................ 10.000 to 10.022 mm (0.394 to 0.395 in)
- mounting play o .................................................................. 0.005 to 0.031 mm (0.0002 to 0.0012 in)
Specifications of distribution shaft:
- spring free length ................................................................ 22.5 mm (0.886 in)
- spring length under a load of 7.4 daNm ............................... 12.5 mm (0.492 in)
Pressure setting of neutral valve
(with flow of 23 to 35 lt/min, 6.1 to 9.2 gpm) ........................... 11.5 to 12.5 bar (166.8 to 181.3 psi)
Outer diameter of neutral valve .............................................. 23.979 to 24.000 mm (0.944 to 0.945 in)
Inner diameter of seat ............................................................ 24.020 to 24.041 mm (0.945 to 0.946 in)
- mounting play ..................................................................... 0.020 to 0.062 mm (0.0008 to 0.0024 in)
2.12 TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening
Item to be tightened Thread (°)
daNm (lb.ft.)
TRANSMISSION
Screw (C1, fig. 2-79) securing flange retaining disc .................. 14 x 1.5 13 (95.8)
Screw (C2) securing manifold (5) to transmission housing ....... 12 x 1.25 10 (73.7)
Screw (C3) securing transmission to rear
transmission housing .............................................................. M16 x 2 23 (169.6)
Screw (C4) securing transmission 14 x 1.5 18 (132.7)
output shaft securing disc (28) ................................................ 12 x 1.25 6 (44.2)
Screw (C5) securing ring (30) ...................................................
Screw (C6) securing covers (2 and 3) to housing (1) ................ 12 x 1.25 12 (88.5)
Screw (C7) securing transmission-converter 12 x 1.25 8 (58.9)
power pump suction manifold .................................................. 12 x 1.25 7 (51.6)
Screw (C8) securing cover (10) to housing (1) .......................... 12 x 1.25 10 (73.7)
Screw (C9) securing manifold (4) to housing (1) .......................
TORQUE CONVERTER - 25 (184.3)

Screw securing torque converter shaft ....................................
GEARSHIFTING CONTROL VALVE (fig. 2-81 and 2-82) 8 x 1.25 1.9 (14)
Screw (C2) securing spring seating cover to body .................... 8 x 1.25 2.5 (18.4)
Screw (C1) assembling body 19 and 20 ................................... 10 x 1.25 5 (36.8)
Screw (C3) assembling body 20 to body 21 .............................
TORQUE CONVERTER - TRANSMISSION PUMP (fig. 2-80) 10 x 1.25 7 (51.6)

Screws securing the pump to torque converter cover ..............
VALVES
Screws securing converter safety valve 10 x 1.25 7 (51.6)
to torque converter ..................................................................
(°) Lubricate with engine oil.
2.13 SPECIAL TOOLS
TOOL CODE DESCRIPTION
Lifting hook for torque converter and clutch removal to be used with 380000961
380000960
Lifting tool for torque converter and clutch removal to be used with 380000960
380000961
Couple of guides for the disassembly and assembly of the torque converter
380000962
Auxiliary hook for transmission removal and installation
380000963
Transmission shaft lifting hook
380000964
Transmission output shaft disassembly/assembly hook
380000965
Transmission lifting hook
380000966
Screws for removal/installation of reverser form flywheel
380000967
Lifting hook for transmission shaft complete with clutches
380000968
Torque converter puller screws
380000969
Transmission and clutch pack stand
380000970
Hook for positioning of transmission on overhaul bench 380000970
380000971
Tool for transmission speed clutch spring removal/installation
380000972
BB3 diagnostic tester
380001303
Adapter cable for BB3
380001471
380060081 CE - EST KIT ASSEMBLY
D180-2M001
ref. code q.ty description

A 380001594 1 PFT-8 Kit hydraulic test
B 380060081 1 Diagnostic kit
Hydraulic PFT - 8
FLOWS - PRESSURES - TEMPERATURES
(380001594)
cod. q.ty description

380001494 1 750L/M Flow Block
380001495 2 700 Bar Pressure Sensors
380001496 2 Temperature Sensors 150 °C
380001497 5 Sensor Cables
380001498 1 Hydraulic Kit Carry Case
380060105 1 PFT-8 Module
DIAGNOSTIC KIT CE - EST

(380060081)
cod. q.ty description

380001501 1 PC to Vehicle Interface
380001502 1 Cable PC to Vehicle Interface
380001503 1 Cable PC to FK Vehicle
380001504 1 Cable PC to FH Vehicle
380001505 1 "SMS key" with FK-EST application software
380060088 1 STHP PC
380001465 1 Docking Station
380001510 1 12V Vehicle Power Supply
380001511 1 PC Carry Case
380001499 1 Printer
380001500 1 USB Printer Cable
380060089 1 STHP HDD
SECTION 3
FINAL DRIVES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 3-3

3.1.1 Final drive (section view and list of parts) ......................................................................... 3-4
3.2 REPAIR PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................... 3-6

3.2.1 Final drive (removal / disassembly) ................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2 Description of installation of front seals (long life) ............................................................ 3-15
3.2.3 Final drive (assembly) ...................................................................................................... 3-16
3.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA ............................................................................................. 3-26

3.3.1 Final drive shaft and bearing fittings ................................................................................. 3-26
3.4 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................................................3-28

3-2 FINAL DRIVES D350
D350 FINAL DRIVES 3-3
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The final drives are of a double reduction type. The generated by the undercarriage, which, on the other
first is a single reduction (with straight tooth gears); hand, is directly connected to the transmission hous-
the second is an epicyclic train (with satellite and plan- ing, absorbing the majority of the loads on the track
etary gears). Final reduction ratio is 1:15.6. chains through the hinging on the two shafts (PIVOT -
Specifications of final drive oil: must meet MIL-2105 SHAFTS).
or Api Service GL5 (SAE 80W-90). The service feature consists of the reduction of the
Quantity to fill with oil final drives: 51 litres (13.4 gal.). service time required to intervene on the machine,
The D350 final drives provide two advantages, one of since the modular type final drives are individually
a technical type, the other of a service type. removable from the unit, without involving the trans-
The technical feature consists of a different arrange- mission housing.
ment of the final drives, being isolated from the stress
1 2
D350M0056
Fig. 3-1 Final drive installed
1. Single reduction final drive - 2. Sprocket - 3. Epicyclic train final drive - 4. Track frame - 5. Transmission housing
3.1.1 FINAL DRIVE (section view and list of parts)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 52
9
50 51 10
11
40
12
13
39
14
38 15
16
37
17
36
18
34-35
21
33
19
31-32
24 20
30
29
28 27 26 25 23 22
D350R0269
Fig. 3-2 Section view of final drive

(For the numbered items please refer to page 3-5)
1. Left final drive housing

2. Straight roller bearing type NJ224ECJ
3. Straight roller bearing type NJ2219ECJ
4. pin 5 x 12
5. Plug M10 x 1
6. Allen screw M12 x 1.5 x 35
7. Pinion sleeve
8. Plywood cover
9. Pinion
10. Rotating seal for shafts
11. DIN 3770 - 210 x 4 NB 70
12. Screws M10 x 25
13. Driven gear securing screw
14. Ex screw M12 x 1.75 x 25
15. Circlip 190 x 4
16. Splined sleeve
17. Left housing cover plate
18. Swinging roller bearing type 23938 CC/W33
19. Circlip 260 x 5
20. Driven gear
21. Ring
22. Plug M20 x 1.5
23. Ex screw M30 x 2 x 90
24. Taper sealing group
25. Crown securing ring
26. Outer hub
27. Crown
28. Ex screw M12 x 1.25 x 30
29. Allen plug CPN M22 x 1.5
30. Crown support
31. Adjusting shim 0.1
33. Solar shaft
36. Washer
37. Ex screw M16 x 60
38. Carrier
39. Planet
40. Planet spacer
41. Ex screw M16 x 1.5 x 30
42. O-Ring 620 x 5.34
43. Full filling straight roller bearings
44. Planet bearing spacer
45. Elastic ring 140
46. Circlip diam. 100
47. Crown securing ring
48. Allen screw m12 x 1.5 x 25
49. Taper roller bearing type m348449/1
50. Wheel support
51. Taper roller bearing type 31038
52. O-Ring 380.6 x 3.53
3.2 REPAIR PROCEDURES
3.2.1 FINAL DRIVE (Removal/Installation) B A

Removal
To remove the final drive it is necessary first to drain
the oil contained inside, proceeding as follows:
- stop the machine with plugs (A), (B), (P) and (S)
located as shown in fig. 3-3 and 3-4;
- Loosen draining plugs (P) and (S);

P D350M0028
- remove plugs (A) and (B) draining the oil;
- repeat the operation on both sides. Fig. 3-3
Once this is over loosen the tension of the track chain,

in order to remove, later on, the track chain.
Then, proceed as follows: S
- remove access cover (C) on track frame removing

securing screws (V).
Loosen the tension of the track chain loosening track

chain valve VR a few turns (fig. 3-5).
Ri
D350R0264
Fig. 3-4
WARNING
Fluid under pressure. Do not reduce the tension
of the track chain by loosening pressure relief
valve (Vs). Do not remove grease fitting (I) installed
on adjusting valve (VR).
Vs VR
D350R0002 D350M0061
Fig. 3-5 Loosening the track chain
VR. Adjusting screw - Vs. Pressure relief valve - C. Cover - V. Securing screw.
Remove the track chain as described in SECTION 5

S V
- UNDERCARRIAGE.
T
WARNING
Never work under or in the vicinity of equipment
or parts of the machine not adequately supported
and blocked.
Lift and handle all heavy parts with lifting devices
of adequate capacity. Make sure that parts are prop-
erly slinged and hooked. Use the lifting eyes pro-
vided for this purpose. Pay attention to persons
in the vicinity of the parts to be lifted.
Rp R
D350R0405
Fig. 3-6
To remove the final drive assembly it is recommended S. Toothed sectors - T. Track frame - V. Sector securing
that the toothed segments be removed first. Thus it is screws - R. Final drive - Rp. Track frame rear guard.
necessary to remove screws (V) securing toothed
sectors (S) to final drive group (R).
Pay attention in moving the machine just the amount
required to prevent the interference with track frame
(T).
Also, remove track frame rear guards (Rp) and lower
guard (Ri fig. 3-4).
Disassembly
Hold the final drive with adequate chains or steel ca-
bles.
Remove the screws (type m20 x 1.5 x 90) securing
the final drive to the machine (fig. 3-7).
WARNING
proper slings and hooks.
D350R0262
Fig. 3-7
Rest the final drive on an appropriate stand (fig. 3-8)
and turn it 90 °.
Pay attention that the drive gear does not get out from
the final drive during the rotation, since it is free.
90°
D350R0261
Fig. 3-8
Extract the bearing holding cover from the drive gear

shaft (fig. 3-9).
D350R0260
Fig. 3-9
Install a simple lifting eye on the drive gear (fig. 3-10)

and extract it, lifting with an appropriate hoist.
D350R0259
Fig. 3-10
Remove the two O-Rings from the outside of the bear-
ing holding housing (fig. 3-11).
D350R0258
Fig. 3-11
Extract the bearing from its housing (fig. 3-12) and

the seal inside the housing.
D350R0257
Fig. 3-12
3 - 10 FINAL DRIVES D350
Turn the final drive 180 °.

Remove the screws M16 x 1.5 of the final drive group
(fig. 3-13) and the two plugs M10, and install the car-
rier cover puller screws.
D350R0250
Fig. 3-13
Remove the taper plugs M20x1.5 and install three lift-
ing eyes on the carrier cover, using an appropriate
lifting device to separate the two parts. Remove the
O-Rings as described in fig. 3-14, paying attention to
prevent losing washers and shims of the sun shaft.
D350R0249
Fig. 3-14
Remove the 3 elastic rings securing the planet groups.

Then extract two by two all bearings (A) three gears A C
(B) and three rings (C) of fig. 3-15.
A
C
A
B D350R0267
Fig. 3-15
D350 FINAL DRIVES 3 - 11
Install a lifting eye on the solar shaft, lift it with an

appropriate device and extract it from the final drive
(fig. 3-16).
WARNING
Avoid kinking chains and steel cables. Always wear
protective gloves when handling chains and ca-
bles.
D350R0244
Fig. 3-16
Remove the 12 screws M16 x 60 at the top (fig. 3-17).
Remove the cover and bearing pre-load shims.
D350R0243
Fig. 3-17
Install two lifting eyes on the crown group. Lift it com-

plete with bearing with an appropriate device (fig. 3-
188) and extract the assembly.
D350R0242
Fig. 3-18
Remove the screws M12 x 1.5 of ring (A) on top and

remove it (fig. 3-19). Extract bearing (B) from the A
toothed crown.
B D350R0241
Fig. 3-19
Install two eyes on the sprocket housing, hold it ad-
equately and extract it from the splines of the sprocket
support (fig. 3-20).
WARNING
bles.
D350R0268
Fig. 3-20
Turn the group 180 °.

Remove the screws M12 x 1.5 securing the cover to
the final drive housing and after holding it with an ap-
propriate device, remove it using the puller screws
(fig. 3-21).
WARNING
Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the
anchor points are strong enough to handle the
expected load. Keep exposed personnel clear of
anchor points and cables or chains.
D350R0266
Fig. 3-21
Remove the 12 screws m12 x 1.75 of securing plate

(A, fig. 3-22) separating it from the gear.
D350R0464
Fig. 3-22
Extract the splined sleeve from the centre of the driven
gear (fig. 3-23).
D350R0252
Fig. 3-23
Remove the elastic ring from the gear support.

Install two lifting eyes on the driven gear.
Lift it in an adequate manner (fig. 3-24) and extract it
from the shaft.
WARNING
D350R0231
Fig. 3-24
Use a press to extract roller bearing (A, fig. 3-25) to

separate it from the driven sprocket. A
D350R0234
Fig. 3-25
Remove the 20 screws M30 x 2 on top (fig. 3-26) and
extract the sprocket support.
D350R0233
Fig. 3-26
Extract the O-Ring (fig. 3-27) from its seat and ex-
tract the inner race with rollers from the sprocket sup-
port.
D350R0232
Fig. 3-27
3.2.2 DESCRIPTION OF INSTALLATION 1

OF FRONT SEALS (LONG LIFE)
Examine accurately the metal rings, checking that
the relevant faces are free from scratches, dents and
signs of wear, due to misalignment or planarity errors.
a
2
3 3
Replace both metal rings (1), fig. 23 and rubber rings

(2), even if one only is defective.
Absolutely avoid mating a used metal ring with a new

one and rings salvaged from different seal pairs.
c
To install the seals, comply with the following rules:
4
1. Eliminate all sharp corners and burrs; clean accu-
rately the rubber ring seats.
2. Clean accurately the rubber rings.
3. Press each metal ring (1) onto the relevant rubber

ring (2) (see detail a).
4. Make sure that the metal ring is properly installed,

by checking that dimension (3) (detail b) isconstant
on the entire circle.
5. Install manually each pair of rings into the relevant

seats on the rubber ring, as illustrated (see detail
c).
d SM9335
6. Before completing the assembly (detail d) clean

with a lint free rag sealing faces (4) and smear a Fig. 3-28
thin film of fluid oil on them.
3.2.3 FINAL DRIVES

(Assembly)
Arrange the housing on an appropriate bench oriented
from the inner side (fig. 3-29).
WARNING
vided for this purpose. Pay attention to persons
in the vicinity of the parts to be lifted.
D350R0230
Fig. 3-29
Lubricate the seat where the sprocket support with
vaseline or oil and insert the O-Ring (fig. 3.30).
WARNING
D350R0232
Fig. 3-30
Install the sprocket support and tighten the 20 screws

M30 x 2 on top (see fig. 3-31) to the torque of 186
daNm (1371.4 lb.ft.).
D350R0233
Fig. 3-31
Press straight roller bearing (A, fig. 3-32) in its seat,

using a press or an appropriate punch. A
Press the roller bearing on sprocket support (B) after
warming it up to 130 ° C (355 °F). Let cool-off to ambi-
ent temperature so that the correct pre-load is B
achieved.
D350R0248
Fig. 3-32
Then, install the first bearing (C, fig. 3-35) on the
sprocket support (after first turning the housing 180 à
C
and inserting the spacer) and the second one (D, fig.
3-34) on the crown group, helping with a punch (E, fig.
3-34). Let the parts to cool-off to ambient temperature
to obtain the correct pre-load on these two bearing as
well.
D350R0237
Fig. 3-33
D E
D350R0240
Fig. 3-34
Turn the final drive 180 °, take the driven gear and
using a press or warming up the gear, install it with an
appropriate device on the sprocket (fig. 3-35).
WARNING
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if pro-
vided. Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
D350R0231
Fig. 3-35
Clean, degrease and lubricate with oil or vaseline the
driven gear (fig. 3-36).
WARNING
D350R0251
Fig. 3-36
Insert the splined sleeve at the centre of the driven

gear (fig. 3-37).
D350R0252
Fig. 3-37
Secure the sleeve on the driven gear using securing

plate (A) with the 12 screws M12 x 1.75 (fig. 3-38)
torque tightened to 11 daNm (81.1 lb.ft.).
D350R0464
Fig. 3-38
Clean, degrease and lubricate the sprocket housing
(fig. 3-39) and press the taper roller bearing races,
after turning it upside down.
D350R0238
Fig. 3-39
After making sure that the driven gear is installed,

turn the housing 180 °.
Hold the sprocket housing in an adequate manner and
insert it on the sprocket support (fig. 3-40).
WARNING
Be sure parts are supported by proper slings and
hooks anchored to points sufficient to hold the
load. Keep all persons away from anchor points,
cables or chains.
D350R0239
Fig. 3-40
Take the crown support and secure it using ring (A)

A
and the 30 screws M12x 1.5 to the toothed crown to a
tightening torque of 12.2 daNm (92.2 lb.ft.) (fig. 3-41).
Use LOCTITE type 243 for the screws. Insert bearing
(B) on the shaft.
D350R0241
Fig. 3-41
Insert the crown group on the wheel support (fig. 3-
42). To adjust the final drive bearings, proceed as fol-
lows:
- once the crown support is installed (30, fig. 3-2) and

after turning the outer hub to set the rollers, install
securing ring (47, fig. 3-2) in the appropriate seat;
- use a toque wrench to check the initial rolling torque;
- tighten at least 6 of the 12 screws, installing them

in an alternative sequence;
- tighten the screws until an increment in the rolling

torque is found; this is going to be the zero play /
zero pre-load condition; D350R0242
- use a feeler gauge to measure the distance between

Fig. 3-42
sprocket support (50, fig. 3-2) and securing ring (47,
fig. 3-2). the reading must be made in three points
at 120 ° in correspondence with the securing screws
and the value to be considered is the arithmetical
mean of the three readings;
- determination of the thickness - value measured -

0.100 to 0.150 mm (0.004 to 0.006 in) (pre-load de-
sired);
- insert the above mentioned shims calculated, tight-

ening the screws to the prescribed toque of 23 daNm
(169.6 lb.ft.) and check the rolling torque that must
fall within the prescribed range of 1.4 to 2 daNm
(10.3 to 14.7 lb.ft.).
Once the adjusting is completed remove the screws,

ring, crown group and sprocket hub.
Install the rotating seal and reinstall the lot, tightening
the 12 screws M16 x 60 (fig. 3-43) to the toque of 28
daNm (206.4 lb.ft).
D350R0243
Fig. 3-43
Insert the solar shaft (fig. 3-44).
WARNING
D350R0244
Fig. 3-44
Take the carrier cover and after cleaning and lubricat-

ing it, insert three rings (A) as described in fig. 3-45. A
D350R0246
Fig. 3-45
After inserting tool (A) fig. 3-46, position planet gear

(B) fig. 3-46 and insert inside it the first needle bearing,
spacer and retaining circlip (diam. 100 mm, 3.9 in). Set B
the assembly and insert the second spacer, then the
second needle bearing and bearing retaining outer
circlip (diam. 100 mm, 3.9 in).
Repeat the operation for all the planet gears.
A
D350R0270
Fig. 3-46
Lift the group with an appropriate device and install
the O-Ring (fig. 3-47).
WARNING
bles.
D350R0249
Fig. 3-47
Assemble the group onto the sprocket housing using

the 3 manoeuvre screws to facilitate and comply with
the single positioning between the crown and the holes
of the carrier cover.
Tighten the lot with LOCTITE 518 and screws m16 x
1.5 to the torque of 30 daNm (221.2 lb.ft.) (fig. 3-48).
D350R0250
Fig. 3-48
Turn the final drive 180 °, then take housing cover (A)
lift it with an adequate device and tighten it on the
final drive housing, using LOCTITE 518 and screws A
M12 x 1.5 (fig. 3-49) to a torque of 9 daNm (66.4 lb.ft.).
D350R0254
Fig. 3-49
Take the drive gear and press the bearing inner race
(B, fig. 3-50) after warming it up in an induction oven.
D350R0255
Fig. 3-50
Using tool 380000920 insert the seal inside the bear-

ing housing, then, using tool 380000923 bearing outer
race (D) and bearing (C) of fig. 3-51.
D350R0236
Fig. 3-51
Install the two outer O-Rings of the bearing housing

(fig. 3-52).
D350R0258
Fig. 3-52
Take the drive gear and insert it in its seat (fig. 3-53).
WARNING
bles.
D350R0245
Fig. 3-53
Insert the bearing housing (fig. 3-54) on the drive gear

with the help of a puncher.
D350R0247
Fig. 3-54
Turn the final drive 90 ° and hook it with an appropri-

ate device (fig. 3-55).
WARNING
D350R0261
Fig. 3-55
Install the final drive on the machine, using LOCTITE
518 and screws TEM20 x 1.5 to a tightening torque of
60 daNm (442.4 lb.ft.) (fig. 3-56).
D350R0262
Fig. 3-56
3.3.1 FINAL DRIVE SHAFT AND BEARING FITTINGS
Dp = 996.25 mm (39.2 in)

A
B
C
D
E
F
L
I
G
H
M
N
680 mm (26.7 in)
D350R0400
Fig. 3-64 Sectional view of final drive
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA FOR BEARING MOUNTING
mm in
Min. Max Min. Max
A.
- Inner diameter of bearing 94.980 to 95.000 3.739 to 3.740
- Outer diameter of drive gear 95.003 to 95.025 3.740 to 3.741
- Mounting interference 0.003 interf. to 0.045 interf. 0.0001 interf. to 0.0017 interf.
B.
- Outer diameter of bearing 169.975 to 170.000 6.692 to 6.693
- Inner diameter of bearing housing 169.993 to 170.018 6.693 to 6.694
- Mounting interference 0.043 clear. to 0.007 interf. 0.0017 clear. to 0.0003 interf.
C.
- Outer diameter of drive gear 120.003 to 120.025 4.724 to 4.725
- Mounting interference 0.003 interf. to 0.045 interf. 0.0001 interf. to 0.0017 interf.
D.
- Inner diameter of final drive housing 214.993 to 215.022 8.464 to 8.465
E.
- Diameter of carrier shaft 100.003 to 100.018 3.937 to 3.938
F.
- Inner diameter of planetary gear 139.687 to 139.709 5.499 to 5.500
- Mounting interference 0.037 clear. to 0.084 clear. 0.0014 clear. to 0.0033 clear.
G.
- Outer diameter of sprocket support 190.004 to 190.024 7.480 to 7.481
H.
- Inner diameter of driven wheel 259.959 to 259.991 10.235 to 10.236
I.
- Outer diameter of sprocket support 190.017 to 190.037 7.481 to 7.482
- Interference 0.037 interf. to 0.067 interf. 0.0014 interf. to 0.0026 interf.
L.
- Inner diameter of hub 289.870 to 289.922 11.412 to 11.414
M.
- Outer diameter of crown support 247.700 to 247.746 9.752 to 9.754
N.
- Inner diameter of hub 346.013 to 346.049 13.622 to 13.624
- Interference 0.014 clear. to 0.062 interf. 0.0005 clear. to 0.0024 interf.
3.4 SPECIAL TOOLS
FINAL DRIVES
Tool for mounting of seal on pinion sleeve
380000920
Tool for mounting of seal on pinion sleeve
380000921
Puncher for roller bearing outer race on pinion sleeve
380000923
380000925
380000926
Puncher for bearing outer race on epicyclic crown gear support
380000927
Puncher for bearing outer race on epicyclic crown gear support
380000928
Puncher for bearing outer race on sprocket support
380000929
Puncher for roller bearing on planet
380000930
Fitter for driven wheel with bearing on sprocket support
380000932
Caliper for check of washer play on gear carrier
380000933
Reference for caliper 380000933
380000934
SECTION 4
BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL
INDEX
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAG.

4.1.1 Hydraulic braking system .................................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.2 Main components of brake system ................................................................................... 4-7
Brake/fan-drive pump ..................................................................................................... 4-7
Brake feed valve block ................................................................................................... 4-8
Brake pedal valve .......................................................................................................... 4-9
Brake oil filters .............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.1.3 Hydraulic steering system ................................................................................................ 4-15
4.1.4 Main components of steering system ...............................................................................4-16
Hydraulic motor .............................................................................................................4-16
Steering pilot valve block ..............................................................................................4-17
Ports on pilot valve block ..............................................................................................4-18
4.2 FAILURE DIAGNOSIS ........................................................................................................ 4-19

4.2.1 Diagnosis display .............................................................................................................4-19
4.3 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS.......................................................................................... 4-22

4.3.1 Check of hydraulic pressures ...........................................................................................4-22
4.3.2 Brake pedal adjustment ....................................................................................................4-24
4.3.3 Check and adjustment of brake feed valve block .............................................................4-25
4.3.4 Steering levers setting ..................................................................................................... 4-26
4.4 REPAIR PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 4-29

4.4.1 Brake pedal valve (Removal/Disassembly) ......................................................................4-29
4.4.2 Brake hydraulic pump (Removal/Disassembly/Reassembly) ............................................ 4-31
4.4.3 Brakes and steering differential ........................................................................................4-33
Removal (preliminary operations) ..................................................................................4-33
Removal of ring gear ..................................................................................................... 4-36
Disassembly of planetary carrier assy ........................................................................... 4-37
Disassembly of planetary carrier differential assy ......................................................... 4-37
Disassembly of twin sun gear ....................................................................................... 4-38
Disassembly of brakes assy ......................................................................................... 4-40
Reassembly of brakes drum assy ................................................................................. 4-43
Reassembly of twin sun gear ........................................................................................ 4-46
Reassembly of planetary assy ...................................................................................... 4-48
Reassembly and installation of ring gear assy ............................................................... 4-49
Reassembly of brakes/steering differential unit in rear housing ..................................... 4-50
4.4.4 Check and inspection of brake discs pack ....................................................................... 4-53
4.4.5 Support assemblies (Removal/Disassembly) ...................................................................4-54
Disassembly of steering differential supports ................................................................4-57
4.4.6 Support assemblies (Reassembly/Installation) ................................................................. 4-64
4.4.7 Adjustment of steering pinion bearing preload .................................................................. 4-75
4.4.8 Adjustment of steering bevel gear .................................................................................... 4-76
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAG.
4.4.9 Bevel gear (Removal/Disassembly of bevel pinion and gear) ............................................ 4-78
4.4.10 Procedure for bevel gear adjustment ................................................................................ 4-93
4.4.11 Procedure for adjusting bevel pinion bearing preload ........................................................ 4-94
4.4.12 Reassembly of rear housing guards ................................................................................. 4-95
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................................................4-96

D350 BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL 4-3
4.1.1 HYDRAULIC BRAKING SYSTEM A brake pedal valve (directly controlled by a central
pedal in the cab) operates straight to the brakes, tak-
The hydraulic braking system is completely independ-
ing pressure out from the circuit.
ent from the steering system and its main compo-
The rear housing (8) is composed of bevel gear (driven
nents are:
directly by the transmission), brake discs (oil bath)
and steering differential. The rear housing serves the
- A twin hydraulic pump for brakes and transmission
function of oil tank and is utilized for piloting the disc
circuits (1, hydraulic circuit)
packs and lubricating the mechanisms in the hous-
ing.
- An oil suction filter (10) and an oil delivery filter (2)
The brakes are engaged when the brake pedal is de-
pressed, in this way pressure is taken out from the
- A feed valve block (3)
circuit and consequently the compression of the
springs locks the brake discs pack by means of the
- A brake pedal valve (4)
braking device.
The machine brakes are applied in the following con-
- A rear housing (8)
ditions:
The hydraulic pump (1) sucks oil from the rear hous-
- machine stationary with engine stopped (parking
ing (8) through an oil strainer (10) and sends the oil to
brake);
port (P) on the feed valve block (3), through the filter
(2).
- machine stationary with engine running and safety
The feed valve (17) keeps the oil pressure in the cir-
levers in lifted position;
cuit at 25 ± 2 bar. An accumulator (5) guarantees pres-
sure in the circuit in case of engine failure.
- machine travelling, central brake pedal depressed
(service brake).
4-4 BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL D350
4-5
D350
DR
Set 25 bar
4
7
P
1 2 2
T M18x1,5
Q=65 l/min
M18x1,5
3,5 bar 6 1 A M16x1,5
ß 22=75
B
M14x1,5
5
12 C
PP
V1
110 bar +- 2
11
B
2600 RPM
1 C1
25 cc/REV
1 2 A
2600 RPM
2 8,4 cc/REV Q= 21,8 L/min
BRAKE DISCS
LUBRICATION BRAKES
23 bar +- 1 CONTROL
14
T
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
8
FAN-DRIVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
13
10
9 9
150µ nom
D350R0071
Fig. 4-1 Hydraulic braking system
1. Twin hydraulic pump - 2. Oil filter (delivery) - 3. Feed valve block - 4. Brake pedal valve - 5. Accumulator - 6. Pressure relief valve - 7. Directional solenoid valve - 8. Rear housing - 9. Brake discs - 10. Oil filter (suction) - 11. Pressure check fitting - 12. Sequence valve - 13. Counter-
pressure valve - 14. Safety solenoid valve for quick decompression of brake piston oil.
4.1.2 MAIN COMPONENTS OF

BRAKE SYSTEM Pump delivery at maximum speed (2600 rpm) with
engine at maximum power speed (2000 rpm).
Brake/fan-drive pump Section (1) brake system: 65 l/min
(1, hydraulic circuit) Section (2) fan-drive system: 21.8 l/min
Pump type .............................................. gear pump

Make .................................. SAUER SUNDSTRAND
Model ................................. PNN 25+8S C041LBD.F
Double gear pump fitted on torque converter housing

cover, one section feeds the brake system and the
other section feeds the fan-drive system.
The arrow indicates the direction of

rotation of the drive shaft and the
delivery side
SUCTION
SUCTION
2600 RPM
Sect. 1 25 CC/REV
65 l/min
2600 RPM
Sect. 2 8.4 CC/REV
21.8 l/min
DELIVERY
2 DELIVERY 1
P1
2 1
P
C
D350R0092
Fig. 4-2 Brake/fan-drive pump
C. Torque converter - P. Brake pump - P1. Equipment pump - 1. Pump section for brake system - 2. Pump section for fan-
drive system.
Brake feed valve block

(3, hydraulic brake system) 3
DR
The feed valve block is installed on the left side un-
der the cab. The valve block can be reached just by 7
Set 25 bar
opening the left cover under the cab. 1
3
P 1 2
1. Brake pump
2
3. Feed valve block 3
2
5. Accumulator (pre-charge at 13 bar)

6. Pressure relief valve (set at 25 bar) 6
1
7. Directional solenoid valve
C
Ports on the block: PP 5
F14336
DR. Drain
P. From hydraulic pump Fig. 4-3
C. Brakes lubrication
PP. Pressure check fitting
1. To brake pedal valve
2. To brake pedal valve
3
6
PP 2
1
DR P
D350R0091
Fig. 4-4
Brake pedal valve

(4, hydraulic brake system)
The brake pedal valve is installed at the bottom of the DR

(M12 x 1,5)
cab and is operated through direct linkage to the brake
pedal.
T
(M22 x 1,5)
Ports on the valve: A
(M16 x 1,5) P
P. To the brakes (delivery) (M22 x 1,5)
DR. To the brakes (drain)
T. To the housing (return) B
(M14 x 1,5)
A. To the feed valve block (pos. 1)
B. From the feed valve (pos. 2). SM9186
Fig. 4-5 Hydraulic circuit of the valve
DR
D350R0089
Fig. 4-6
B
T D350R0090
Fig. 4-7
4 - 10 BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL D350
24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 25
11
P
12
13
14
B A
30 20 19 18 17 29 16 15 23
SM9188
33 26 26 28 27
21
24
T
22 31 32
SM9189
Fig. 4-8 Brake pedal valve section
1. Cover - 2. Spring - 3. Spring seat - 4. Piston - 5. Body assy - 6. Push rod - 7. Inner cup - 8. Washer - 9. Spring - 10. Outer
cup - 11. Guide - 12. Push pin - 13. Cover - 14. Cam - 15. Ring - 16. Seal - 17. Piston spring - 18. Piston - 19. Spacer -
20. Gasket - 21. Pin - 22. Stop dowel - 23. Spring pin - 24. Seal ring - 25. O-Ring 2.62 x 34.59 - 26. Lock washer -
27. Screw M8 x 55 - 28. Screw M8 x 35 - 29. O-Ring 2.62 x 20.29 - 30. O-Ring 2.62 x 18.72 - 31. Sealing washer - 32. Plug
M10 x 1.25 - 33. Screw M8 x 75
D350 BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL 4 - 11
Brake oil filters
Delivery filter (2)

(2, hydraulic circuit)
The delivery filter of the brake system can be reached
by opening the cover on the left side of the machine F
in engine compartment.
It is a full-flow spin-on filter with cartridge replaceable

every 500 operated hours (30 µ nominal and bypass
valve set at 3.5 bar).
Tightening torque: 4 daNm
D350M0108
Fig. 4-9
Oil delivery filter:
1 - Filter support
2 - Filter cartridge 1
F - Transmission / torque converter oil filter
SM9171
Fig. 4-10
Oil suction filter

(10, hydraulic circuit)
The oil suction filter (Fa) of brakes / clutches circuit
can be reached by opening the right-hand cover.
It is a full-flow spin-on filter, replaceable every 1000
operated hours (150 µ nominal without bypass valve).
Fa
D350M0155
Fig. 4-11
D350 4 - 13
HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM
Ma Ls
T
M
380 +- 5 bar
MA MB
2 2
A S B
T 3
MICROCONTROLLER
P
4 D
R S X L
A b1 B1 A1 b4 X1 B4 A4 Y1 K
TR 40 bar TL 210 + 5 210 + 5
0 0 5 bar
T P
16 13
C A
STEERING
PS
B SYSTEM
3 Vp
B
C
12 10
PM A 1
A
D 5 bar
14 (170/350)
17 11 ± 5 bar
9
P T P T
3
380 ± 10 bar
P T
15
a1 Mp a4 P MLS T
15 BLADE
LS
5 SECTION
P1
6 P
Va
8 S
X 18
S
35bar
45bar
7 1,3 - 1,5 bar
P2 T PR
2 bar
B 25 ≥75
D350R0072
Fig. 4-12
C. CONTROL UNIT - D. Equipment / Steering control valve - Ls. Steering control levers - M. Steering hydraulic motor - Ma. Blade control joystick - P. Hydraulic piston pump with variable displacement - Va. Feed valve block - Vp. Steering pilot valve block - S. Oil cooler -
1. Steering control spool - 2. Steering spool safety valves - 3. Proportional solenoid valves - 4. Pressure reduction valve (40 bar) - 5. Accumulators - 6. Pressure reduction valve (35 bar) - 7. Feed block solenoid valve - 8. Feed block pressure relief valve (45 bar) - 9. LS line
decompression valve (0.7 l/min) - 10. Load Sensing limiting valve - 11. Pressure relief valve - 12. Blade control spool - 13. Blade spool safety valves - 14. Unloading valve - 15. Pressure compensators - 16. Three-way valve - 17. Pilot valve - 18. Oil return filter.
4.1.3 HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM movement is transformed into an electric signal that
is sent through the CONTROL UNIT (C) to the steer-
The steering and the equipment control circuits are
ing pilot valves block (Vp), that will operate piloting
within one single hydraulic circuit using the same oil.
directly the steering spool (1) of the control valve (D).
The two circuits, although they share some hydraulic
The piston pump (P) driven by the torque converter
components, will be described separately.
feeds both the steering and the equipment circuits by
The equipment control circuit is described in Section
means of the control valve. The regulation of pump
6 - EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
delivery sharing system operates with steering prior-
The two circuits have independent operating pressures:
ity logic, through the Load Sensing signal between
control valve and pump.
- steering circuit max. press. 350 ± 5 bar
When the application requires high steering perform-
- equipment circuit max. press. 200 ± 5 bar.
ances, during simultaneous steering and equipment
operation, it will occur that at the pressure of 200 bar,
the pump delivery to the equipment circuit will be nil,
The steering circuit main components are:
because the delivery will be totally absorbed by the
hydraulic motor. Therefore the advance speed does
- An hydraulic piston pump for steering / equipment
not change, because the power that is taken out from
circuits (P)
one track is transferred equally to the other track, re-
sulting in a continuous steering without any track stops
- An hydraulic motor (M)
and with an exact control of the course. When the
machine is travelling on a straight course without op-
- A steering / equipment control valve (D)
erating the equipment the power is conveyed totally
to the bevel gear and then to the tracks that are kept
- A steering pilot valves block (Vp)
at the same speed because the hydraulic motor in
this case is stationary.
- A feed valve block (Va)
If the steering control levers are operated one by one
with transmission in neutral, the hydraulic delivery will
- Two steering control levers (Ls)
flow (without operating the equipment) completely to
the hydraulic motor. The hydraulic motor tries then to
- An oil cooler (S)
force the two tracks to move at the same speed (from
0 to 2 km/h) but in relative opposite rotation. There-
- A CONTROL UNIT-Microcontroller (C)
fore the machine can slue on its own axis with clock-
wise rotation by shifting the right-hand control lever
only and with anticlockwise rotation by shifting the
The D350 is equipped with a steering differential that
left-hand lever only.
allows a dozer to have continuous power on both
tracks when steering, varying track speed without ever
An oil cooler (S) on the oil return circuit allows a con-
stopping it. The speed of a track will increase or de-
stant reduction of the hydraulic oil temperature so as
crease equally with respect to the other track, without
to guarantee an adequate operation of the hydraulic
any power loss in load pushing cycle. This system is
circuit.
particularly profitable also in finish dozing applications,
specially in restricted areas.
When the operator shifts the steering levers (Ls), their
4.1.4 MAIN COMPONENTS OF Hydraulic motor

STEERING SYSTEM Make .......................................................REXROTH
Note – For following components:
Type ................. fixed displacement A2 FE 180/61W
- Hydraulic piston pump with variable displacement
(P).
- Control valve (D).
- Feed valve block (Va).

Refer to Section 6 - EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC CIR-
CUIT in this Manual.
MA MB
1 A1 S B1
2
Hydraulic motor circuit
D350R0088
Fig. 4-13
A. To control valve steering/equipment - B. To control valve steering/equipment - S. To oil cooler - 1. Hydraulic motor
REXROTH - 2. Seal - 3. Screw 16 x 1.5 x 45.
Steering pilot valve block

(Vp, hydraulic circuit) Steering control levers
The steering pilot valve block is installed on the lower

ROPS pillar and can be reached by opening the right-
hand door under the cab.
Hydraulic circuit
Vp. Pilot valves block
3. Proportional solenoid valves CONTROL UNIT
4. Pressure reducing valve. (40 bar) Microcontroller
16. Three-way valve
17. Pilot valve.
4
R S X L
TR 40 bar TL
T P 16
C A
B Vp
PS
PM
C
A
3
D 5 bar
A
17
P T P T
3
P T
D350R0087
Fig. 4-14
Ports on pilot valve block

15
P. From oil feed block
T. To oil tank
L. To b1 of control valve
R. To a1 of control valve
X. To y1 of control valve
S. To b4 of control valve
PM. Joystick piloting
PS. Lift piloting PM
15. Proportional solenoid valves
PS
T
X
L R
D350R0085
Fig. 4-15
D350R0086
Fig. 4-16
4.2 FAILURE DIAGNOSIS
4.2.1 DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY

The display is provided with 5 text boxes to show up
the following messages: 5 text fields
A. Indication of operated hours

The engine running hours are indicated for about 1
second when the ignition switch is ON, while the
instrument panel runs a general test. To show again
the engine hours on the display, the operator must
turn the ignition switch OFF and ON again. The
hours will remain on the display with engine
stopped.
SM9191
or
Fig. 4-17
B. Indication of engaged gear + failure code
- The first box indicates the engaged gear Failure error E = Error
Engaged gear Failure code

- The second box indicates the letter E when there
1st gear
is a failure.
- The 3rd - 4th - 5th box indicate the failure code that
is of two types.
Failure codes of a single component of the brakes/

clutches and transmission control system (see
table 1).
Failure codes for more than one component (see Failure example
table 2). SM9192
Fig. 4-18
When one of the following failure codes appears on referring to table 1.

the display, the failed component can be identified
TABLE 1
Failure
Failed component
Code
Left proportional solenoid valve coil 001
Right proportional solenoid valve coil 002
Forward speed solenoid "F" 004
Reverse speed solenoid "R" 008
1st speed solenoid 016
3rd speed solenoid 032
Left steering lever solenoid 064
Right steering lever solenoid 128
TABLE 2
Left proport. Right proport. Forward Reverse 1st speed 3rd speed Left steering Right
solenoid solenoid speed speed solenoid solenoid lever steering lever
Faulty component valve coil valve coil solenoid "F" solenoid "R" solenoid solenoid
Left proportional solenoid

valve coil 001 003 005 009 017 033 065 129
Right proportional solenoid

valve coil 002 006 010 018 034 066 130
Forward speed solenoid "F" 004 012 020 036 068 132
Reverse speed solenoid "R" 008 024 040 072 136
1st speed solenoid 016 048 080 144
3rd speed solenoid 032 096 160
Left steering lever solenoid 064 192
Failure code reverse speed solenoid "R" = 008

Addition of failure codes on the display Failure code 1st speed solenoid = 016
If the failed components are two, make reference to sponding to the two components, determines the fail-
TABLE 2 where the failure code is defined by the ure code 024 that is the addition of the two single
addition of the two single failure codes indicated in codes.
TABLE 1. For example, the code 024 indicates that
there are two failed components: the cell on top of the
Failure code reverse speed "R" = 008 +
column indicates the 1st speed solenoid, while the
Failure code 1st speed = 016
cell to the left indicates reverse speed solenoid "R".
In TABLE 2 the crossing of column and line corre- Failure code displayed for both = 024
4.3 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4.3.1 CHECK OF HYDRAULIC

WARNING
PRESSURES
Before operating the machine or its equipments,
The oil pressure of the brake circuit can be checked be sure that no person is within the manoeuvring
connecting a pressure gauge, with engine stopped, to area of the machine. Make a complete walk-around
the fitting on the diagnostic panel (BRAKE) after re- inspection of the machine before mounting in
moval of the relevant plug. operator's compartment. Sound the horn.
When checking oil pressures in hydraulic circuits, be
sure that the instrument scale is adequate for meas- Run the engine at maximum speed (2100 ÷ 2200 rpm)
uring the pressures to be checked. and check the relevant pressures that must
correspond to the nominal pressures of the following
Start the engine and move the machine repeatedly in table.
forward and reverse speed, operating at the same time
the steering controls in order to warm up the oil in the Nominal pressures table
circuits.
Brake pressure 18 ± 22 bar
Hydraulic motor pressure A1 350 ± 5 bar
WARNING
Hydraulic motor pressure B1 350 ± 5 bar
Do not run the engine of this machine in closed
areas without enough ventilation for driving away Piloting pressure a1 30 ± 2 bar
harmful exhaust-gas emissions.
Steering pressure b1 350 ± 5 bar
Equipment pressure b1 200 ± 5 bar
1 SPEED LUBE
CONVERTER PUMP
2 SPEED FORWARD
3 SPEED REVERSE BRAKE
D350R0075
Fig. 4-19
Remove the two plugs and connect two pressure

gauges to fittings (A1) and (B1) on the hydraulic motor WARNING
(Fig. 4-20).
Before operating the machine or its equipments,
be sure that no person is within the manoeuvring
When checking oil pressures in hydraulic circuits, be
area of the machine. Make a complete walk-around
sure that the instrument scale is adequate for meas-
inspection of the machine before mounting in
uring the pressures to be checked.
operator's compartment. Sound the horn.
A1 B1
D350R0077
Fig. 4-20
The pressures (a1) and (b1) (steering and equipment)

can be checked connecting the pressure gauges to
the two fittings of the control valve piloting feed block
(Fig. 4-21). The first fitting shows equipment control
spool piloting pressure, while the second fitting shows
the maximum hydraulic pressure and the maximum
pressure of the steering circuit. Connect two pressure
gauges to these two fittings and proceed to check
pressures.
a1 b1
D350R0078
Fig. 4-21
4.3.2 BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT

Set the brake pedal (1) at the height of L = 175 mm
from cab floor, operating on the buffer (2).
Link tie-rod (3) to the adjustable clevis (4). 4

2
Adjust tie rod length (3) to be linked to lever (5) in full 1
stroke position.
6
Tighten locknut (6).
Unscrew the buffer (2) to eliminate almost completely

the clearance with the pedal and lock it with the rel-
evant nut.
CAB FLOOR
Depress brake pedal (1) to full stroke taking care to
7
avoid forcing lever (5) beyond its end of stroke.
Adjust the screw (7) to come in contact with brake

pedal (1). 3
Release the brake pedal, loosen the screw (7) two

turns and lock the nut.
Adjust the contact of the push-rod (9) with the screw 5

(8), so as to have both brake pedal (1) and push-rod
(9) at end of stroke.
Lock the damper and the push-rod (9) with the two
locknuts (10-11).
D350R0084
Fig. 4-22
2
3
11
9
8
10
D350R0079
Fig. 4-23
4.3.3 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF

BRAKE FEED VALVE BLOCK
(Ref. 3 in hydraulic braking system)
Open the left side cover as indicated in Fig. 4-25 and Pressure relief valve
connect a pressure gauge (30 bar scale) to the pres-
sure check fitting (PP) on the feed valve block.
Start and run the engine at maximum power

(2100 ÷ 2200 rpm) and check the pressure setting of
the pressure relief valve that should be 22.5 ÷ 27.5
bar with an oil delivery of 50 l/min.
If the pressure is not correct, proceed as follows:

1
- Loosen the locknut (2) and turn screw (1) clockwise
or anticlockwise so as to adjust the pressure, set-
ting it at 22.5 ÷ 27.5 bar. 2
- Tighten locknut (2).

D350R0080
Fig. 4-24
Left side under cab door

WARNING
Disconnect and connect all fittings with engine
stopped and hydraulic system inactive. Oil escap-
ing under pressure from loose fittings can cause
personal injuries and damages.
Use safety glasses with side shields or goggles.
PP
Quick coupling
for pressure
check
PP 2
F14340
Fig. 4-25
4.3.4 STEERING LEVERS SETTING The following special tools are necessary to carry out
the setting:
The setting procedure must be performed on the ma-
chine after any replacement or repair involving the 380001471 Cable with setting box
steering levers or the transmission/steering CONTROL 380001303 Instrument BB3.
UNIT.
From a functional point of view the two procedures
The setting of the steering levers on the machine can are equivalent, but the procedure that also includes
be made in two different ways. the use of the instrument (BB3) allows checking the
Either using only the cable (BB3) and the cab con- correctness of the parameters set by the Manufac-
trols or using in addition also the instrument (BB3). turer, therefore it is recommended to choose always
this procedure.
1 3 4
Cable BB3
2 B A
Setting box Cable BB3
CAB
7 8 9 MENU
4 5 6 TEACH BB3
1 2 3 PROC
- 0 - F1
ALT CLEAR ENTER F2
D350R0082
Fig. 4-26 Schema di collegamento
A. Setting switch - B. BASE/DSD switch - 1. Plate on cab pillar - 2. Plug - 3. Cab connector - 4. Connector of cable BB3.
(*) For the ROPS version, open the side cover on the left side of operator's compartment to have access to the
CONTROL UNIT compartment.
Levers setting procedure without instrument BB3 1. Arrange the two switches on the setting box as
follows:
Refer to the connection layout illustrated in Fig. 4-26
and proceed as follows: Switch A in position "CAL"
Interruttore B in posizione "DSD"
Remove the plate (1*) from the front left pillar of the
cab and pull out the plug (2) fitted on the electrical 2. Lower safety levers
connector (3), then join connector (4) to connector
(3). 3. Turn ignition switch to position "ON" (second click
of the key-switch) and "0" will be displayed.
ON START
ACC.
OFF
Ignition key
DISPLAY
D350M0078
Fig. 4-27
4. Press the neutral pushbutton "N" on the arm and 9. Release levers in neutral position (setting of con-
the display will indicate "CAL0". trol levers in full stroke position completed).
5. Press again neutral pushbutton "N"; the display 10. Turn ignition key to position "OFF" and discon-
will show "00" and successively "0" (setting of nect connector (4) from connector (3).
control levers in neutral position completed).
11. Put plug (2) on connector (3) and install again
6. Press neutral pushbutton "N"; the display will show plate (1) on the cab pillar.
"CAL1".
12. Steering levers setting completed.
7. Move both levers at the same time to full stroke.
8. Keeping levers at full stroke press neutral

pushbutton "N"; "FF" will be displayed and suc-
cessively "0".
Levers setting procedure with instrument BB3

1. Connect cable BB3 to the machine connector as N
illustrated in Fig. 4-26
2. Turn ignition switch to "ON" position (second click).
3. After monitor check, set switch on "CAL".
4. Press key "F1" on BB3.
5. Successively the BB3 display will show: "GO ON

ENTER".
6. Press key ENTER on BB3 (0 setting).
7. Successively the BB3 display will show: D350R0083
PUT T1 & T2 TO MAX START Þ ENTER.. Fig. 4-28
8. Move both levers to full stroke and keeping them

in this position press ENTER key on BB3.
9. The display shows: ADJUSTED and successively

the window MANNESMANN REXROTH previously
shown after monitor check.
Check of the setting

1. Press key on BB3 identified by an arrow ….. Þ .
2. The display shows the window INPUT SIGNALS.
3. T / % indicates the stroke of the steering levers.
4. With levers in neutral position T / % should be

zero for both sides (L, R).
5. When the shifting of the levers starts to become

hard it should be 43% ± 1.
6. At full stroke it should be 100%.
4.4.1 BRAKE PEDAL VALVE

(Removal/Disassembly)
Removal
Disconnect the hoses from the control valve, identify
each hose with a tag indicating location, and remove
the two screws (2) with washers that fix the control
valve to the bracket (3).
Remove the brake valve (1).
4
Disassembly
Remove all fittings and washers, remove the screws
(4) and relevant washers. Remove cover (5) from valve 5
body. 1
3 2 SM9207
Brake pedal valve linkage Fig. 4-29 Brake pedal valve

Use an appropriate screw (Ø 4 mm - pitch 0.75 mm) 1. Brake control valve - 2. Valve fastening screws
to remove dowel (9) from the cover, to let shaft (10) M10 x 1.5 - 3. Valve bracket - 4. Upper cover screws M8 x
axially free. 1.25 - 5. Cover.
Section view of valve cover (5)

10 6 5
Remove plug (7) and sealing washer (8) from cover 7
(5) in order to have access to the spring pin (23, Fig.
8
4-31) retaining the cam (14, Fig. 4-31). Pull out the
lever and relevant shaft, using a driver tool. Remove
the square key from the shaft and the relevant seal.
On the other side of the valve, remove the screws 9

(24, Fig. 4-31) from the cover (1). Hold the cover fast
when loosening the last two screws because of the
spring compression. Remove the cover and the
O-Ring, the spring (2) and the cup. SM9208
Fig. 4-30 Section view of valve cover
6. Lip seal - 7. Plug M10 x 1.25 - 8. Sealing washer

10 x 16 x 1 - 9. Dowel - 10. Shaft.
On the opposite side remove the guide (11), the push and the cup (10). Pull out the ring (15) with the O-Ring
rod (12) and the O-Ring (25), then remove the push (29), the spring (17) and the shut-off valves, large and
rod assy. (6). Compress the spring (9) and take out small (18 and 19).
the horseshoe cotter (8), the spacer, the spring (9)
24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 25
P
11
12
13
14
30 20 19 18 17 29 15 23
B A
SM9188
Fig. 4-31 Section view of brake control valve
1. Cover - 2. Spring - 3. Spring seat - 4. Piston - 5. Body assy - 6. Push rod - 7. Inner cup - 8. Washer - 9. Spring - 10. Outer
cup - 11. Guide - 12. Push pin - 13. Cover - 14. Cam - 15. Ring - 16. Seal - 17. Piston spring - 18. Piston - 19. Spacer -
20. Gasket - 23. Spring pin - 24. Cover fastening screw M8 x 75 - 25. O-Ring 2.62 x 34.59 - 29. O-Ring 2.62 x 20.29 -
30. O-Ring 2.62 x 18.72.
4.4.2 BRAKE HYDRAULIC PUMP

(Removal/Disassembly/Reassembly)
3 5 8 6 7
The oil to the steering differential circuit is supplied 9
by the equipment hydraulic pump; for the relevant 10
disassembly instructions refer to Section 6 - EQUIP-
MENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, in this Manual.
Removal
To remove the pump from the torque converter cover 3
it is necessary to:
11
- tilt the cab and disconnect the piping from the pump C1 2 1
(1). SM9209
- remove the fastening screws of the front cover to Fig. 4-32 Section view of brake hydraulic pump
the converter housing (C) and take the pump out.
C1. Torque value 5 daNm - 1. Pump fastening screw -
2. Rear cover - 3. O-Ring - 5. Pump body - 6. Dowel pin -
7. Supports - 8. and 9. Pump gears - 10. Key - 11. Front
Disassembly cover.
The pump components can be split up by removing
the screws (1), the front and rear covers and pulling
out the supports (7) together with the gears (8 and 9).
Parts inspection
WARNING
Never use gasoline or solvents or other flamma-
ble fluids to clean parts. Use authorized commer-
cial, non-flammable, non-toxic solvents.
Clean all parts thoroughly and blow them with dry

compressed air.
Inspect the support bushings of the pump gears; re-
place if they present scores, pitting or excessive wear.
Check if the pump body (5) is worn on the areas fac-
ing the gears. Replace damaged parts. Replace the
oil seals.
Reassembly
The reassembly operations are in the opposite order of
disassembly. Lubricate the inner parts generously and
make sure that the gears (8 and 9, Fig. 4-32) run free
without jamming.
Install the pump on the converter cover spreading the
matching surfaces with sealing compound.
Install the piping.
C
D350R0098
Fig. 4-33 Torque converter cover
C. Converter cover - P. Brake pump.
4.4.3 BRAKES AND STEERING

ON
DIFFERENTIAL
Removal (Preliminary operations) OFF
Before starting any service operation on the machine,
DO PER
turn main switch to position "OFF" and put a warning
NO ATE
board in the cab on the ignition key "DO NOT OPER-
T
ATE".
WARNING
Make sure that the lifting cables/chains are fixed
to a point that is strong enough to lift the load. D350R0100
Keep all persons far from the fixing point, the ca-
bles or the chains. Fig. 4-34
Drain completely the fuel tank, opening the cock (R).

Fuel tank capacity: 675 litres.
Disconnect the fuel feed pipe to the injection pump
and remove the four screws that fasten the tank to
the machine frame.
Hold the tank up by means of a hoisting tackle hooked
to the lifting eyes (A). Remove the screws that fasten
the fuel tank to the hydraulic tank (not necessary to
remove).
R
WARNING
D350R0101
Avoid twisting chains or steel ropes. Always wear
safety gloves when handling steel ropes or chains. Fig. 4-35
Remove the fuel tank.
D350R0102
Fig. 4-36
Drain the oil from the rear housing, removing the plugs
from the rear bottom of the machine, emptying the
housing completely (oil capacity: 175 litres).
Remove the track chain as described in SECTION 5

- TRACK CHAIN, of this Manual.
Remove the final drives as described in SECTION 3

- FINAL DRIVES, of this Manual.
Remove the cab as described in the OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
D350R0103
Fig. 4-37
Remove the piping (1) passing over the rear housing

and connecting the hydraulic motor (2). Then remove
2
the hydraulic motor. Remove the piping support (5)
and the three inspection covers (3, 4, 6).
1
3
6 5
4
D350R0104
Fig. 4-38
Removal of right-hand module

Remove the 12 outer screws (C) fastening the brake/ C
differential group to the rear housing.
D350R0105
Fig. 4-39
Fit qty. 3 screws into the threaded holes provided for
pulling out the brakes/differential group.
WARNING
Lift and handle heavy items with lifting means of
suitable capacity. Make sure the load is held up
by suitable slinging and hooks.
D350R0106
WARNING
Handle all parts with great care. Do not put hands Fig. 4-40
or fingers between one part and the other. Wear
authorized safety equipment such as safety
glasses, heavy gloves and safety shoes.
Install the special tool as illustrated in Fig. 4-41 and

pull the brakes/differential group out of the rear
housing.
Place the brakes/differential group on a stand with
suitable supports for parts disassembly.
D350R0107
Fig. 4-41
After pulling the brakes/differential assembly out of

the rear housing by means of lifting hooks, remove
the 3 O-Rings indicated in the illustration because they
could be damaged during the disassembly operations
of the various parts.
WARNING
Wear authorized safety equipment such as safety
D350R0108
Fig. 4-42
Removal of the ring gear

A
Remove the snap ring A and the ring gear support B.
B D350R0109
Fig. 4-43
Remove the snap ring from the ring gear groove.
D350R0110
Fig. 4-44
Split the assembly by removing the support from the

ring gear.
D350R0111
Fig. 4-45
Disassembled parts of the ring gear group

4 1
1. Ring gear
2. Snap ring
3. Snap ring
4. Ring gear support
Thoroughly clean and wash the disassembled parts.
WARNING
2
Never use gasoline or solvents or other flamma- 3 D350R0112
cial, non-flammable, non-toxic solvents. Fig. 4-46
WARNING
Disassembly of planetary carrier assy.

Remove the snap ring as illustrated.
D350R0113
Fig. 4-47
Pull the planetary carrier assy. out using a tackle with

lifting hooks as illustrated.
D350R0114
Fig. 4-48
Disassembly of planetary carrier differential

assy.
Remove the snap rings as illustrated.
D350R0115
Fig. 4-49
Successively, pull out the pins and all parts of the

planetary carrier group, paying particular attention to
the ball retainers of the pins.
D350R0116
Fig. 4-50
Disassembled parts of the planetary carrier assy.
1. Planetary carrier
2. Pin - qty. 3 1
2 3
3. Planetary gear - qty. 3 4
5
4. Needle-roller cage - qty. 3 7
5. Thrust plate - qty. 6
6. Ball - qty. 3
7. Snap ring - qty. 3
WARNING
6 D350R0117
Fig. 4-51
WARNING
Disassembly of twin sun gear

Remove the snap ring as illustrated.
D350R0118
Fig. 4-52
Pull the bearing out of the shaft assy.
D350R0119
Fig. 4-53
Remove the spacer.
D350R0120
Fig. 4-54
Pull the twin sun gear out of the brake assy. using a
tackle with lifting hooks as illustrated.
D350R0121
Fig. 4-55
Remove the snap ring from the twin sun gear.
D350R0122
Fig. 4-56
Pull the bearing out of the sun gear.
D350R0123
Fig. 4-57
Disassembly of brakes assy.

Remove the fastening screws (qty. 12) of the pres-
sure plate to the brakes assy. and remove the pres-
sure plate.
D350R0124
Fig. 4-58
Remove the discs from the outer drum, paying atten-

tion to keep the same sequence when reassembling.
D350R0125
Fig. 4-59
WARNING
Remove the 6 screws to allow the extraction of the

splined hub.
D350R0126
Fig. 4-60
Pull the planetary carrier splined hub out of the outer

drum.
D350R0129
Fig. 4-61
WARNING
Remove the bearing retainer snap ring from the splined

hub and then use a puller to extract the bearings to-
gether with the two spacers.
D350R0127
Fig. 4-62
Disassembled parts of the splined hub.
1
2
3
4 2
6
WARNING 5
D350R0128
Handle all parts with great care. Do not put hands
Fig. 4-63
authorized safety equipment such as safety 1. Tothhed hub - 2. Bearing - 3. Inner spacer - 4. Outer
glasses, heavy gloves and safety shoes. spacer - 5. Bearing retaing ring - 6. Circlip.
Turn the drum assembly upside-down and proceed to

disassemble the parts.
Remove fastening screws.
D350R0130
Fig. 4-64
Tighten two eyebolts to the outer plate as illustrated

and remove the outer plate using a tackle provided
with lifting sling.
D350R0131
Fig. 4-65
Remove the 16 brake release springs from the pis-

ton.
D350R0132
Fig. 4-66
Pull the piston out of the brake drum.
D350R0133
Fig. 4-67
Remove the O-Ring from the drum rim.
D350R0134
Fig. 4-68
Remove the two O-Rings from the piston.
D350R0140
Fig. 4-69
Remove the 8 screws that fasten the bearing retainer
to the plate.
D350R0135
Fig. 4-70
Separate the bearing retainer from the plate.

All disassembled parts of the brake drum assembly
must be thoroughly cleaned.
D350R0136
Disassembled parts of the brake drum assembly
1. Brake drum Fig. 4-71
2. Outer plate
3. Thrust plate 4 3
5
4. Bearing retainer
5. Piston
6. Springs qty. 16
WARNING
cial, non-flammable, non-toxic solvents. 2 6
1
D350R0137
Repeat the same disassembly procedure for the left

Fig. 4-72
brake unit.
Reassembly of the brake drum assy.
WARNING
Assemble the bearing retainer to the plate, making

sure that the bearing retainer holes are centred with
D350R0138
the plate holes.
Fig. 4-73
WARNING
Never use fingers to centre holes or slots: always
use an appropriate guide stud.
Insert the screws and relevant washers with the aid

of a guide stud and tighten with torque wrench at 11
daNm.
Note – Take out residual grease and clean the sealing

surfaces, eliminating all debris or marks and succes- D350R0135
sively apply a thin coat of oil taking care not to smear
the other parts with oil. Fig. 4-74
Insert the O-Ring into the drum rim.

surfaces, eliminating all debris or marks and succes-
the other parts with oil.
D350R0139
Fig. 4-75
Insert the outer O-Rings into the piston grooves.
WARNING
glasses, heavy gloves and safety shoes. D350R0140
Fig. 4-76
Turn the piston upside-down and assemble the plate

complete with O-Ring.
D350R0133
Fig. 4-77
Insert the 16 springs in the relevant seats on the

piston.
D350R0132
Fig. 4-78
WARNING
Tighten two eyebolts to the outer plate as illustrated

and, using a tackle with lifting slings, lift the plate and
place it upon the piston assembly. When fastening, D350R0131
guide the plate for a correct insertion.

Fig. 4-79
Note – Pay attention, when reassembling, to the lubri-
cation holes of the thrust plate that must be centred
with the lubrication holes of the piston, so as to match
the dowel pin on the piston assembly.
Firstly, install 3 longer screws so as to catch the pis-

ton and compress the springs.
Successively insert the other screws and remove the
three longer ones. D350R0130
Insert the remaining screws and tighten them all to a Fig. 4-80
torque value of 11 daNm.
WARNING
Turn the assembly upside-down to prepare it for as- D350R0141
sembling the splined hub and the discs pack. Fig. 4-81
Assemble the parts on the hub in the following order:

bottom bearing, spacers, top bearing, snap ring.
D350R0127
Fig. 4-82
Insert the splined hub into the brake drum complete
with bearings.
Prepare the discs pack for reassembly.
Note – Refer to paragraph 4.4.4 for check procedure

of discs pack.
D350R0142
Fig. 4-83
Introduce the discs into the drum until the discs pack
is complete, paying attention to keeping the discs in
the same order arrangement found during disassem-
bly.
D350R0143
Fig. 4-84
Connect an hydraulic pump, with at least 30 ÷ 40 bar

pressure capacity, complete with hose and fitting to
the threaded feed hole. Operate the pump up to a pres-
sure of 20 ÷ 25 bar so as to overcome the pressure of
the inner springs, thus allowing the discs to move to
the bottom.
Fitting
D350R0144
Fig. 4-85
Keep the piston under pressure and assemble the re-

maining discs and the thrust plate onto the drum.
Install the 12 screws complete with washers and
tighten to a torque of 11 daNm.
D350R0145
Fig. 4-86
Reassembly of the twin sun gear

Use a bearing installation tool to introduce the bear-
ing into the sun gear.
D350R0123
Fig. 4-87
Assemble the bearing retainer snap ring.
D350R0122
Fig. 4-88
Using a tackle with lifting slings, fit the twin sun gear
onto the brake assy.
D350R0121
Fig. 4-89
Insert the spacer.
D350R0120
Fig. 4-90
Insert the bearing.
D350R0119
Fig. 4-91
WARNING
Always wear approved individual protective de-
vices such as helmet, safety glasses, gloves and
safety shoes.
Insert the bearing retaing circlip.
D350R0118
Fig. 4-92
Reassembly of the planet carrier assembly

1
Lubrificate freely the components, the gear, the pin, 2 3
4
spring and needles. 5
7
Exploded view of planet carrier assembly:

1. Planet carrier
2. Pin q.ty 3
3. Planet - q.ty 3
4. Needle cage - q.ty 3
5. Thrust ring - q.ty 6
6. Ball - q.ty 3 6 D350R0117
7. Circlip - q.ty 3
Fig. 4-93
Insert the pins and all the parts of the planet carrier
goup, pay special attention to balls (6) securing pins
(2).
D350R0116
Fig. 4-94
Install the pin retaining circlips in their seats.
D350R0115
Fig. 4-95
Using a tackle with lifting slings as illustrated, lift and

couple the planetary carrier assy. with the brake drum.
WARNING
to a point that is strong enough to lift the load.
bles or the chains.
D350R0114
Fig. 4-96
WARNING
Lock the unit with the snap ring as illustrated.
D350R0113
Fig. 4-97
Reassembly and installation of the ring gear

4 1
assy.
Disassembled parts
1. Planetary ring gear
2. Snap ring
3. Snap ring
4. Ring gear support
2
3 D350R0112
Fig. 4-98
Assemble the support into the ring gear.
D350R0111
Fig. 4-99
Insert the snap ring into the ring gear groove.
WARNING
D350R0110
Fig. 4-100
Introduce the ring gear support (A) into the rear hous-
ing and insert the snap ring (B) into the proper groove, A
using a snap ring pliers.
Reassembly of brakes/steering differential unit into

the rear housing.

sively apply a thin coat of oil taking care not to smear B D350R0146
the other parts with oil. Fig. 4-101
Put the three O-Rings into their seats on the brake

module.
WARNING
D350R0108
Fig. 4-102
WARNING
Lift the brakes/steering differential unit by means of a

tackle equipped with the special tool as illustrated.
D350R0147
WARNING
Fig. 4-103
Clean the unit thoroughly in correspondence of
the contact surfaces with the rear housing.
Lubricate adequately the parts of the unit and the rear

housing that are in mutual contact.
Insert two guide studs into the rear housing in order

to facilitate the installation of the brakes/steering unit.
D350R0148
Fig. 4-104
WARNING
Draw the brakes/steering unit near to the rear housing

very carefully in order to prevent any damages to the
components.
D350R0107
Make sure the gears are meshing together correctly.
Fig. 4-105
Install some screws and tighten them progressively

so as to allow an adequate settling of the brake unit.
D350R0106
Fig. 4-106
Remove the two studs, install the remaining screws

C2 and tighten progressively and crosswise, to guar-
antee an even fastening (screws C2, torque value: 11 C2
daNm).
For reassembly operations, refer to paragraph 4.4.3

(preliminary operations), reversing the illustrated pro-
cedure.
D350R0149
Fig. 4-107
Repeat the reassembly of the left-hand brakes unit

following the same sequence as has been described
for the right-hand brake unit.
Note – Before fitting the left-hand brake unit to the

bevel gear shaft, insert the spacer (refer to section
view illustrated in the following page).
D350R0150
Fig. 4-108
4.4.4 CHECK AND INSPECTION OF

BRAKE DISCS PACK
Check the maximum warping of each disc (2) of the After completion of the above checks, assemble each
discs pack; it must be less than 0.03 mm. Check also discs pack (A) (8 driven discs and 7 driving discs)
the driven discs (1) conditions: into the drum and check the total pack thickness (A)
- the maximum thickness difference between the sur- that should be 47.5 ± 0.5 mm under an hydraulic press
faces of sintered material cannot be more than 0.05 force of 294 ÷ 392 daN. In case of insufficient thick-
mm; ness, add one or more driving discs of normal or thin-
ner type from the side indicated by the arrow.
- the abovementioned surfaces should not have ab-
normal wear, due usually to foreign material con-
tained in the oil or operating conditions with dry discs
or pitted areas;
A 47.5 ± 0.5 mm
qty. 8 driven discs 1

(sintered)
P = 300 ÷ 400 Kg
294 ÷ 392 daN
2 qty. 7 driving discs (steel)

D350R0151
Fig. 4-109
DETERMINATION AND CHECK OF BRAKE P

DISCS PACK
Take dimension A with an hydraulic press force P,

selecting suitable disc thickness (1 and 2).
D350R0152
Quantity of brake discs and thickness Fig. 4-110

1 - Driven (sintered) ................................................................................... Qty. 8 discs, thickness: 3.8 ¸ 3.9 mm
2 - Driving (steel) ........................................................................................ Qty. 7 discs, thickness 2.1 ¸ 2.4 mm
4.4.5 SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

(Removal/Disassembly)
Removal of left-hand support
WARNING
D350R0153
Remove the fuel tank as previously described in this
manual. Remove the hydraulic motor as illustrated. Fig. 4-111
Remove all internal piping bound to the left-hand sup-

port.
D350R0154
Fig. 4-112
Remove the fitting indicated in Fig. 4-113 because it

would prevent pulling the support out of its seat.
D350R0155
Fig. 4-113
Remove the screws fastening the left-hand support

to the rear housing.
WARNING
bles or the chains.
D350R0156
WARNING
Fig. 4-114
safety gloves when handling steel ropes or chains.
Hook the support to a suitable lifting tackle equipped

with lifting hooks fit for the load to be taken, and pull
the group out of the rear housing as illustrated. Place
the support onto a suitable overhaul stand.
D350R0157
Fig. 4-115
Removal of right-hand support

Remove the screws fastening the right-hand support
to the rear housing. Disconnect the pipe C.
C D350R0158
Fig. 4-116
WARNING
bles or the chains.
WARNING
D350R0159
Fig. 4-117
Lift the support and take it out of the rear housing,

and at the same time pull the linking shaft out as
illustrated.
DISASSEMBLY OF STEERING DIFFERENTIAL

SUPPORTS
Disassembly of left-hand support
WARNING
Place the left-hand steering differential support onto D350R0426
a suitable overhaul stand.

Fig. 4-118
Remove the 6 mounting screws of the central pinion

support and pull the support out. Remove the shims
indicated in the illustration.
D350R0427
Fig. 4-119
Remove the O-Ring from the groove on the support.
D350R0428
Fig. 4-120
WARNING
Remove the gear A and then the gear B together with

the support. Pull gear B out of the support using 2
screws fitted into the threaded holes as illustrated.
When pulling the supports out of the gears pay atten-
tion to the adjusting shims of pinion and spur gears
lash.
A
D350R0429
Fig. 4-121
Disassembly of left-hand differential gear

Use tool 380000949 to carry out this operation.
Remove the crimps on the bearing retainer hexagonal
ring nut and remove the ring nut using a torque wrench.
D350R0430
Fig. 4-122
Use an hydraulic press to extract the gear together

with the shaft top bearing. Remove the existing shims
and the spacer.
D350R0431
Fig. 4-123
Remove the bottom bearing with a puller.
D350R0432
Fig. 4-124
Disassembled parts of left-hand differential gear
4
3
1
Complete the disassembly removing the tapered bear-
ings outer races from the twin gear.
2
6
5 D350R0433
Fig. 4-125
1. Left-hand twin gear (complete of bearings outer races) -
2. Bearing - 3. Shaft - 4. Hexagonal ring nut - 5. Shims -
6. Drilled spacer.
Disassembly of right-hand differential gear

Use tool 380000949 to carry out this operation.
Remove the crimps on the bearing retainer hexagonal
ring nut and remove the ring nut using a torque wrench.
D350R0434
Fig. 4-126
Remove the spur gear.
D350R0435
Fig. 4-127
Use an hydraulic press to pull support and top bear-

ing together out of the shaft and then remove the bear-
ings preload adjusting shims and relevant spacer.
D350R0436
Fig. 4-128
Complete the disassembly pulling the bottom bearing

and the bearings outer races out of the support. 2
1
Disassembled parts of right-hand differential gear
5
1. Bearing retainer
2. Right-hand gear 4
3. Bearing
4. Shaft 3
3
5. Ring nut 6
6. Bearing outer races
7. Non-drilled spacer
8. Shims. 8 7 D350R0437
Fig. 4-129
Disassembly of right-hand support
WARNING
Place the left-hand steering differential support, by

means of lifting hooks, onto a suitable overhaul stand.
Remove the mounting screws from the gear support.
Introduce 2 screws in the threaded holes as illustrated D350R0438
and pull the support out.

Fig. 4-130
Disassembly of right-hand support gear

Refer to the instructions related to the illustration.
Disassembly of steering differential pinion

Place the steering differential pinion support group on
tool 380000949 and, after removing the crimps on the A
ring nut, remove the ring nut as illustrated using tool
A and its guide B.
D350R0439
Fig. 4-131
Use an hydraulic press to pull the pinion shaft out of

the top bearing.
D350R0440
Fig. 4-132
Remove the spacer and the existing shims.
D350R0441
Fig. 4-133
WARNING
Remove the support from the pinion complete with

bearing.
D350R0442
Fig. 4-134
Use a puller to remove the bottom bearing and com-

plete disassembly removing the bearings outer races
remained in the support.
D350R0443
Fig. 4-135
Reassembly of steering differential pinion
The reassembly of the steering differential pinion com-
plete with support is in the reverse order of the disas-
sembly, with following supplements:
- warm up the bottom bearing before installation at a
temperature of 100°C, using a suitable heating de-
vice.
- tighten the pinion ring nut to a torque of 100 ÷ 110
daNm.
- after completion of pinion bearings preload (refer to
paragraph 4.4.7) crimp the ring nut with a calking
chisel on both sides of the pinion.
4.4.6 SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

(Reassembly/Installation)
Reassembly of differential left-hand gear 4
Disassembled parts of differential left-hand gear. 1

3
2
5 6
D350R0433
Fig. 4-136
WARNING 1. Left-hand twin gear (complete of bearings outer races) -
Wear protective gloves when handling parts to 2. Bearing - 3. Shaft - 4. Hexagonal ring nut - 5. Shims -
avoid hand injuries caused by heat. 6. Drilled spacer.
Warm the half bearing at a temperature of approxi-

mately 110°C.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-137
Fit the half bearing on the shaft.
D350R0432
Fig. 4-138
Press fit the two bearings outer races onto the twin
gear.
D350R0447
Fig. 4-139
Install the twin gear on the shaft provided with bear-

ing.
D350R0448
Fig. 4-140
Successively, insert the spacer and relevant adjust-

ing shims as illustrated.
D350R0446
Fig. 4-141
Press fit the front bearing onto the shaft using the
bearing guide tool 380000956.
D350R0449
Fig. 4-142
Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 daNm. Use the

stand 380000949.
D350R0430
Fig. 4-143
Check torque reaction; admitted value: 0.05 ÷ 0.07

daNm.
D350R0450
Fig. 4-144
If the torque reaction measured value is not correct,

remove the ring nut and select shims conveniently,
then crimp the ring nut with a calking chisel on both
sides of the shaft.
Reassembly of differential right-hand gear
2
1 5
4
3
6
8
7 D350R0437
Fig. 4-145
WARNING 1. Bearings retainer - 2. Right-hand gear - 3. Bearing -
4. Shaft - 5. Ring nut - 6. Bearing outer races - 7. Non-
Wear protective gloves when handling parts to
drilled spacer - 8. Shims.
avoid hand injuries caused by heat.

mately 110°C.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-146
Use the stand 380000949.

Fit the bearing onto the shaft as illustrated, meeting
the abutment.
D350R0451
Fig. 4-147
Install the bearing retainer.
D350R0436
Fig. 4-148
Insert the shims pack and relevant spacer.
D350R0452
Fig. 4-149
Press fit the second front bearing onto the shaft us-
ing the bearing guide tool 380000956.
D350R0453
Fig. 4-150
Successively, install the spur gear.
D350R0435
Fig. 4-151
Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 daNm.
D350R0454
Fig. 4-152
Check torque reaction; admitted value: 0.05 ÷ 0.07

daNm.
If the torque reaction measured value is not correct,
remove the ring nut and select shims conveniently,
then crimp the ring nut with a calking chisel on both
sides of the shaft.
D350R0455
Fig. 4-153
Reassembly of right-hand gear support

Refer to the sequence described for reassembly of
differential right-hand gear (see relevant description
in paragraph Reassembly of differential right-hand
gear).
Reassembly of steering differential left-hand

support
WARNING
Place the steering differential left-hand support on a

stand. D350R0456
Fig. 4-154
Firstly insert 2 studs to facilitate the installation of

the support with larger diameter, then assemble the
shims previously removed and successively, install
the support complete with gears tapping it with a lead
hammer.
Tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
WARNING
It is dangerous to strike hardened steel parts with
anything other than a soft iron or non-ferrous ham-
mer. When removing or installing these parts, al-
ways wear safety goggles or safety glasses with
side shields, heavy gloves, etc. to reduce injury D350R0457
hazards. Fig. 4-155
Reassemble the other gear proceeding in a similar

way.
Insert the O-Ring in its seat on the support.
D350R0458
Fig. 4-156
Consequently, place the bevel gears lash adjusting

shims.
WARNING
D350R0459
or fingers between one part and the other. Wear Fig. 4-157
Using a lifting device, insert the bevel pinion group

into the support seat and then tighten the 6 screws to
a torque of 11 daNm.
D350R0460
Note – For the adjustment procedure of the steer- Fig. 4-158

ing bevel gears (bearings preload shims for torque
reaction, backlash adjustment) refer to paragraph
4.4.8 in this Section.
Reassembly of steering differential right-hand

support
Place the steering differential right-hand support on a
stand.
Firstly insert 2 studs to facilitate the installation of
the support, then assemble the shims previously re-
moved and successively, install the support complete
with gears tapping it with a lead hammer.
Tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
WARNING
ways wear safety goggles or safety glasses with D350R0463
side shields, heavy gloves, etc. to reduce injury Fig. 4-159

hazards.
WARNING
WARNING
Installation of right-hand support

Using suitable lifting hooks, install the right-hand sup-
port into the relevant seat on the rear housing, paying
attention to join the shaft A correctly as illustrated.
D350R0160
Fig. 4-160
After having thoroughly cleaned the matching surfaces

of the cover and the rear housing, apply a coat of
LOCTITE 518 or similar sealing compound. Fasten
the support to the rear housing tightening the relevant
screws to a torque of 11 daNm. Connect the lubrica-
tion pipe B to the fitting C as illustrated.
D350R0161
Fig. 4-161
Installation of left-hand support
WARNING
glasses, heavy gloves and safety shoes.WARNING
WARNING
Using suitable lifting hooks, introduce the left-hand

support into the rear housing. D350R0157
Fig. 4-162
Apply a coat of LOCTITE 518 to the matching sur-

faces and fasten the support to the rear housing, tight-
ening the screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
D350R0156
Fig. 4-163
Connect all piping to the relevant fittings as illustrated.
D350R0162
Fig. 4-164
4.4.7 ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING PINION

BEARING PRELOAD
1. Join the pinion (5) complete with bearing (6) to the
support (1) complete with half bearings (3) and in-
sert the spacer (4).
2. Install the dial gauge 380000947 on the bevel pin-
ion, tightening it to a torque of 0.1 daNm. Measure
dimension X with the probe, then remove the dial
gauge and introduce a shims pack of the meas-
ured value X (refer to detail A) plus 0.07 ÷ 0.1 mm.
Install the bearing (7) and the ring nut (2).
3. Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 ÷ 110

D350R0444
daNm.
Fig. 4-165
4. Check the torque reaction at the ring nut that should
be 0.08 ÷ 0.1 daNm.
5. Lock the ring nut with a crimp
7
Detail A
1
2
Dial gauge
3
4 Gauge Support
probe
6
Support level
Spacer level
Spacer
3
5
D350R0445
Fig. 4-166
4.4.8 ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING

BEVEL GEAR
Adjust bearings preload following the steps described B. After having preloaded the bevel gear shafts bear-
here below: ings, as per point (A), adjust the position of the
bevel pinion support, by means of the shims (3),
A. Select shims packs (1 and 2) suitable for getting a until the bevel pinion/gear tooth contact corre-
torque reaction of the bevel gear shafts (with bevel sponds to the indications illustrated in detail (E).
pinion removed) equivalent to 0.05 ÷ 0.07 daNm.
Detail E
1/4L 1/2L
1/8L 3/8L-1/2L
3
L
1 7 2 5
D350R0461
Fig. 4-167 Section view of the steering bevel gear group
1. Spacer - 2. Spacer - 3. Adjusting shims - 4. Gear adjusting shims - 5. Adjusting shims - 6. Differential gear pin - 7. Bearing
retainer.
C. After achieving the tooth contact specified in point

(B), share out the shims (4) and (5) between the
gear supports (6) and (7) in order to get a bevel
pinion/gear backlash of 0.25 ÷ 0.33 mm. Check
again the tooth contact and the bevel gear shaft
bearings preload, to confirm the correspondence
with the specifications described in points (A) and
(B).
D. Check the total torque reaction measured at the

pinion that should be equivalent to 0.13 ÷ 0.17
daNm.
D350R0462
Fig. 4-168
4.4.9 BEVEL GEAR

(Removal/Disassembly of bevel pinion
and gear)
Pinion removal
Preliminary operations:
WARNING
bles or the chains.
WARNING
Removal
Remove the cab as described in the OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Remove the fuel tank, as described in SEZ. 6 - EQUIP-
MENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM of this manual.
Remove the transmission group, as described in SEZ.
2 - TRANSMISSION of this manual.
Drain the oil from the rear housing, removing the plug
located at the bottom as described in paragraph 4.4.3.
Remove the final drives and the brake modules, as
indicated at paragraph 4.4.3 of this section.
Successively, proceed as follows:

- Remove the mounting screws of the pinion group.
D350R0163
Fig. 4-169
Introduce 3 screws into the holes illustrated and tighten

to get free the adjusting shims located at the rear part
of the pinion cover.
D350R0164
Fig. 4-170
Set the shims apart after removal.
WARNING
authorized safety equipment such as safety D350R0165
Fig. 4-171
Pull the pinion cover out using the 3 puller screws.
D350R0166
Fig. 4-172
Remove the lip seal, indicated by the arrow, from the
pinion cover.
D350R0167
Fig. 4-173
Remove the lubrication pipe of the pinion bearing as

illustrated.
D350R0168
Fig. 4-174
Using a tackle provided with suitable lifting hooks,

pull the pinion group out.
Use 2 guide studs to facilitate this operation.
D350R0169
Fig. 4-175
Pinion disassembly
After removing the pinion group from the rear hous-
ing, lock it on a stand and proceed removing the Allen
screws located on the ring nut.
D350R0170
Fig. 4-176
Fit the special tool, as illustrated in Fig. 4-177, to the

pinion ring nut and remove the ring nut.
D350R0171
Fig. 4-177
Remove the drilled spacer as illustrated in Fig. 4-178.
D350R0172
Fig. 4-178
Use the special tool illustrated in Fig. 4-179 for pulling

the pinion out of the support.
D350R0173
Fig. 4-179
Remove the top bearing.
WARNING
Fig. 4-180
Use a tackle equipped with lifting hooks and remove
the support from the pinion as illustrated.
D350R0175
Fig. 4-181
Remove the spacer.
D350R0176
Fig. 4-182
Remove the relevant adjusting shims.
D350R0177
Fig. 4-183
Use a bearing guide tool and remove the bottom bear-

ing with an hydraulic press.
Complete the disassembly by pulling the outer races

of the tapered roller bearings out of the pinion sup-
port.
Reassembly of bevel pinion
WARNING
ble fluids to clean parts. Use authorized commer- D350R0178
Fig. 4-184

mately 110°C.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-185
Install the half bearing onto the pinion.
D350R0180
Fig. 4-186
Install the adjusting shims.
D350R0177
Fig. 4-187
Install the bearing spacer.
D350R0176
Fig. 4-188
Prepare the bearing retainer, introducing the bearing
outer races.
Use an hydraulic press to facilitate the fitting.
D350R0181
Fig. 4-189
Assemble support and pinion.
SM9240
Fig. 4-190
mately 110°C.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-191
Lubricate the half bearing with clean oil and fit it into
the relevant outer race.
WARNING
ways wear safety goggles or safety glasses with
side shields, heavy gloves, etc. to reduce injury
hazards.
D350R0074
Fig. 4-192
Install the drilled spacer as illustrated.
D350R0172
Fig. 4-193
Position the bevel pinion ring nut.
D350R0093
Fig. 4-194
Lock the bevel pinion group on a stand and tighten
the ring nut to a torque of 100 ÷ 110 daNm.
WARNING
Fig. 4-195
Tighten the Allen screws on the upper part of the ring
nut as illustrated.
Installation of the bevel pinion
D350R0170
WARNING
Fig. 4-196
Lubricate all contacting surfaces of the pinion.

Arrange the bevel pinion unit for installation to the
rear housing, using a tackle and a lifting hook.
Use two guiding screws to facilitate the installation.
D350R0094
Fig. 4-197

the other parts with oil.
Install the bevel pinion unit, complete with cover, onto

the rear housing, after replacing all O-Rings and ex-
isting seals.
Tighten the mounting screws M16 x 70 to a torque of

28 daNm and the three screws M10 x 35 to a torque D350R0163
of 6.5 daNm. Fig. 4-198
Adjust the bevel pinion position as described in para-

graphs 4.4.10 and 4.4.11.
Disassembly of bevel gear

Lock the bevel gear to the rear housing, so as to pre-
vent it from either turning or falling accidentally when
pulling the bevel gear shaft out.
During this process, the serviceman must leave at
least 2 screws fastening the bevel gear to the shaft.
D350R0095
Fig. 4-199
Remove the mounting screws of the right-hand bear-

ing retainer of the bevel gear shaft.
D350R0096
Fig. 4-200
Repeat the same procedure for the left-hand bearing

retainer.
D350R0097
Fig. 4-201
Install 2 guiding studs in the holes indicated by the

arrows and pull the right-hand bearing retainer out using
2 screws as puller tool.
D350R0099
Fig. 4-202
Also remove the relevant adjusting shims, noting down

the dimension of the shims pack.
D350R0076
Fig. 4-203
Repeat the same procedure for the left-hand bearing

retainer.
Pull the left-hand bearing out using a bridge type puller

with separator.
D350R0418
Fig. 4-204
Hold the bevel gear shaft with a lifting device. Re-

move the 2 screws fastening the gear to the shaft
that were previously left.
D350R0419
Fig. 4-205
Using the special tool illustrated in Fig. 4-206, pull the

shaft complete with bearing out of the right-hand side
of the rear housing.
Complete disassembly by pulling the right-hand bear-

ing out using a puller tool.
D350R0420
Fig. 4-206
Remove the bevel gear from the rear housing.
Bevel gear reassembly

Introduce the bevel gear into the rear housing and
lock it to the rear housing as illustrated.
D350R0421
Fig. 4-207
Using the special tool illustrated in Fig. 4-208, intro-

duce the bevel gear shaft through the right-hand side
of the rear housing.
Provisionally, fix the bevel gear to the shaft using some

finger tightened screws and then remove the bevel
D350R0420
gear supporting device.
Fig. 4-208
Warm the right-hand bearing at a temperature of ap-

proximately 110°C and then fit the bearing onto the
shaft, meeting the abutment.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-209
Follow the same procedure for the left-hand bearing.
Prepare 2 shim packs with the dimensions previously

noted down during disassembly and install the shim
packs on the two shaft ends, respectively.
Use 2 guiding studs for the installation of the 2 bevel

gear shaft supports and tap the supports into the hous-
ing with a lead hammer.
Pull the 2 guiding studs out and tighten all mounting
screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
Fit the remaining screws to the bevel gear tightening

to a torque of 60 daNm.
D350R0422
Fig. 4-210
Carry out the bevel gear shaft bearings preload pro-
cedure with bevel pinion removed as described in point
A of paragraph 4.4.10.
4.4.10 PROCEDURE FOR BEVEL GEAR

ADJUSTMENT
Adjust bearings preload following the steps described C. After achieving the tooth contact specified in point
here below: (B), share out the shims (1) between the gear re-
tainers (5) and (6) in order to get a bevel pinion/
A. Select shims packs (1 and 2) suitable for getting a gear backlash of 0.25 ÷ 0.33 mm. Check again
torque reaction of the bevel gear shaft (with bevel the tooth contact and the bevel gear shaft bear-
pinion removed) equivalent to 0.3 ÷ 0.5 daNm. ings preload, to confirm they comply with the speci-
fications described in points (A) and (B).
B. After having preloaded the bearings, as per point
(A), adjust the position of the bevel pinion support D. Check the total torque reaction measured at the
(3), by means of the shims (4), until the bevel pin- pinion, that should be equivalent to 0.5 ÷ 0.8 daNm.
ion/gear tooth contact corresponds to the indica-
tions illustrated in detail E.
Detail E
1/4L 1/2L
1/8L 3/8L-1/2L
5
L
1 6 2
4
3 Bevel gear set
D350R0424
Fig. 4-211 Section view of the bevel gear set
1. Shims - 2. Shims - 3. Bevel pinion support - 4. Shims - 5. Left-hand bearing retainer - 6. Right-hand bearing retainer.
4.4.11 PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING

BEVEL PINION BEARING
PRELOAD
Adjust bearing preload following the procedure illus- move the dial gauge and introduce a shims pack
trated here below: of the measured value "x" plus 0.07 ÷ 0.1 mm.
Install the bearing (5) and the ring nut (4).
A. Join the bevel pinion, complete with bearing (1), to
the pinion support complete with half bearings (2). C. Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 ÷ 110 daNm.
Insert the spacer (3).
D. Check the torque reaction at the ring nut that should
B. B. Install the dial gauge on the bevel pinion, tight- be 0.3 ÷ 0.5 daNm.
ening it to a torque of 0.3 ÷ 0.4 daNm. Measure
dimension "x" (detail A) with the probe, then re- E. Lock the ring nut.
Detail A
4
Dial gauge
5 Support
Gauge probe
Support level
Spacer level
3 A Spacer
6
2
D350R0423
Fig. 4-212 Section view of the bevel pinion
1. Tapered roller bearing - 2. Bearing retainer - 3. Spacer - 4. Ring nut with screw - 5. Bearing - 6. Shims.
4.4.12 REASSEMBLY OF REAR HOUSING

GUARDS
WARNING
Connect brake lubrication piping (Tf) and pinion lubri-

cation piping (Tp) to the relevant fittings, as illustrated.
Tf Tf
Tp D350R0425
Fig. 4-213
Install the guards 3, 4 and 6, illustrated in Fig. 4-214,

2
onto the rear housing, tightening the screws TE
M12 x 35 to the torque of 11 daNm.
Fill to full level the hydraulic motor (2) with hydraulic 1
oil, and install the hydraulic motor with mounting
screws M20 x 50 tightened to the torque of 54 daNm.
Successively, fix the pipe support clamp (5) and con-
nect pipes (1) to the hydraulic motor.
3
6 5
4
D350R0104
Fig. 4-214
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS
BEVEL GEAR SET PINION
Caliper for bevel gear set pinion bearing play check
380000935
380000936
Tool for pressing and extraction of bearing on bevel pinion
380000937
Puncher for bevel pinion upper bearing
380000938
Puncher for upper bearing outer race on bevel pinion bearing support
380000939
Puncher for lower bearing outer race on bevel pinion bearing support
380000940
Puncher for bearing outer race on right housing bearing housing
380000942
Bearing for bearing outer race on left bearing housing
380000943
STEERING DIFFERENTIAL
Caliper for steering differential crown gear bearing dimension measurement
380000944
Caliper for steering differential shafts/crown gears bearing play measurement
380000945
Reference for calipers 380000944 e 380000945
380000946
Caliper for steering differential pinion bearing dimension measurement
380000947
380000948
Tool for steering differential pinion installation
380000949
Support for bearing pressing on differential bevel pinion
380000950
Puncher for bearing outer race on steering pinion support
380000951
Puncher for steering differential pinion bearing inner race
380000952
Puncher for bearing outer race on steering differential crown gear shaft
380000954
Puncher for bearing inner race on steering differential pinion support
380000955
Puncher for bearing outer race on steering differential pinion support
380000956
SECTION 5
UNDERCARRIAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.1.1 Generalities ....................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Main components .............................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3 INSPECTIONS .................................................................................................................... 5-9

5.3.1 Inspection and adjustment of track chains ........................................................................ 5-9
5.4 REPAIR PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 5-11

5.4.1 Track chain (removal/Installation) .....................................................................................5-11
5.4.2 Replacement of a damaged link and reinstallation ............................................................ 5-13
5.4.3 Idler (Removal/Installation/Overhaul) ................................................................................ 5-15
5.4.4 Track chain support roller (Removal/Installation) .............................................................. 5-18
5.4.5 Track chain bottom roller (Removal/Installation) ............................................................... 5-20
5.5 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA ............................................................................................. 5-22

5.5.1 Idler ..................................................................................................................................5-22
5.5.2 Sprockets ........................................................................................................................ 5-23
5.5.3 Track chains ..................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.5.4 Bottom rollers ...................................................................................................................5-24
5.5.5 Support rollers.................................................................................................................. 5-26
5.5.6 Track tensioner device ..................................................................................................... 5-27
5.5.7 Front cross-member pivots ............................................................................................... 5-28
5.5.8 Wear limits ....................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.6 EQUIPEMENTS SPECIFIQUES ......................................................................................... 5-33

5-2 UNDERCARRIAGE D350
D350 UNDERCARRIAGE 5-3
5.1.1 GENERALITIES Working sideways - The weight of the machines is

bearing on the side located on the downhill side, with
When evaluating the undercarriage conditions, it is
a wear of the flanges and other components guiding
appropriate to consider that an accurate inspection, a
the track chain.
proper preventive maintenance and a correct opera-
tion of the machine, are the elements contributing most
Working on a cat's back - It causes a concentration
to extend the life of components. It is good practice
of the loads on the inner side of the components. It
to clean, lubricate, adjust and repair the undercarriage
increases the wear of the inner side of rollers and
at regular intervals, not limited to quick and incom-
idlers and the inner tip of the grousers.
plete inspections.
Working into a ditch - It causes the concentration of
To evaluate exactly the conditions of components,
loads on the outer flanges of rollers and the outer race
proceed with a systematic and thorough inspection. If
of idlers.
the machine was subject to excessive stress, the track
frames could be deformed. Excessive or strange wear
The environment and the type of materials moved are
patterns on the idlers, the roller edges and the sprocket
the elements determining the life of undercarriage,
segments could be caused by deformed track frames.
since some materials are more abrasive than others.
Also, the abrasive action is generally higher when they
Considerable and apparently inexplicable signs of wear
are. Under this point of view, the most common mate-
on the idlers, on the roller rims and the sprocket seg-
rials can be classified as follows:
ments could be caused by the fact that the track frames
are deformed.
Gravel and rocks - intense breakage and wear
It is important to consider also the conditions in which
sand (in water) - fast wear
the crawler is often operating.
wet sand - packing and high wear
sand (dry) - high wear
top soil (wet) - moderate wear
TERRAIN
clay (wet) - light - moderate wear
Obviously, it is not always possible to choose the clay - slight wear
terrain and the operating conditions, but it is neces- (dry or slightly wet)
sary to consider the geological configuration and the
gradients which could influence the wear type and talcum
speed the undercarriage shall be subject to. gypsum
coal - very slight wear
Working uphill - It results in moving weights and phosphates
loads towards the rear end of the machine. The wear
on the rear bottom rollers and the forward motion side
of the sprocket segments and bushes increases.
Working downhill - It results in moving weights and

loads towards the side of the machine facing down-
hill. There is a higher wear of the components, such
as flanges a link sides, working in this position.
Also, it is important, when the undercarriage is over- What said above can be summarised in a few preven-
hauled, to check the operation of the track tensioner tive rules and operations:
device. An inefficient tack tensioner can cause a pre- - do not operate the machine at high speed, unless
mature wear of pins and bushes, the torsion of idler this is strictly necessary. This is particularly true
shafts, and, as a limit, troubles on the sprocket shafts when operating in reverse;
and the final drives. - reduce the load when it is felt that the track chain
starts slipping;
- avoid parking the machine in mud, water or condi-
The more components are worn the faster wear oc- tions facilitating corrosions;
curs. When components are new, hardened surfaces - inspect daily the components, check the tightening
are thick and resistant; with the wear progression of of bolts and nuts, eventual leakages from seals or
components between them and contact with the signs of abnormal wear;
ground, their harder outer surfaces are replaced by - clean mud and debris accumulated during the work
softer layers of material, thus the wear becomes faster. shift from the undercarriage.
5.1.2 MAIN COMPONENTS

The main components of the undercarriage are:
1. Sector type sprocket
2. Track frame bottom rollers
3. Track chain support rollers
4. Track chains
5. Track frames
6. Track tensioner device and pressure relief valve
7. Idler.
2 3 4 5
D350R0001
Fig. 5-1 Undercarriage components
1. Sprocket toothed sectors 2. Track frame bottom rollers

The sprocket drives directly the motion received from The rollers (q.ty 7) are three double flange and 4 sin-
the final drive to the track chain. The sprocket is in- gle flange made with special steel, surface treated to
corporated in the final drive. The three toothed sec- prevent wear and abrasion. Such rollers, mounted on
tors are bolted to the crown, thus they are replace- the bottom part of each track frame support the weight
able individually. The profile of the teeth is self-clean- of the machine; the rollers turn on lubricated bushes.
ing. T replacement of the toothed sectors can be done The sealing is provided by metal seals (long-life).
without removing the track chains.
3. Track chain support rollers 4

7 6
The support rollers support the upper part of the track 1
chain. Each roller is secured, by supports, to the track
frames. The rollers turn on lubricated bushes and the
sealing is provided by metal seals (long-life).
4. Track chain
The track chain is essentially made of:
- pins
- bushes 2 8 5 3
SM9351
- links
- shoes
Fig. 5-2 Permanently lubricated chains (SALT)
Pins and bushes are the parts of the track chain that
are most subject to wear. The symptoms characteris-
1. Pin with lube oil reserve hole - 2. Rubber plug - 3. Lube
ing the wear of pins and bushes are the side wear of radial holes - 4. Seal - 5. Thrust washer - 6. Bush - 7. Link
track links, the fast wear of the sprocket teeth and - 8. Pin.
the excessive bending of the track chains.
The shoes are single ribbed. The ribbing, besides pro-

viding traction, reinforces the shoe. Worn shoes, be-
sides increasing the slipping of the track chains, let
the shoes to get easily deformed.
The track chain is of a permanently lubricated type
and the wear between pins and bushes is greatly re-
duced.
In fact, each pin (1) see fig. 5-2 is equipped with an
axial hole and two radial holes (3) perpendicular to the
first one providing a constant lubrication. The move-
ment between pin and bush provides the distribution
of lubricant over all the contact surfaces.
Seals (4) provide the sealing preventing the entry of

foreign materials and keep the lubricant in. Rubber
plug (2) provides the oil filling and sealing.
Note – Also it is not recommended to turn pins and

bushes on lubricated track chains.
5. Track frames 7. Idler

Each track assembly is made of a frame made with The idler is of a spring type, located in the front side
highly mechanical resistant material with boxed of each track frame and is connected to the hydraulic
beams. Inside fully enclosed track tensioner devices tensioner device of the track chain by a fork and a rod
are mounted, protected against any possible intrusion connected to the piston of the adjusting cylinder.
of loose material. Through this system the tension effort and the ab-
The two track frames are pivoting at the rear on the sorption of the stresses on the track chain during the
PIVOT-SHAFT, whereas in the front the connection is operation are transmitted. For this reason, the idler is
provided by a suspension cross-member, centrally not secured to the track frame, but it is free to slide
pivoted to the machine frame and on the sides to the on the guides that are correctly aligned by adjusting
track frames. shims. The idler turns on lubricated bushes. The seal-
Thus, each track frame is oscillating independently ing is provided by metal seals (long-life).
from each other.
The alignment of the track frames is provided at the
front by a compensating device.
The following items are mounted on the track frame:

- track frame bottom rollers;
- support rollers;
- idler and track tensioner
6. Track tensioner
The track tensioner device provides a dual function:
to keep the track chains tensioned; to absorb the
stresses transmitted by the idler.
The track tensioner is provided by a hydraulic device

made of a cylinder and a piston connected to the fork
of the idler through a rod.
To tension the track chain, grease is pumped inside
the cylinder. This causes the forward movement of
the piston and the idler connected to it.
It must be noted that the spring is normally com-

pressed, but it does not provide its action against the
track chain.
Track tensioner spring disassembly/assembly tool.
5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
The major causes for premature or abnormal wear of High track chain tension
the undercarriage components are listed here below.
Troubles
1. Low speed and insufficient traction power. The
Slack track chain tension
machine fails to develop the prescribed pushing
capacity.
Troubles
1. Very fast wear on links, pins and bushes of the 2. The machine turns rightward or leftward, caused
track chain. by the track chain which is tighter.
2. Fast wear of the sprocket teeth and the rib of the 3. Fast wear of pins, bushes and links.
shoe.
4. Wear of the final drive bearings.
3. Possible damage or breakage of the idler, idler sup-
ports both during the forward and reverse motion.
The track chain can derail from the sprocket when
the machine steers. Insufficient tightening of the screws securing the
shoes to the track chain
4. The track chain could fail to engage correctly the
sprocket teeth, both when moving forward or re- Troubles
verse. The track chain could jump the idler, w h e n
Elongation of the screw holes on the link.
the machine is steering.
Remedies
5. Noisy track chain.
The loosening can be caused by a thinning of the
6. The track chains fills with foreign materials (*). shoe due to wear, or by an incorrect torque tightening
of the screws to the prescribed values. Make sure
that the mating faces between shoe and track chain
(*) Note – When the machine operates under condi- are perfectly clean and free from paint.
tions facilitating the entry of foreign materials into the
undercarriage components, it is recommended that
the tension of the system is checked frequently.
In fact, the tension can increase the rubbish included Working on steep slopes
between the track chain components and the idler
tensioner device. Troubles
The presence of foreign materials inside, could cause
Wear at the tips of pins, on the side of the master
delay or prevent the movement of the idler. This pre-
link, on the inner and outer rims of the bottom rollers,
clusion could result in a dangerous load on the track
the sprockets and idlers.
chain (pins, bushes, links), on the idler shaft and the
final drives.
Remedies
Operating on steep slopes, causes strong stress to
the undercarriage components, with subsequent fast
wear. Whenever possible, change frequently the di-
rection and/or the trajectory of the machine.
5.3 INSPECTIONS
5.3.1 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

OF TRACK CHAINS = ÷3040to 40 m (1.18 to 1.57 in)
L =L30
In sealed and lubricated track chains, strong phenom-

ena of internal wear do not occur, if the track chain
adjustment is done timely, when required.
When the track chain is too tight, it is subject to use-
less and dangerous stress. The wear speed increases
and drawbar traction power is lost. When it is too slack,
the links are hitting the undercarriage, increasing the
wear of all parts involved.
Keep in mind that a normal adjustment is proper for D350M0064
dry, stony or rocky terrains, whereas it is necessary

to slack further the track chains in muddy, very wet Fig. 5-3 Track chain sag
and clayey conditions, or when sand, gravel, snow or
ice are present.
Tensioning the track chain

When the track chain is loosen it is necessary to
increase its tension. Prior to any operation, meas-
ure the sagging of the chains in the zone (L, fig. 5-3)
included between the support roller and the idler. When
sag (L) exceeds 30 to 40 mm (1.18 to 1.57 in) (regular
sag) pump grease into the fitting of valve (VR) of the
adjusting cylinder, until the correct tension is obta.
5 - 10 UNDERCARRIAGE D350
Loosening the track chain

When disassembly operations must be performed or WARNING
the track chain is excessively tensioned, the tension
Fluid under pressure. Do not release the track chain
must be loosened. Prior to slackening the track chain,
tension by loosening pressure release valve (Vs).
check that the sag on section (L) is lower than
Do not loosen adjusting screw (VR).
30 to 40 mm (1.18 to 1.57 in). If loosening is required,
proceed as follows:
- Remove access cover (C) on the track tensioner

frame, removing retaining screws (V).
- With a 24 mm (0.9 in) wrench, loosen slightly ad-

justment valve (VR) and back-up the machine a few
metres, if required. Re-tighten the valve and check
sag (L).
Vs VR
D350R0002 D350M0061
Fig. 5-4 Adjusting the track chain
VR. Adjustment valve; VS. Pressure relief valve; I. Grease fitting; C. Cover; V. Securing screws.
D350 UNDERCARRIAGE 5 - 11
5.4.1 TRACK CHAI (removal / installation)

Removal
Place blocks of an appropriate thickness under the
transmission housing and the cross-member so that
the track chains do not touch the ground.
Remove the cover on the track frame and loosen the

tension of the track chain, as described in item 5.3
LOOSENING THE TRACK TENSION.
SM9360
Fig. 5-6
WARNING
Fluid under pressure. Do not release the track
chain tension by loosening pressure release valve
(Vs)(fig. 5-4).
Remove the screws securing the shoe indicated (Fig.

5-7) from the master link.
Remove the shoe and split the master link.

D350R0003
Using a proper hoist and sling, remove the chain from
the machine. Fig. 5-7
WARNING
vided for this purpose.
WARNING
SM9361
When removing the track chains, sling the two end
links and spread the track chain slowly, using a
hoist. Make sure that the zone where the track chain Fig. 5-8
is going to be placed is completely free and no
by-standers are in the vicinities.
Start the machine and moving forward slowly, disen-

gage the track chain from the sprocket, the support
rollers and the idler.
Re-installation
WARNING
Handle all parts with extreme care. Never place
hands and fingers between one piece and another.
Wear approved personal protection equipment
such as glasses, gloves and safety shoes.
SM9362
1. Position the track chain so that the junction point
is corresponding to the sprocket (fig. 5-9).
Fig. 5-9
2. Start the machine and move it slowly forward, guid-
ing, at the same time, the track chain over the
sprocket, using a strong bar placed through the
holes of a link.
3. Place a wooden block under the rib of the shoe

nearest the junction point. Connect half links (1), 1
install the master shoe and tighten the screws to
the prescribed torque indicated in fig. 5-11.
Note – Before installing, degrease screws (C) and the

treaded seats on master link (1).
D350R0019
Apply LOCTITE Super Rapid 242 on the screw thread
and tighten to the prescribed torque. Lubricate with
engine oil the other screws and tighten to the same Fig. 5-10
torque.
Tighten the master link screws with the relevant shoes

C 1
to a torque C = 30 daNm (221.2 lb.ft.), plus a further 2 C1
180° (half turn).
For the screws securing the screws , tighten to a
torque C1 = 30 daNm (221.2 lb.ft.) plus a further 120°
(1/3 turn).
4. Reset the correct track chain tension, making ref-

erence to item 5.3.1 TIGHTENING THE TRACK 3
CHAIN. SM9364
Fig. 5-11 Track chain master link
1. Master SPLIT link - 2. Master shoe - 3. Link pin - C. Master

link hinging securing screws (35 daNm, 258.1 + 1/2 turn) -
C1. Shoe and split link securing screws (35daNm, 258.1 +
1/3 turn).
5.4.2 REPLACING A DAMAGED LINK 5 9 a

AND RE-INSTALLATION 7
To replace a damaged link, not adjacent a master link, 8

it is possible to perform the operation, without remov- 11 10 8
ing the track chain assembly, proceeding as follows. 5
6
1. Remove shoe (1, fig. 5-12) secured to the link to be 1
replaced (2) and the two adjacent shoes: Spread 4
the track chain. 1
2
3
2. Pull-out the hinging pins (3 and 4) of the damaged SM9365
link, using portable press (A, fig. 5-13).
Fig. 5-12
3. Cut with a torch a section of bush (5) 20 to 30 mm
(0.8 to 1.2 in) long.
M L
A SM9366
Fig. 5-13
D E 9 F
A B C
SM9367
Fig. 5-14
6. For the re-installation, use a portable hydraulic press

WARNING complete with the tooling illustrated in figure 5-15.
Wear welder personal protection equipment, such
7. Install a master bush (9) on a new link (11) and
as mask or dark glasses, helmet, apron, shoes and
secure it to the track chain.
heavy gloves, every time arc cutting or welding is
performed. Always wear dark protective glasses
8. Reinstall the second link (6) on the master bush.
near welding in progress. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY
AT THE ARC WITHOUT APPROPRIATE EYE PRO-
9. Install the two master bush rings (10) on links (7
TECTION.
and 8) and complete the operation reinstalling pins
(3 and 4).
4. Remove the damaged link (2).
5. Remove link (6) and pull-out the section from it re-

maining in bush (5).
C
A
B
a G 9 11 F
SM9368
6 9 G
b
SM9369
Fig. 5-15 Installation phases of bushes on the links of the track chain
a. Installation phase of the bush on the first link - b. Installation phase of the second link.
Re-assembly of a lubricated track chain

Prior to reassembling the components of the track
chain, follow the notices and procedures listed in item
5.4.1.
1. Press the pins using the portable hydraulic press.
2. Press the rubber plug into the pin hole using tool A
(A, fig. 5-16). Take care in positioning the plug in- SM9370
side 8 to 10 mm (0.3 to 0.2 in) from the rim of the
pin. Fig. 5-16
3. Check the tightness of the seals and the oil filling

into the pins, using tool (B) fig. 5-17.
D350R0004
Fig. 5-17
5.4.3 IDLER
(Removal/Installation/Overhaul) 1
Removal
1. Split the track chain (see item 5.4.1 TRACK CHAIN
- Removal).
2. Loosen the screws located at the ends of the idler

support (1, fig. 5-18).
D350R0310
3. Extract the idler and the relevant supports from
the guides, after ensuring the supporting of the
Fig. 5-18
assembly with the appropriate tool (see fig. 5-19).
WARNING
Handle all components with extreme care. Never
place hands and fingers between one piece and
another.
4. Remove the idler supports extracting its shafts.

D350R0006
Fig. 5-19
Reinstallation
1. Fill the idler with oil (see fig. 5-20).
WARNING
hands or fingers between pieces. Wear authorised
gloves and safety shoes. D350R0007
Fig. 5-20
2. Install the two supports on the idler shafts (see fig.
5-21).
3. Lift the idler using the appropriate tool and insert

the guides (se fig. 5-22). 1
WARNING
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if
D350R0310
provided. Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
Fig. 5-21
4. Check that the centre line of the idler is aligned

with the centre line of the bottom rollers.
5. Tighten screws (1) located in the rear side of the

idler supports (see fig. 5-21).
6. Join the track chain (see 5.4.1 TRACK CHAINN -

Installation) and adjust correctly.
D350R0006
Fig. 5-22
Overhaul 5. Check that the pusher of the hydraulic press is

extended against hydraulic piston (3).
Remove the idler from the machine (see removal).
6. Remove the four short screws (B and C, fig. 5-
1. Support the idler in an appropriate manner. Remove 23).
the screws securing the bottom roller interfering with
the removal of the tensioner spring (third roller, from 7. Loosen the two long screws (A) and at the same
the idler). time release slowly the hydraulic pressure from
the press.
2. Lift the track frame about 150 mm (6 in) and place
a support block under it. 8. Repeat this manoeuvre until the tensioner spring
is fully unloaded.
WARNING 9. Remove bracket (5, fig. 5-23) and hydraulic press

(6).
hands or fingers between pieces. 10. Extract the cylinder support, cylinder (2) and pis-
ton (3).
Check the tensioner spring: if this is damaged, re-

3. Remove the guide plate. move it from the housing using a hoist and replace it.
4. Making reference to fig. 5-23 install bracket (5) on Check the inner surface of cylinder (2). Any scratch-
the track frame and install press (6). ing warrants its replacement.
B B
A A
1 2 3
C C
4
6 5
D350R0020
Fig. 5-23 Removal of the track chain tensioner spring
A-B-C. Flange securing screws - 1. Retaining flange - 2. Cylinder - 3. Piston - 4. Swinging cross-member - 5. Bracket -
6. Hydraulic press.
WARNING
vided for this purpose. Beware of by-standers in
the vicinity of the load to be lifted.
D350R0010
Fig. 5-24
5.4.4 TRACK CHAIN SUPPORT ROLLERS

(Removal/Installation)
1
Each track frame is equipped with two support rollers.
Removal
For the removal, proceed as follows:
D350R0011
WARNING
Handle all parts with extreme care. Never place Fig. 5-25
Wear approved personal protection equipment
1. Loosen the tension of the track chain, using ad-

justing valve (VR) previously seen, so that a quan-
tity of grease sufficient to decrease the tension gets
out (see paragraph 5.3.1 CHECK AND ADJUST-
MENT OF THE TRACK CHAINS - Loosening the
track chain).
2. Lift the chain over the support roller.
3. Remove screws (1) securing the roller support to

the track frame and remove it.
In the event the roller must be disassembled, it is
necessary to remove it from the support.
WARNING
Fluid under pressure. Do not release the track chain
tension by loosening pressure release valve. Do
not remove the grease fitting installed on the ad-
justment valve.
Reinstallation
4. To reinstall the rollers, reverse the sequence
previously described. Tighten the securing screws
of the roller support to the track frame.
WARNING
D350R0012
Handle all parts with extreme care. Never place
Wear approved personal protection equipment Fig. 5-26
Reassemble the track chain and readjust the track

chain tension (see paragraph 5.3.1 CHECK AND
ADJUSTMENT OF THE TRACK CHAINS -
Tensioning the track chain).
WARNING
vided for this purpose. Beware of by-standers in
the vicinity of the load to be lifted.
SM9412
5.4.5 TRACK CHAIN BOTTOM ROLLERS

(Removal / Installation)
Removal
If the intervention is limited to one or few rollers, to
remove them, it is sufficient to follow the procedure 1 2
described here below.
1. Remove screws (1 and 2, fig. 5-33) and remove the

bottom roller inner and outer guards. Salvage the
spacers mounted coaxial with screws (2).
SM9386
2. Split the chain (see 5.4.1 TRACK CHAIN - Re-

Fig. 5-27
moval).
3. Lift the machine using an hydraulic jack (3, fig.

5-34) of adequate capacity. Immediately support
the machine using a strong wooden block (4) capa-
ble of supporting its weight (fig. 5-35).
4. Loosen screws (5) securing the rollers to the track 3

frame.
5. Insert tool (A), remove the screws and remove the

roller, as illustrated in fig. 5-35.
SM9387
WARNING
Fig. 5-28
Every time groups of the machine must be re-
moved or installed, requiring to be supported by
jacks, make sure that the contacts under the jack
and between jack and machine are appropriate for
the load to be supported. Immediately transfer the
load to appropriate supports or stands. Do not
work under or near a machine or its components
which are supported only by jacks or other lifting
devices, according to current national or local regu-
lations.
Re-installation
1. Place the roller on tool (A, fig. 35) and arrange it on
the track frame. Install screws (5) and tighten to
the prescribed torque (see 5.5.4 SPECIFICATIONS
AND DATA - Bottom rollers). 5
2. Re-install the roller guards, placing the spacer pre-

viously removed, and lower the machine to the
ground. 4
3. Reassemble the track chain and set the correct A

tension (see 5.4.1 TRACK CHAIN - Installation).
SM9388
Fig. 5-29
5.5.1 IDLER TIGHTENING TORQUES

Type ........... permanently lubricated, equipped with Q.ty 12 screws 7/16" 14 UNC (C1),
rotating metal seals (long-life). to tightening torque ........................ 6.1 to 7.1 daNm
(45 to 52.3 lb.ft.)
Thickness of adjusting shims between end plates and
idler guide slides 0.5 mm (0.02 in). * Fill with oil type:
90% AGIP ROTRA LSX +
Idler assembly ......................... 310.85 Kg (685.3 lb) 10% AGIP ROCOL A50 R
Quantity ............................................ 0.6 Kg (1.3 lb)
Note – Degrease and clean the front sealing seal seats.
Eliminate all signs of dust or imprints then smear a
thin film of oil, taking care not to oil other parts.
2
C1 3
4
5
6
7
14
13
11
* 12
10
9
8
D350R0017
Fig. 5-30 Idler

1. Naked idler - 2. Shaft - 3. By-metal bush - 4. Thrust washer - 5. Cover flange - 6. Flange securing screw - 7. Flange seal
- 8. Inner sealing ring - 9. Inner elastic ring - 10. Outer sealing ring - 11. Outer elastic ring - 12. Stabilising ring - 13. Plug -
14. plug pin.
5.5.2 SPROCKETS
Type .............................................. w/ bolted sectors
Number of teeth of crown .................................... 27
Pitch diameter .......................... 936.25 mm (36.9 in) 1
Width of sector .......................... 93+1 -0
+0.04
mm (3.7 +0 in)
Nuts for sprocket sector securing screws M24. 2
D350R0018
Fig. 5-31 Section view of sprocket
1. Toothed sector - 2. Hub.
5.5.3 TRACK CHAINS Tightening torques

Type ......................................... links w/ master pins Master link securing screws C (35 daNm, 258 lb.ft.)
Number of shoes per track chain......................... 44 plus an additional 1/2 turn.
Number of master links per track chain ................. 2
Shoe securing screws C1 (35 daNm, 258 lb.ft.) plus
Width of shoes: an additional 1/3 turn.
- standard ....................................... 610 mm (24 in)
- upon request ................................. 711 mm (28 in)
C 1 2 C1
SM9364
Fig. 5-32 Master link
1. Half master link (SPLIT) - 2. Master shoe - 3. Link pin - C. Master link securing screws - C1. Shoe and master link securing
screws.
5.5.4 BOTTOM ROLLERS Tightening torque

Type ........... permanently lubricated, equipped with Screws (6) securing side
metal (long-life) front seals. covers ................................. M12/16.2 to 19.1 daNm
(119.4 to 140.8 lb.ft.)
Quantity of bottom rollers per track chain:
- double flange ..................................................... 2 Screws securing rollers to track
- single flange ....................................................... 5 frame M22x1,5 ....................... 80 daNm (589.8 lb.ft.)
Single flange
Note – Before assembling, degrease and clean the
- weight of roller assembly ............. 89 Kg (196.2 lb) front seal seats. Eliminate all traces of dust or im-
- diameter of race ........................... 242 mm (9.5 in) prints from the surfaces then cover them with a thin
- diameter of outer flange ............. 276 mm (10.9 in) film of oil, making sure that th e other surfaces re-
- quantity of oil (SAE 30/40) ........... 0.67 Kg (1.5 lb) main dry.
SAE 40 oil
1 2 3 12 4 8 9 10 11 7 15 6 5
13 14
Axial clearance 0,15 +00,4 (each sae)
D350R0008
Fig. 5-33 Single flange roller
1. Bottom roller shell - 2. Shaft - 3. Bush - 4. Thrust washers - 5. Cover flange - 6. Screw - 7. Flange seals - 8. Inner sealing
ring - 9. Inner elastic ring - 10. Outer sealing ring - 11. Outer elastic ring - 12. Stabiliser ring - 13. Plug - 14. Expanding pin
- 15. Flat washer.
Double flange
- weight of roller ass.ly .............. 97.56 Kg (215.1 lb)
- diameter of race ........................... 242 mm (9.5 in)
- diameter of outer guide .............. 276 mm (10.9 in)
- quantity of oil (SAE 30/40) ......... 0.670 Kg (1.5 lb)
SAE 40 oil
1 2 3 12 4 8 9 10 11 7 15 6 5
13
14
Axial clearance 0,15 +00,4 (each sae)
D350R0009
Fig. 5-34 Double flange roller
1. Bottom roller shell - 2. Shaft - 3. Bush - 4. Thrust washers - 5. Cover flange - 6. Screw - 7. Flange seals - 8. Inner sealing
ring - 9. Inner elastic ring - 10. Outer sealing ring - 11. Outer elastic ring - 12. Stabiliser ring - 13. Plug - 14. Expanding pin
- 15. Flat washer.
5.5.5 SUPPORT ROLLERS Tightening torques

Type ........... permanently lubricated, equipped with Screws (13) securing roller cover
metal (long-life) front seals. 3/8 - 16 UNF .................................. 3.8 to 4.5 daNm
(28 to 33.2 lb.ft.)
Quantity of rollers per track chain ......................... 2
- weight of roller assembly ......... 50.67 Kg (111.7 lb) Plug (15) 3/4 - 16 UNF ................. 15.2 to 19 daNm
- diameter of race ........................... 191 mm (7.5 in) (112.1 to 140.1 lb.ft.)
- diameter of outer flange ............... 223 mm (8.8 in) Adjusting ring-nut (8) ..................................... M58x2
- quantity of oil (SAE 40) .................. 0.5 Kg (1.1 lb)
- diameter of shaft .................. 73.15 h9 mm (2.9 in) (*) Apply LOCTITE no. 243
- specs of material of support roller body
according to standard ......................... PDQB 4000
- material of body .................................. 35 MB4 - 2
Note – Before assembling, degrease and clean the front

seal seats. Eliminate all traces of dust or imprints from
the surfaces then cover them with a thin film of oil,
making sure that the other surfaces remain dry.
*
Axial clearance 0,05
0.25
16 4 13 14 15 5 9 8 1 3 12 6 7 6 10 11 2
D350R0013
Fig. 5-35 Support roller
1. Roller shell - 2. Shaft - 3. Roller radial bearing - 4. Cover - 5. Cover O-Ring - 6. Elastic ring - 7. Sealing ring - 8. Adjusting
ring-nut - 9. Stop ring - 10. Cover flange - 11. Flange O-Ring - 12. Spacer ring - 13. Ex. screw - 14. Spring washer - 15. Plug
- 16. Plug O-Ring.
5.5.6 TRACK CHAIN TENSIONER Pressure relief valve (1) ......... 5.4 daNm (39.8 lb.ft.)
Adjusting valve (3) ................. 5.4 daNm (39.8 lb.ft.)
Specifications of track tensioner spring:

WARNING
- free length of spring ................. 1142 mm (44.9 in)
Fluid under pressure. Do not release the track chain - length of pre-loaded spring
tension by loosening pressure release valve. Do (29500 Kg, 65036.4 lb) ............... 932 mm (36.7 in)
not loosen the adjusting valve.
Type ..................................................... single spring

Track chain tension adjustment ................. hydraulic
Setting of pressure relief
valve (1) ................................... 689 bar (9993.1 psi)
1 2 3 4
6 7 8
5
9
2
10 11 12
13 14 15
D350R0021
Fig. 5-36 Track tensioner
1. Pressure relief valve - 2. Cylinder - 3. Adjusting valve - 4. Grease fitting - 5. Cylinder grease fitting - 6. Cylinder housing
- 7. Plate - 8. Spring - 9. Piston seal - 10. Pusher rod - 11. Piston - 12. Puller hole - 13. Guide plate - 14. Mud scraper seal
- 15. Mud scraper seal.
5.5.7 FRONT LINKAGE PIVOTS
SWINGING
CROSS-MEMBER
FRAME
CROSS-MEMBER
2 2
3 5-6
6-7
D350R0014
Fig. 5-37 Front cross-member pivots
1. Cross-member - 2. Cross- member shim - 3. Central cross-member bush - 4. Central cross-member pin - 5. Screw TE
M12 x 1.75 x 170 - 6. Washer 12 x 24 x 2.5 - 7. Front nut M12 x 1.75.
mm in
A. Side pivot Min. Max Min. Max
- Pin diameter 76.181 to 76.200 2.999 to 3.000
- Ball joint inner diameter 76.185 to 76.200 2.999 to 3.000
- Clearance 0.000 to 0.019 0.000 to 0.001
A1. Side pivot

- Joint seat diameter 120.610 to 120.650 4.748 to 4.750
- Joint outer diameter 120.630 to 120.650 4.749 to 4.750
0.020 clear. to 0.040 interf. 0.0008 clear. to 0.0016 interf.
B. Central pivot
- Pin diameter (100 h8) 100.000 to 99.946 3.937 to 3.935
- Phenolic bush inner diameter (*) 100.480 to 100.580 3.956 to 3.959
- Play 0.126 to 0.334 0.0049 to 0.0131
B1. Central pivot

- Diameter of bush seat (120 h8) 120.000 to 120.054 4.724 to 4.726
- Phenolic bush outer diameter (*) 120.354 to 120.304 4.738 to 4.736
- Interference 0.304 to 0.354 0.0119 to 0.0139
(*) Dimension referred to prior press fitting into seat.
PIVOT SHAFT
(mm) in
C. PIVOT SHAFT Min. Max Min. Max
- Shaft larger diameter 179.937 to 180.000 7.084 to 7.086
- Phenolic bush inner diameter 180.673 to 180.773 7.113 to 7.117
- Play 0.131 to 0.416 0.0051 to 0.0164
- Shaft smaller diameter 149.937 to 150.000 5.903 to 5.905
- Phenolic bush inner diameter 150.581 to 150.736 5.928 to 5.934
- Play 0.496 to 0.700 0.0195 to 0.0275
1
2-3 TRANSMISSION HOUSING
4-5
10
11
TRACK FRAME BODY
12
13
D350R0015
14 15 16-17
Fig. 5-38 PIVOT SHAFT
1. PIVOT SHAFT - 2. Screw TE M24x 3 x 90 - 3. Washer 24.4 x 55 x 9 - 4. Screw TE M 10x35 - 5. Washer 10x21 - 6. Inner ring
- 7. Mud scraper ring - 8. Ring - 9. Bush - 10. Bush - 11. Ring - 12. Shim - 13. Guide disc - 14. Screw TE M16 x 2 x 50 - 15.
Side cover - 16. Screw TE M20 x 60 - 17. Washer 20 x 37.
CROSS MEMBER PIVOT SUPPORT ON TRACK FRAME

mm in
D. Cross-member large pivot Min. Max Min. Max
- Bush inner diameter 84.63 to 84.73 3.332 to 3.336
- Play 0.18 to 0.438 0.0071 to 0.0172
D3. Cross-member smaller pivot

- Play 0.046 to 0.226 0.0018 to 0.089
D1. Cross-member large pivot

- Bush outer diameter 98.454 to 98.504 3.876 to 3.878
D2. Cross-member smaller pivot

- Support inner diameter 82.200 to 82.254 3.236 to 3.238
- Max. outer diameter 82.434 to 82.484 3.245 to 3.247
3-4
1 12
6
5
Fill with
grease
7-8
9 7-8
Fill with grease 11

10 TRACK
FRAME BODY
D350R0016
Fig. 5-39 Cross-member support
1. Ball joint - 2. Bush - 3. Screw TE M8 x 1.25 x 20 - 4. Washer 8 x 17 - 5. Centre cross-member pivot pin - 6. Ring - 7. Screw
TE M12 x 1.75 x 30 - 8. Washer 12 x 24 x 2.5 - 9. Cover - 10. Bush - 11. Cover ass.ly - 12. Bush.
5.5.8 WEAR LIMITS

Measuring procedure Nominal dimension Wear limit
mm (in) mm (in)(*)
Pitch
4XP 863.6 ± 0.8
(34 ± 0.03)

Link
(height) HEIGHT 150 ± 0.5 138
OF TRACK (5.9 ± 0.02) (5.4)
CHAIN LINK
Bottom
roller
(diameter) 191 ± 0.5 177
(7.5 ± 0.02) (6.9)

DIAMETER
ROLLER
Support
roller
242 ± 0.5 222
(diameter)
(9.5 ± 0.02) (8.7)

DIAMETER
ROLLER
Bushes SHOE
SURFACE

(diameter)
123.2 ± 0.5 120.7
(4.8 ± 0.02) (4.7)
BUSH
SHOE
DISTANCE

Wear on A Radial D = min (A, B, C)
wear
Track chain forward
B
travel side
bush 81.6 ± 0.3 76.6
DRY D
diameter (3.2 ± 0.01) (3.0)
C
Wear on reverse travel side Outer diameter
Idler
(distance)
98 75
(3.8) (2.9)
Ruota
(distance) 22 27.5
(0.9) (1.1)

CENTRAL
FLANGE
HEIGHT

Shoes HEIGHT
OF RIB

(height) 71.4 ± 1 45.4
(2.8 ± 0.04) (1.8)
Sprocket
(rim) 6 wear average
(*) The wear limit listed corresponds generally to the thickness of the hardened layer at 100 % of the wear.
5.6 SPECIAL TOOLS
UNDERCARRIAGE
Z caliper track chain alignment
380000959
SECTION 6
DOZING EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 6-3

6.1.1 Operation of the hydraulic system .................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.2 Diagram equipment hydraulic system diagram ................................................................. 6-5
6.2 TESTS ............................................................................................................................... 6-9

6.2.1 Flow test in single circuits ................................................................................................ 6-9
6.3 REPAIR PROCEDURES .................................................................................................. 6-10

6.3.1 Hydraulic oil reservoir (removal / installation) ................................................................. 6-10
6.3.2 Equipment hydraulic pump (removal ) ............................................................................ 6-12
6.3.3 Hydraulic control valve (overhaul) ................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.4 Installation of blade ........................................................................................................ 6-14
6.4 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA .......................................................................................... 6-15

6.4.1 Hydraulic control valve ................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.2 Hydraulic power pump .................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.3 Blade cylinder support fork ............................................................................................ 6-17
6.4.4 Blade lifting control cylinder ........................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.5 Blade Tilt control cylinder (Bulldozer version) ................................................................. 6-19
6.4.6 Blade Tilt control cylinder (Angledozer version) .............................................................. 6-20
6.4.7 Ripper lift cylinder .......................................................................................................... 6-21
6.4.8 Ripper pitch cylinder ....................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4.9 Push arms and blade rods .............................................................................................. 6-23
6.4.10 C-frame and rods ........................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.11 Single shank ripper ......................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.12 Tightening torque ........................................................................................................... 6-26
6-2 DOZING EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM D350
D350 DOZING EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 6-3
6.1.1 OPERATION OF THE HYDRAULIC sure relief valve (4) set at 190 bar, 2755.7 psi. Also,
SYSTEM the following valve are installed on the control valve.
The circuit is equipped with a L.S. (Load Sensing)
The dozer D350 can be equipped with a Bulldozer or system. A connection between power pump and con-
a 1-cylinder Angledozer. trol valve, allows the sending of a signal from the con-
In the Angledozer version, a fully mechanical Tilt control valve to the pump regulating the oil flow accord-
figuration is also available in which the relevant spool ing to the effective requirements of the actuators,
is not used. changing the pump flow up to maximum delivery at
The equipment hydraulic circuit is equipped with a max. speed (248 lt/min, 65.5 gpm).
variable displacement piston power pump (P) mounted Also, the circuit regulates the distribution of the flow
on the torque converter, sucking oil from tank (S) according to a logic of priority for the steering, pre-
through metal filter (Fa). The steering circuit and the vailing over the equipment circuit, when the operation
equipment circuit are separate, but they have in com- of both of them is required.
mon the same power (piston) pump and the same
control valve. Thus, the two circuits use the same
hydraulic oil, but operate at different pressures.
QUICK DROP VALVES (OPTIONAL)
The operating pressures of the single circuits are:
- equipment circuit 200 ± 5 bar (2900.7 ± 72.5 psi); Quick drop valves (V) inserted on the bottom of the
- steering circuit 350 ± 5 bar (5076.3 ± 72.5 psi). blade lift cylinders operate during the lowering phase
The pump powers the steering circuits through a sec- of the blade to accelerate its movement.
tion of the control valve dedicated to the steering. When the operator pushes the blade control pilot valve
Pilot valve (Mr) controlling the ripper can move into into lowering position, oil flowing out the lower cham-
three positions corresponding to: raising, neutral and ber of the cylinder, under the effect of the weight of
lowering. the blade and the flow of oil to the cylinder upper cham-
Pilot valve (Ma) controlling the blade can move into ber, pushes the ball which actuates the plunger, which,
four position corresponding to: raising, neutral, lower- by moving, opens the oil delivery port from the valve
ing and floating and also blade tilting (Tilt) rightward to the cylinder upper chamber, thus speeding up the
or leftward. descent of the blade.
Two safety levers, located on the right and left sides When the operator pushes the blade control lever
of the driver’s seat, cut-off electrically (in raised posi- slightly forward, the condition occurs when the blade
tion) with a proximity sensor, the powering of the con- drops by gravity instead of pushed by the oil pres-
trol pilot valves, preventing accidental movements of sure. The ball is blocked in its seat and the oil is pre-
the pilot valve. When the machine is standing still and vented from flowing from one end of the cylinder to
the lever is lowered, allowing the machine to perform the other.
all working operations. Stroke-end valves are mounted in the blade control
The actuation of indicator light (4) on the monitor panel cylinders. They are made by ducts inside the piston,
in the cab signals that oil return filter (9) is clogged in which seats and a plunger are located. The plunger
and must be promptly replaced. cuts-off the passage when the oil pressure blocks it
Oil sucked by pump (P) powers control valve (D), against the relevant seat. It stays closed until the pis-
powering block (Va) reaching pilot valves (Ma and Mr) ton ends its stroke. The plunger is moved away from
through steering piloting block (Vp) providing the hy- its seat by the contact of the plunger rod against the
draulic piloting of the control valve spools (Powering end of the cylinder. Oil flows from one end of the cyl-
pressure of the pilot valves 30 bar, 435.1 psi). inder to the other, limiting the movement of the pis-
The movement of any spool occurs through the check ton. These valves are necessary, as a result of the
valves in the actuator circuit selected. The pressure blade Tilt action. Thus it is possible that the piston of
that is established in the delivery circuit is propor- a blade control cylinder is at stroke-end, whereas the
tional to the effort required and it is limited by pres- other one still has to travel part of it.
BLADE HYDRAULIC TILT

The Tilt control is obtained by a sideways movement
of the lever. The rightward movement of the lever
causes the rightward tilting of the blade (clockwise
rotation); in the same manner, the leftward movement
of the lever causes the leftward tilting of the blade
(anticlockwise rotation).
The Tilt control circuit is equipped with a flow reduc-
tion (7) limiting the flow of oil to the cylinder, facilitat-
ing the control of the blade. When the pump flow is
reduced, oil operates lifting the valve plunger.
BLADE CONTROL LEVER POSITIONS

The lever controls the lifting, lowering and tilting of
F
the blade.
To lift or lower the blade, move the lever respectively H
backward into position (D) or forward into position (H).
The holding of the blade into a desired position oc- A B
curs, in both instances, by releasing the lever, which
returns automatically into neutral (N).
To make the blade floating, bearing on the ground just
under the effect of its weight, push the lever full stroke D
forward, into position (F), where it is held by an appro- D350R0031
priate detent.
The floating condition ends when returning the lever Fig. 6-1 Blade control lever positions decal
into neutral position (N).
Moving the lever leftward into position (A), or right-
ward into position (B), the tilting of the blade is ob-
tained. The lever must be held until the blade reaches
the desired position.
POSITIONS OF THE RIPPER CONTROL LEVER

- With lever forward = ripper lowering.
- With lever backward = ripper lifting.
- With lever forward + button = pitch opening.
- With lever backward + button = pitch closing.
- With lever in the centre = neutral position.
D350M0036
Fig. 6-2 Ripper control lever positions decal
6.1.2 DOZER EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
P. Variable displacement piston power pump
(380 lt/min to 2100 rpm, 100.4 gpm to 2100 rpm)
D. Piloted control valve
S. Hydraulic oil tank
Va. Pilot valve powering block
Fr. Filter on return oil to tank
Ls. Load-Sensing signal
V. Quick drop valves
Connecting ports
- Control valve - Cylinders Delivery

A1. Ripper pitch cylinder
loweri Q = 350 lt/min (92.5 gpm)
B1. Ripper pitch cylinder
lifting Q = 300 lt/min (79.3 gpm)
A2. Ripper cylinder
lowering Q = 350 lt/min (92.5 gpm)
B2. Ripper cylinder
A3. Tilt cylinder
B3. Tilt cylinder
A4. Blade control cylinder
B4. Blade control cylinder
- Blade control pilot valve - Control valve (piloting)
Blade lowering 1 Î a4
Floating 5 Î x
Blade tilt 2 Î a3
Blade raising 3 Î b4
Blade tilt 4 Î b3
- Ripper control pilot valve - Control valve (piloting)
Raising 1 Î b2
Lowering 2 Î a2
D350 6-7
EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM D350

RIPPER
LIFT PITCH TILT BLADE
M
HYDRAULIC
Q=100L/min (26.4 gpm)
Q=100L/min (26.4 gpm)

2 abb.
MOTOR
Q=300L/min (79.3 gpm)
Q=350L/min (92.5 gpm)

α β
T
Mr
Q=300L/min (79.3 gpm)

A S B
Q=350L/min (42.5 gpm)

P
1 soll.
25
4
Ma 27
Q=350L/min
Q=350L/min
(92.5 gpm)
(92.5 gpm)
P 2 b1 B1 A1 b2 B2 A2 b3 B3 A3 b4 X1 B4 A4 Y1 K
D
5 float 28 210±5
210 bar
+5 210±5
210 +5bar 210±5
210 bar
+5 210±5
210 +5bar 210±5
210 bar
+5 210±5
210 +5 bar
1 abb. (3045.8±72.50psi) (3045.8±72.5
0 psi)(3045.8±72.50 psi) (3045.8±72.5
0 psi) (3045.8±72.50psi) (3045.8±72.5
0 psi)
5 bar
T
15 bar (217.56 psi) 8 7 6 72.5 psi
25 bar (362.59 psi) TL Vp

19
0,7 L/min (0.18

gpm)
T T
3 soll.
A P STEERING 2
507.6 psi
5
L
3 35 bar
1
SECTION 10
(170/350) (2465.6/5076.3)
± 5 bar ±72.5 psi
23 22
X
A
(580.15 C (72.5 psi)
psi) 5 bar 380 ± 10 bar
40 bar B (5511.4 ± 145 psi)
S P C B D 21
T
A
T a1 Mp P
a2 a3 a4 MLS T
18 A
P
14 R P
24 20 24 24 LS
TR PS PM
P1
19
15 Va
16
35bar α β
(507.63
psi)
17 M A G X
C
45bar
(652.67 psi)
P2 T PR 20+21
20 to 21 (290 to
LOAD
SENSING bar
bar 304.6 psi)
VALVE "S"
PRESS.
11
CUT-OFF 380 bar (5511.4 psi)
"D"
CONSTANT 12
9 1,3 to
1,3 - 1,5
1,5bar
bar
POWER
"LR" 170KW
(18.8 to 21.7 psi) 26 2100 RPM (228 HP)
13
ß 25 75
33 ÷ 37
33 to 37bar
bar (478.6 to
2 bar
STAND-BY 536.6 psi)

Volume of oil
tank 145 lt (38.3 gal.)
4 1912 RPM
PRESS
190 (Qmax=190 cc/rev;

CC/REV
Qmin=16 cc/rev)
OIL
HI-TECH 46
S S
P D350R0036
Dozer hydraulic diagram
1. Blade control spool - 2. Tilt control spool - 3. Ripper control spool - 4. Hydraulic oil filter clogging indicator light - 5. Load sensing limitation valve (170 ± 5 bar/350 ± 5 bar, 2465.6 ± 72.5 psi/5076.3 ± 72.5 psi) - 6. Blade control spool safety valves (210 + 50 bar, 3045.8 ±
72.5 psi) - 7. Tilt control spool safety valve (210 ± 5 bar, 3045.8 ± 72.5 psi) - 8. Ripper control spool safety valves (210 ± 5 bar, 3045.8 ± 72.5 psi) - 9. Bypass valve - 10. Unloading valve (37 bar, 536.6 psi, 38 lt/min, 10.03 gpm) - 11. Load sensing signal regulating valve -
12. Cut-off signal valve - 13. Constant power control valve - 14. Accumulator 0.7 lt (0.18 gal.) - 15. Flow reduction valve - 16. Supply block max. Pressure valve 45 bar (652.67 psi) - 17. Supply block solenoid valve - 18. Reduction valve - 19. Electro proportional valves - 20.
Line LS decompression valve (stabilising the float function signal) - 21. General safety valve - 22. Piloting valve - 23. Selector valve - 24. Pressure compensators - 25. Ripper pitch function control diverter valve - 26. Ripper pitch function piloting solenoid valve - 27. Float
function piloting solenoid valve - 28. Float function pressure switch - C. Hydraulic oil radiator - D. Equipment/steering control valve - M. Steering hydraulic motor (see Sect. 4 Steering) - P. Variable displacement piston power pump 170 kW/2100 rpm (228 HP/2100 rpm) - Ma.
Blade control pilot valve - Mr. Ripper control pilot valve - Va. pilot valves supply valve - Vp. Steering piloting valve - S. Tank.
6.2 TESTS
6.2.1 FLOW TEST IN SINGLE CIRCUITS REFERENCE PERFORMANCE TABLE
Plug the delivery pipes to the blade and tilt actuating PRESSURES VALUES REQUIRED
cylinders, so that they can be loaded. Since the cylin- Equipment (Max) 200 ± 5 bar
ders are equipped with stroke-end valves on the pis- (2900.7 ± 72.5 psi)
tons, the load needed cannot be obtained when actu-
ating the cylinders to stroke-end. On the other hand, Equip. control valve 31.5 to 35 bar
the ripper circuit can be tested working at stroke-end piloting (Pick-up M) (456.9 to 507.6 psi)
in both directions.
Pump w/pilot valve 33 to 37 bar
in neutral (Pick-up P) (478.6 to 536.6 psi)
Pump w/pilot valve 33 to 37 bar

in float (Pick-up P) (478.6 to 536.6 psi)
Steering 340 to 360 bar

DANGER (4931.3 to 5221.3 psi)
Fluid under pressure. Always rest the hydraulic Brakes control 18 to 22 bar
equipment on the ground. Cut-off the engine, move (261 to 349 psi)
the control levers a few times, prior to disconnect-
ing the connections of the system. Transmission 15 to 16.5 bar
(217.5 to 239.3 psi)
WARNING
DO NOT USE YOUR HANDS to identify pressure
leakages. Jets of fluid under pressure have enough
force to penetrate the skin. Start the engine and
wait that the hydraulic oil reaches the operational
temperature, then accelerate the engine to maxi-
mum speed.
6 - 10 DOZING EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM D350
6.3.1 HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR

ON
(Removal / Installation)
OFF
Removal
DO PER
Turn the main switch into "OFF" to cut-off the electri-
O
NO AT
T E
cal system and apply a signal "DO NOT OPERATE"
on the switch as illustrated.
D350R0038
Fig. 6-3 Electrical system main switch
Then, proceed as follows:
- drain the hydraulic oil from the tank into a container

of appropriate capacity of at least 160 litres (42 gal.).
loosening the relevant plug (T) located under the
tank on the right side, as indicated in the figure.
- disconnect suction (4, fig. 6-5) and return pipes on

the tank;
- disconnect the oil return filter clogging sender (3, T

D350M0182
fig. 6-5).
Fig. 6-4 Hydraulic oil reservoir
D350 DOZING EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 6 - 11
- remove the four upper screws securing the oil tank

to the fuel tank; DANGER
- remove the four lower screws securing the tank to
Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the
the right fender;
anchor points are strong enough to handle the
- remove the tank using lifting eyes (7).
expected load. Keep exposed personnel clear of
anchor points and cables or chains.
2
1
4
D350R0034
Fig. 6-5 Hydraulic oil tank and filters
1. Oil filler cap with breather and filter - 2. Return filter - 3. Oil filter clogging sensor - 4. Suction pipe - 5. Oil return sleeve -
6. Oil level indicator - 7. Lifting eye.
FILTERS
WARNING
The cleaning of the oil of the hydraulic system is pro-
vided by a full flow filter (2) located inside the hydrau- Never use gasoline, solvent or other flammable
lic oil tank located on the pump return, equipped with fluid to clean parts. Use exclusively qualified, non-
paper filtering element, by-pass valve to cut it off in flammable, non-toxic commercial solvents.
the event of clogging. A sender (3) signals the clog-
ging of the filter with an indicator light on the dash-
board.
The filter is reached by removing the relevant cover, Reinstallation of filter on tank
after removing the securing screws. The reinstallation of the filter and tank is done by re-
Return filter (2) must be periodically replaced every versing the removal sequence.
500 hours work, to prevent the oil is not filtered by a
clogged filter.
6.3.2 EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC PUMP Only after disconnecting all pipes, proceed with the
removal of the torque converter pump.
Removal
Hold the pump appropriately with cables and loosen
Operate as described, here below: screws securing the pump. Then, remove the pump
from torque converter cover (3).
- Drain the oil from equipment tank (5).
- Start the engine and let it run for a few seconds, to

empty pump (P) suction pump (1). WARNING
Avoid kinking chains or steel cables.
- Remove the cab/operator seat and rops.
Always wear safety gloves when handling chains
and cables.
- Disconnect suction pipe (1) from pump (P), loosen-
ing retaining screws.
Make sure that the cables are secured and that the
securing point is strong enough to hold the load
- Staccare la tubazione (2) svitando le viti sulle
applied.
semiflange.
Keep all by-standers away from the lifting point,
the cables or chains.
- Disconnect draining pipes (6) from the pump side.
4 5
6 1
D350R0035
Fig. 6-6 Equipment hydraulic pump and pipes
P. Equipment hydraulic pump - 1. Suction pump from tank - 2. Delivery pipe to control valve - 3. Torque converter cover - 4.
Control valve - 5. Tank - 6. Draining pipe.
6.3.3 HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE

(Overhaul)
The control valve is located on the right fender (see

fig. 6-7). to overhaul it is not necessary to remove it,
then proceed as follows:
- tag and disconnect all hydraulic pipes from the con-

trol valve (see fig. 6-8);
D350R0022
Fig. 6-7
WARNING
Fluid under pressure. Always rest the hydraulic
equipment on the ground. Cut-off the engine, move
the control levers a few times, prior to disconnect-
ing the connections of the system.
- drain all the residual oil;
- proceed with the disassembly.
D350R0023
Fig. 6-8
6.3.4 INSTALLATION OF BLADE F. Tilt cylinder rear pivot or side rod

G. Push beam rear pivot
A. Push beam front pivot
G1 = 100 + 10 daNm (737.3 + 73.7 lb.ft.)
B. and C. Cross rods pivot
L. Blade cutting edge securing nuts (102 to 106
D. Blade control cylinder rods pivot
daNm) (752 to 781.5 lb.ft.)
E. Blade central link pivot
D C
E
L
A
G1
B F
D350R0030
PREPARATION Position the blade and block it in a secure manner.

Position the individual blade push beams and install
Print to installing any blade component, eliminate all
the lower pins.
protective wrappings, paint or scales from the mount-
Install the blade cross rods, install the lever pins and
ing or mating faces. Remove all plugs from the mount-
the locking plates.
ing holes.
Move the machine forward in between the push beams,
aligning the beams with the ball joints.
Remove the pin covers and grease the ball joint.
INSTALLATION
Install the shims and the cover, then lubricate the
Install a joint (G) on each track frame, tightening the screws prior to tightening them.
relevant securing screws. Install the blade lifting cylinder pins and locking.
Clean accurately the joint ball and the ball seats on Install the hoses and eventual tilt cylinder guards.
the beams and the pin covers. Smear generously the Grease accurately all linkages.
ball joints and the joint ball seats with grease.
6.4.1 HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE

Single, 4-spool control valve, made by Rexroth
Max. operating pressure 200/350 bar (2900.7/5076.3 psi)
Oil temperature - 20 °C through 80 °C (- 4 °F through
176 °F)
Recommended hydraulic oil HI-TECH 46 (ISO VG46)
Ports supply
SPOOL
A1 - B1 Hydraulic motor A1 B1
supply ports STEERING

A2 - B2 RIPPER cylinders 2 2
supply ports A2 B2
A3 - B3 TILT cylinders RIPPER

8 8
supply ports A3 B3
A4 - B4 BLADE cylinders TILT

7 7
supply ports X1 A4 B4
BLADE
6 MP 6
A = Lowering MSL
Y1 LS
B = Lifting
5
Spool piloting
SPOOL
a1 - b1 = STEERING
a2 - b2 = RIPPER b1 a1 STEERING
a3 - b3 = TILT
a4 - b4 = BLADE
b2 a2 RIPPER
b3 a3 TILT
b4
M
a4 BLADE
Steering hydraulic motor control
T T
safety valves, setting 380 ± 5 bar
(5511.4 ± 72.5 psi)
P T
SM1607
Fig. 6-10 Hydraulic control valve and connections (Ref. D hydraulic system diagram)
2. Steering hydraulic motor control safety valve setting 380 ± 5 bar (5511.4 ± 72.5 psi) - 5. Equipment circuit main safety
valve (setting 190 bar, 2755.7 psi) and steering circuit (350 ± 5 bar, 5076.3 ± 72.5 psi) - 6. Ripper spool safety valves
(setting 230 ± 5 bar, 3335.8 ± 72.5 psi) - 7. Tilt spool safety valves (setting 230 ± 5 bar, 3335.8 ± 72.5 psi) - 8. Blade spool
safety valve (setting 230 ± 5 bar, 3335.8 ± 72.5 psi) - T. To hydraulic oil tank - P. From powering pump.
6.4.2 HYDRAULIC POWER PUMP
M Leftward rotation
H X
S A
SM1608
R
Fig. 6-11 Hydraulic pump
S. Suction from tank - M. Pressure pick-up - X. To control valve - A. Power to control valve - R. To powering block.
Power to control valve

To piloting
block
M A G X
20 to 21 bar
(230 to
LOAD 304.6 psi)
SENSING
VALVE "S"
11
PRESS
CUT-OFF
"D" 380 bar
(5511.4 psi)
CONST ANT
12
POWER
"LR"
170 kW
(228 HP)
@ 2100 RPM
13
TORQUE 33 to 37 bar
(478.6 to 536.6 psi)
STAND-BY
CONVERTER PRESS
(Qmax = 190 cc/re v;

130 Qmin = 16 cc/re v)
CC/REV
Hydraulic diagram
D350R0300
Brand ................................................................................................................................................. REXROTH

Variable displacement piston type .......................................................................................................... A11VL0
Total nominal delivery at 2000 rpm ............................................................................. 380 litri/min (5511.4 gpm)
6.4.3 BLADE CYLINDER SUPPORT FORK
D350R0024
Fig. 6-12 Blade cylinder support fork
- Diameter of inner bush seat ..................................................... 111.861 to 111.921 mm (4.404 to 4.406 in)
Outer diameter of inner bush .................................................... 111.965 to 112.000 mm (4.408 to 4.409 in)
Installation interference ............................................................ 0.044 to 0.139 mm (0.001 to 0.005 in)
- Diameter of outer bush seat ..................................................... 154.837 to 154.900 mm (6.093 to 6.098 in)
Outer diameter of inner bush .................................................... 154.960 to 155.000 mm (6.100 to 6.102 in)
Installation interference ............................................................ 0.006 to 0.163 mm (0.0002 to 0.0064 in)
- Inner diameter of inner bush ..................................................... 100.2 to 100.270 mm (3.944 to 3.497 in)
Outer of pin in correspondence with inner bush ........................ 99.965 to 100.000 mm (3.935 to 3.937 in)
Play ......................................................................................... 0.200 to 0.305 mm (0.008 to 0.012 in)
- Diameter of outer bush ............................................................. 140.210 to 140.280 mm (5.520 to 5.522 in)

Outer diameter of pin in correspondence with outer bus ........... 139.960 to 140.000 mm (5.510 to 5.511 in)
Play ......................................................................................... 0.210 to 0.320 mm (0.008 to 0.012 in)
- Inner diameter of cylinder pin (in its seat) ................................. 60.050 to 60.112 mm (2.364 to 2.366 in)
Outer diameter of cylinder joint ................................................ 59.954 to 60.000 mm (2.360 to 2.362 in)
Play ......................................................................................... 0.050 to 0.158 mm (0.002 to 0.006 in)
- Joint plate securing screws tightening torqu (1) ........................ 21 to 23 daNm (154.8 to 169.6 lb.ft.)
6.4.4 BLADE LIFTING CONTROL CYLINDER
4 5 8 7 11
13 12
10 9
1 6 2
D350R0025
Fig. 6-13 Blade lifting cylinders
- Nominal diameter of rod ....................... 70 mm (2.756 in) 1. Rod assembly

- Nominal diameter of piston ................. 120 mm (4.724 in) 2. Sleeve assembly
- Stroke of cylinder rod ......................... 1250 mm (49.2 in) 3. Rod seals
- Tightening torque of front sleeve (6) . (13.7 daNm, 101 lb.ft.)
4. Front sleeve
- Tightening torque of piston securing
5. O-Ring
nut (9) ................................... (221.4 daNm, 1632.4 lb.ft.)
- Tightening torque of dowel (1) .......(3.1 daNm, 22.8 lb.ft.) 6. Screw TCEI M12 x 45
7. Piston seals
8. Piston
9. Nut
10. Ring
11. Dowel
12. Ball joint
13. Circlip
6.4.5 BLADE TILT CONTROL CYLINDER (Bulldozer version)
3 5 4 6 7 9-10 8 2 1 15 14 13 12 17 16
11
D350R0026
Fig. 6-14 Section of blade tilt cylinder
- Nominal diameter of rod ....................... 90 mm (3.543 in) 1. Sleeve assembly

- Nominal diameter of piston ................. 180 mm (7.087 in) 2. Rod assembly
- Stroke of cylinder rod ......................... 180 mm (7.087 in) 3. Ball joint flange
- Tightening torque of front sleeve
4. Front sleeve
screws (4) ..................................... 44 daNm (324.4 lb.ft.)
5. Mud scraper seal
- Tightening torque of piston
securing nut (12) .......................... 120 daNm (884.7 lb.ft.) 6. Seal assembly
- Tightening torque of dowel (17) ....... 5.7 daNm (42 lb.ft.) 7. Retaining ring
8. Guide ring
9. O-Ring
10. Retaining ring
11. Screw TCE M20 x 2.5
12. Piston
13. Piston seal
14. Piston guide
15. Piston seal
16. Nut
17. Dowel
6.4.6 BLADE TILT CONTROL CYLINDER (Angledozer version)
1 6 54 3 8 7 9 10 2
D350R0027
Fig. 6-15 Blade tilt cylinder assembly
- Nominal diameter of cylinder rod .......... 90 mm (3.543 in) 1. Sleeve asembly

- Nominal diameter of piston ................. 160 mm (6.299 in) 2. Rod assembly
- Cylinder rod stroke ............................. 130 mm (5.118 in) 3. Piston
- Tightening torque (5) .............. 595.5 daNm (4390.6 lb.ft.)
4. Piston seal
- Tightening torque (6) .................. 35.8 daNm (263.9 lb.ft.)
5. Nut
- Piston tightening torque (10) ...... 60.3 daNm (444.6 lb.ft.)
6. Dowel
7. Front sleeve
8. O-Ring
9. Rod seal
10. Screw TCE M22 x 2.5 x 55
6.4.7 RIPPER LIFTING CYLINDER
4 5 8 7 10
9
3
6 2
1 1
D350R0028
Fig. 6-16 Ripper lifting cylinder
- Nominal diameter of rod ...................................................................... 90 mm (3.543 in)
- Nominal diameter of piston .................................................................. 180 mm (7.087 in)
- Stroke of cylinder rod .......................................................................... 533 mm (20.984 in)
- Outer diameter of rod/sleeve bush ...................................................... 89.000 to 88.976 mm (3.502 to 3.503 in)
Diameter of bush seat ......................................................................... 88.87 to 88.93 mm (3.498 to 3.501 in)
Installation interference ....................................................................... 0.130 to 0.046 mm (0.005 to 0.002 in)
- Inner diameter of rod/sleeve bush ....................................................... 76.581 to 77.012 mm (3.015 to 3.031 in)
Play .................................................................................................... 0.939 to 0.254 mm (0.036 to 0.010 in)
- Tightening torque of sleeve ........ 71.6 daNm (527.9 lb.ft.) 1. Rod assembly
- Tightening torque of rod 2. Sleeve assembly
securing nut ........................... 596.4 daNm (4397.2 lb.ft.) 3. Rod seal
- Tightening torque of dowel ............ 3.6 daNm (26.5 lb.ft.)
4. Front sleeve
5. O-Ring
6. Screw TE M20 x 2.5 x 85
7. Piston seal
8. Piston
9. Nut
10. Dowel
6.4.8 RIPPER PITCH CYLINDER
4 5 8 7 10
3 9
1 6 2
1
D350R0029
Fig. 6-17 Ripper pitch cylinder
- Nominal diameter of rod ...................................................................... 80 mm (3.149 in)
- Nominal diameter of piston .................................................................. 160 mm (6.299 in)
- Stroke of cylinder rod .......................................................................... 622 mm (24.488 in)
- Outer diameter of rod/sleeve bush ...................................................... 89.000 to 88.976 mm (3.503 to 3.502 in)
Mounting interference .......................................................................... 0.130 to 0.046 mm (0.005 to 0.002 in)
- Inner diameter of rod/sleeve bush ....................................................... 76.581 to 77.012 mm (3.015 to 3.032 in)
Outer diameter of pin .......................................................................... 76.327 to 76.073 mm (3.005 to 2.995 in)
Play .................................................................................................... 0.939 to 0.254 mm (0.037 to 0.010 in)
- Sleeve tightening torque ............. 56,9 daNm (419.5 lb.ft.) 1. Rod assembly
- Rod nut tightening torque ........... 470,8 daNm (3471.2 lb.ft.) 2. Sleeve assembly
- Dowel tightening torque ................. 3,6 daNm (26.5 lb.ft.) 3. Rod seal
4. Front sleeve
5. O-Ring
6. Screw TE M20 x 2.5 x 85
7. Piston seal
8. Piston
9. Nut
10. Dowel
6.4.9 BLADE PUSH ARMS AND RODS
F E D
A
G1
B C
D350R0030
Fig. 6-18 Bulldozer equipment linkage
A - Outer diameter of push arm front joint pin .................................... 79.954 to 80.000 mm (3.148 to 3.150 in)
Inner diameter of ball joint ............................................................ 80.200 to 80.274 mm (3.157 to 3.160 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.200 to 0.320 mm (2.008 to 0.012 in)
B - Outer diameter of rear rod and tilt cylinder pin .............................. 79.954 to 80.000 mm (3.148 to 3.150 in)
Inner diameter of pin bush ............................................................ 80.220 to 80.290 mm (3.158 to 3.161 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.220 to 0.336 mm (0.008 to 0.013 in)
C - Diameter of bush on rod and tilt cylinder ...................................... 91.895 to 91.949 mm (3.618 to 3.620 in)
Outer diameter of bush ................................................................ 91.965 to 92.000 mm (3.620 to 3.622 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.016 to 0.105 mm (0.0006 to 0.004 in)
D - Outer diameter of diagonal main rod and blade main pin .............. 79.954 to 80.000 mm (3.148 to 3.150 in)
Inner diameter of bushes ............................................................. 80.220 to 80.290 mm (3.158 to 3.161 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.220 to 0.336 mm (0.008 to 0.013 in)
E - Inner diameter of cross link and blade main pin bush seat ........... 91.875 to 91.929 mm (3.617 to 3.619 in)
Outer diameter of bushes ............................................................. 91.965 to 92.000 mm (3.620 to 3.622 in)
Installation interference ................................................................ 0.036 to 0.125 mm (0.0014 to 0.0049 in)
F - Outer diameter of front diagonal pin ............................................. 69.954 to 70.000 mm (2.754 to 2.755 in)
Inner diameter of ball joint ............................................................ 70.200 to 70.274 mm (2.763 to 2.766 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.200 to 0.320 mm (2.008 to 0.012 in)
G - Outer diameter of push arm joint pin ............................................ 137.7 to 137.9 mm (5.421 to 5.429 in)
Inner diameter of push arm rear pin bush (in its seat) ................... 138.12 to 138.493 mm (5.437 to 5.452 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.212 to 0.793 mm (0.008 to 0.031 in)
6.4.10 C-FRAME AND RODS
A C-D-E G H-F
D350R0032
Fig. 6-19 Angledozer equipment pivots
A - Outer diameter of C-frame pivot joint ............................................ 137.7 to 137.9 mm (5.421 to 5.429 in)
Inner diameter of C-frame rear pin bush (seated) .......................... 138.112 to 138.493 mm (5.437 to 5.452 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.212 to 0.793 mm (0.0008 to 0.031 in)
B - Inner diameter of blade ball joint seat ........................................... 170.000 to 171.000 mm (6.692 to 6.732 in)
Outer diameter of blade ball joint pin ............................................ 169.750 to 170.000 mm (6.683 to 6.693 in)
C - Diameter of small seat of flange for rod pin .................................. 69.740 to 69.900 mm (2.746 to 2.752 in)
Outer diameter of small pin .......................................................... 69.088 to 68.986 mm (2.720 to 2.716 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.652 to 0.914 mm (0.025 to 0.036 in)
D - Diameter of large seat of flange for rod pin ................................... 95.140 to 95.300 mm (3.745 to 3.752 in)
Outer diameter of small pin .......................................................... 94.386 to 94.488 mm (3.716 to 3.720 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.652 to 0.914 mm (0.025 to 0.036 in)
E - Outer diameter of ball pin ............................................................. 50.546 to 51.054 mm (1.990 to 2.010 in)
Inner diameter of rod pin .............................................................. 50.800 to 51.181 mm (2.000 to 2.015 in)
F - Inner diameter of pin seat ............................................................ 50.292 to 50.546 mm (1.980 to 1.990 in)
Outer diameter of pin ................................................................... 49.900 to 50.000 mm (1.964 to 1.968 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.292 to 0.646 mm (0.011 to 0.025 in)
G - Diameter of upper rod pin in lower rod .......................................... 51.130 to 51.358 mm (2.012 to 2.022 in)
Outer diameter of upper rod ......................................................... 50.749 to 50.876 mm (1.998 to 2.002 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.254 to 0.609 mm (0.010 to 0.024 in)
H - Inner diameter of pin seat ............................................................ 63.246 to 63.500 mm (2.490 to 2.500 in)
Outer diameter of pin ................................................................... 62.738 to 62.865 mm (2.470 to 2.475 in)
Play ............................................................................................. 0.381 to 0.762 mm (0.015 to 0.030 in)
6.4.11 SINGLE SHANK RIPPER

Model ....................................................... PVD-350
Type ......................................................... Parallelogram, actuated by four double stroke cylinders, equipped
with a semi-curved shank with interchangeable tip, three positions
- Maximum work depth ...................................................................................................... 1172 mm (46.142 in)

- Maximum work width ...................................................................................................... 1250 mm (49.215 in)
- Maximum ground clearance of teeth ............................................................................... 1020 mm (40.157 in)
- Nominal diameter of lift cylinder piston ................................................................................ 180 mm (7.086 in)
- Nominal diameter of lift cylinder rod ...................................................................................... 90 mm (3.543 in)
- Maximum stroke of lift cylinder rod ................................................................................... 533 mm (20.984 in)
- Nominal diameter of pitch cylinder piston ............................................................................ 160 mm (6.299 in)
- Nominal diameter of pitch cylinder rod .................................................................................. 80 mm (3.149 in)
- Maximum stroke of pitch cylinder rod................................................................................ 622 mm (24.488 in)
- Ramp angle ................................................................................................................................................ 24°
- Ground clearance under shank bar with ripper lowered ................................................................... 0 mm (0 in)
- Ground clearance under shank bar with ripper lifted:
pitch cylinders extended pitch cylinders retracted

- position 1 ............................................................... 124 mm (4.881 in) ............................. 584 mm (22.992 in)
- position 2 ..............................................................381 mm (15.000 in) ............................. 737 mm (29.015 in)
- position 3 ..............................................................630 mm (24.803 in) ........................... 1020 mm (40.157 in)
2500 (98.425)
2212 (87.086)
4
38 CH
PIT
2600 (102.362)
2190 (86.220)
MIDSIDE POSITION
1064 (41.889)
1172 (46.142)
90 (3.543)
1250 (49.215)
D350R0033
6.4.12 TIGHTENING TORQUE
TIGHTENING
ITEMS TO BE TIGHTENED THREAD TORQUE
daNm
Attachment hydraulic pump

Screws securing covers to pump bodies ......................................... M20 x 1.5 60
Angledozer attachment
Nuts for rear struts pivot flange securing
screws ............................................................................................ M20 x 1.5 60
Bulldozer attachment
Screws securing the pivot pin retaining plates for cross rods
and control cylinder rods ................................................................. M16 x 2 23
Blade lifting cylinders

Front sleeve .................................................................................... M12 x 1.75 13.7
Piston locking nut ........................................................................... M42 x 3 221.4
Quick drop valves

Screws securing front and rear covers ............................................ M16 x 1.5 30
Tilt control cylinder (Angledozer with hydraulic tilt)

Front sleeve securing screws .......................................................... M22 x 2.5 60.3
Piston locking nut ........................................................................... M52 x 3 595.5
Tilt control cylinder (Bulldozer)

Front sleeve securing screws .......................................................... M20 x 2.5 44
Piston locking nut ........................................................................... M40 x 2 600
Ripper PVD350
Screws securing the ripper to transmission housing ........................ 1.250-12 x 4" 193 ÷ 213.5
....................................................................................................... 1.500-12 x 4" 346 ÷ 373
Lift control cylinders

Sleeve rod side ............................................................................... M20 x 2.5 71.5
Piston locking nut (o) ....................................................................... M52 x 3 595.5
(o) Lubricate with engine oil
SECTION 7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY RULES ................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.1 PROTECTION TREE WIRING DIAGRAM ........................................................................... 7-4

7.1.1 Fuses ............................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.2 Link fuses and cold starting ............................................................................................. 7-6
7.1.3 Main switch ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.4 Engine starter switch ....................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.5 Back-up alarm .................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.1.6 Starter motor .................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2 INSTRUMENT PANEL/MONITOR - OPERATION ............................................................... 7-9

7.2.1 Wiring diagram of instrument panel/monitor .................................................................... 7-11
7.3 MONITOR SENDERS ...................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4 DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................... 7-17

7.4.1 Diagnoses on display ..................................................................................................... 7-17
7.5 BUZZER .......................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.6 RELAY GROUP - DIODE BOXES - DIVERTER BOX, POWER RELAY ........................... 7-21
7.7 MAIN CONNECTORS ...................................................................................................... 7-24

7-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM D350
Carefully read personal and machine SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (at the beginning of this manual)
D350 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 7-3
SAFETY RULES
WARNING
When working on the electrical system, always wear
safety glasses and remove rings, wrist watches and
any metal jewellery.
DISCONNECT
WARNING
Prior to inspection or repair interventions on electrical
components, DISCONNECT GROUND CABLE (A) A C
from the battery negative terminal (B). DISCONNECT B
CABLE (D) FROM POSITIVE TERMINAL (D).
D
BATTERY 12V x 2
TO GROUND
WARNING
NEVER REST METAL OBJECTS on the battery to
prevent dangerous short-circuits.
WARNING
SM9500
FUMES FROM THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE ARE FLAMMABLE.
Never generate sparks nor bring free flames near the batteries. The emission of fumes is stronger when recharging.
WARNING
BATTERY FUMES ARE DANGEROUS if in contact with the skin or materials.
WARNING
Beware when maintaining the battery.
SM9538
CORRECT
Use a flashlight to inspect the level of the battery electrolyte.
Always perform the inspection with engine inoperative.
Do not charge the battery or start the engine with jumper
SM9539
cables if the battery is frozen-up. warm-up the battery to 15
°C (60 °F) otherwise it could explode.
SBAGLIATO
7-4
WIRING DIAGRAM - PROTECTION TREE
FUSE 50A
STARTER MOTOR
LINK
FUSE 80A
LINK ALTERNATOR
START
ON
F7A - 7,5A MICROCONTROLLER
ACC (PIN 1,2,33,46)
KEY SWITCH OFF F8A - 5A
H MACHINE SERVICES POWER MICROCONTROLLER
ST M ACC Q2 Q1 B (PIN 12,13,14,24,39,40,41,43,52)
F10A - 7,5A
FRONT WORK LIGHTS
FC - 5A
ENGINE CONTROLLER F11A - 7,5A
REAR WORK LIGHTS
F3A - 5A
STARTER RELAY COIL F1B - 7,5A
FRONT LIGHTS
F2A - 5A
OPERATOR PROXIMITY SWITCH SWITCH SYMBOL LIGHTS
F4D - 4A
F5A - 5A SENTINEL SYSTEM
STEERING SAFETY
SOLENOID VALVE F2B - 20A
HEATER ELECTRIC FAN
PILOT VALVE POWER CUT-OFF
CAB SERVICES POWER
BRAKE QUICK DISCHARGE CONDITIONER RELAY SOLENOID
SOLENOID VALVE F3B - 7,5A
F11B - 5A
ENGINE CONTROLLER RIGHT DOOR WIPER
SAFETY SWITCH STARTER MOTOR CONTROL F4B - 7,5A
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ENGINE CUT-OFF INDICATOR LEFT DOOR WIPER

FC - 10A
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS DOOR WASHER
ENGINE WARNING INDICATOR
F5B - 7,5A
ENGINE MAINTENANCE FB - 10A REAR WIPERS
INDICATOR ENGINE CONTROLLER
F6B - 7,5A
STARTING WAITING INDICATOR F10A - A FRONT & REAR WASHER PUMP
F4A - 5A ENGINE CONTROLLER
BUZZER
MULTIPLE INSTRUMENT F6A - 7,5A FRONT WIPERS
HORN F8B - 5A
RESISTOR HEATED SEAT
F9A - 7,5A F9B - 5A
RIPPER SOLENOID VALVE
CAB CEILING LIGHTS SEAT COMPRESSOR
FLOAT RELAY AND SOLENOID VALVE
F10B - 7,5A
OPTIONAL CIGARETTE LIGHTER
F1A - 5A VOLTAGE REDUCTION

SERVICES RELAY COIL
RADIO - OPTIONAL
F7B - 20A
D350
CAB SERVICES RELAY COIL CONDENSER FAN
COMPRESSOR SOLENOID
D350M0066
7.1.1 FUSES
They protect the electrical system from damages
caused by overloaded circuits. Replace the fuse when A
burnt-out. In the event a fuse of a determined circuit
burns frequently, check the circuit and repair it, as
required.
Remove the pressure fitted covers on fuse boxes (A)
and (B) in the cab.
B
SM9501
WARNING
on CAB on ROPS
Always replace fuses with parts of the same type
and capacity. Otherwise the electrical system could
be damaged.
WARNING
In the event it is necessary to replace frequently
fuses, an electrical problem could exist.
Contact a FIAT KOBELCO Dealer.
The fuses protect:
FUSE HOLDER A Box A

(upper mounted)
1 = Machine/cab services coil - 5 Amp

2 = Electric cut-off (holding)
Operator safety lever - 5 Amp
3 = Safe starting - 5 Amp
4 = Horn - Monitor - Optional - 5 Amp
5 = Operator safety relay - 5 Amp
6 = Horn - 7,5 Amp Box B
7 = Micro Controller - 7,5 Amp
8 = Gearshifting buttons - 5 Amp
9 = Cab ceiling lights - Cigarette lighter
Voltage converter - 7,5 Amp
10 = Front work lights - 7,5 Amp
11 = Rear work lights - 7,5 Amp
SM9502
FUSE HOLDER B
WARNING
1 = Front lights - Symbol lighting - 7,5 Amp Always disconnect the ground cable of the bat-
2 = Heater electric fan - 20 Amp tery prior to cleaning, repairing, connecting or dis-
3 = Right door wiper - 7,5 Amp connecting any wire of the electrical system, to
4 = Left door wiper - Door washer pump - 7,5 Amp prevent personal injuries.
5 = Rear wipers - 7,5 Amp Always keep all lights equipping the machine effi-
6 = Front wipers - Front & rear washer cient. Replace burnt-out bulbs at onc.
pump - 7,5 Amp
7 = Condenser fan - 20 Amp
8 = Pre-heating relay - Pre-heating indicator
light - 5 Amp
9 = Socket and epron - 5 Amp
10 = Optional - 7,5 Amp
11 = Not used - 5 Amp
7.1.2 LINK" FUSES AND COLD START-

ING FUSE
"LINK" fuses are seen when opening the left side en-
gine hood, located on the inner side of the frame beam.
Fuse 1 protects the machine services - 50 Amp.
Fuse 2 protects the alternator - 80 Amp.
2
1
D350M0065
1-2. LINK fuses
MACHINE SERVICES "LINK" FUSE (50 AMP)
WIRES
777 AL + batteries
772 To diverter box
777 772
ALTERNATOR "LINK" FUSE (80 AMP)
WIRES
774 AL + batteries 774 773
773 To alternator
SM9504
7.1.3 MAIN SWITCH

LOCATION - Inside the left panel, under the cab.
ON
OFF
DO PER
O
NO AT
T E
D350R0021
Battery To ground
SM9508
7.1.4 ENGINE STARTING SWITCH

LOCATION - Right console in the cab.
OFF R A-G G-R

H AC
C
ON
START
H-R M-V
SM9505
B G1 G2 ACC M ST
WIRES H
Red position “B” OFF
Yellow/Red position “G1” ACC
Brown/Green position “ACC”
Grey/Red position “M” ON
Light blue/Yell position “ST” START SM9506
7.1.5 BACK-UP ALARM
WIRES
163 To electronic controller
000 To ground
LOCATION - Right rear side of machine, under fuel
tank.
D350R0039
7.1.6 STARTER MOTOR To engine starting

To batteries
Brand: DELCO - REMY power relay 90 Amp
Type: 400 24 Volt
SM9510
7.2 INSTRUMENT PANEL / MONITOR
The monitor is visible in the cab in front of the opera-

tor's seat and is made of a panel on which no repairs ON
are possible, formed by a circuit board and LEDs.
OFF
- Turn the main switch of the electrical system ON.
DO PER
O
NO AT
T E
- Turn the engine starter switch in the cab onto the
first position.
D350R0038
Operation the relevant LED indicators, identified by the appro-

priate "ISO standard" symbols, and, for part of them,
When activated, the instrument performs a short test
a sound alarm during 3 seconds is associated; in case
for 1 second switching all LEDS, segments of the
the malfunction persists, the alarm warns the opera-
display and buzzer ON; then the display (ref. S) indi-
tor with one minute cycles, lasting one second.
cates the engine hours.
The engine work hours are recorded only when the
The indicator lights and instruments indicate the state
engine speed exceeds 500 rpm.
of the machine. Once the engine is started, pointer
The instrument receives data from an outer control
(R) shows the engine r.p.m., with 100 rpm increments.
unit, through serial line RX for the indication of the
To return visualising the engine hours, it is necessary
speed selected and eventual error codes.
to switch off and re-power the system using the key;
These codes are indicated on the 5-digit numerical
the hours stay ON until the engine is cut-off.
display (S).
In the event of any malfunction, this is signalled by
L M D F G H 2 6MA SCREWS SECURING THE SUPPORT
A B C E N O P
FH
15
10
20 REAR VIEW CONNECTOR SIDE
70 90
50
40
12
PIN 1 PIN 2
0
25
5 PPM
X 100
CONNECTEUR CONNECTEUR
8 VOIES 12 VOIES
Q R S T
SM9511 SM9512
7 - 10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM D350
REF. DESCRIPTION ALARM Signal CON. 12 CON. 8
A Red LED, engine air cleaner NO IN (-) 2

B Red LED, hydraulic oil filter NO IN (-) 1
C Red LED, transmission oil pressure YES IN (-) 8
D Red LED, Engine oil pressure YES IN (-) 2
E Red LED, general alarm YES activated by ind. C, D, L, M, N, O, P
F Green LED, front work lights NO IN (+24V) 3
G Green LED, rear work lights NO IN (+24V) 7
H Green LED, head lights + instr. light. NO IN (+24V) 12
L Red LED, engine coolant temperature YES IN (-) 10
M Red LED, transmission oil temperature YES IN (-) 9
N Red LED, battery YES IN (-) 4
O Red LED, brakes failure YES IN (-) 4
P Red LED, fuel reserve NO IN (-) 11
Q Engine coolant temperature indicator at 10 lcd YES IN (var. -) 1
R Engine rpm analogical display at 24 lcd – IN (+24V) 6
S 5 digit display for No. speeds and
"engine hours" NO IN (-) (NPN-NO) 3 (RX)
T Fuel level indicator at 10 lcd YES IN (var. -) 5
BUZZER OUTPUT – OUT (-) 8
POWER INLET "positive" – IN (+24V) 6
GROUND INPUT (GND) – IN (-) 7
Then connectors are male, one 8-way and one 12-way.
The corresponding connectors for the harness are of a female type, 12-way and 8-way, both with female contacts.
D350 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 7 - 11
7.2.1 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM OF INSTRUMENT PANEL/MONITOR
+ -
924 8 / 12
5/8
557 557
23 / W
555 555 000
924
BUZZER 11 / 12
23 / W
P / N 76028370
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
WHIT RESERVE INDIC.
949 924 924 105 P / N 76070631
8/8
FUSE 5A (BOX 4a)
P / N 11054690
924
552 552 000
949
1/8
23 / F
DIODE ENGINE COOL

VF5406 TEMP. SENSOR 107°C
FUSE 7.5A (BOX 10b) 600V P / N 7603258
P / N 11054890 3A
558 558
837
000
10 / 12
23 / D
ENGINE COOL
RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE S.W 114°C
MONITOR P / N 76076946
21 / A
82 0 P / N 76045846
9W
663 663 000
2 / 12
(OPTIONAL) M
23 / B
637
AIR CLEANER
RESTRICTION S.W
P / N 79102142
637 637 637 4 / 12
19 / 5
580 580 000

1 / 12
12 / 12 23 / U
HYDRAULIC OIL
RESTRICTION SW.
P/ N 79094756
000
559 559
229 3 / 12
9 / 12
23 / K
TRASMISS. OIL
HIGT TEMPERATURE SW. 119°C
P / N 76032582
225 7/8
2/8
503 503 000
DATA TRANSMISSION 23 / D
N - sc 3/8
ENGINE OIL
LOW PRESS. SW. 0.5 bar
P / N 76040394
ENGINE SPEED INDICATOR G - sc 581 581
6/8 8 / 12
000
23 / H
TRANSMISSION OIL
LOW PRESS. SW. 1 bar
N-t P / N 79102096
7 / 12
611 611 611 000

4/8
23 / O
CLUTCH - BREAK OIL
LOW PRESSURE SW. 11.5 bar
P / N 79102095
D350R0044
PIN. 1 PIN. 2
8-12 way rear

connectors
CONN. CONN.
8 WAY 12 WAY D350R0048
7.3 MONITOR SENDERS
Location on engine
1. Air cleaner clogging sensor. 1

2. Engine coolant max. temperature switch.
3. Engine rpm sensor. 2
4. Engine oil low pressure sensor. 4
5. Alternator.
Location on the oil - fuel tank

5
6. Fuel level sensor. 3 D350R0047
7. Hydraulic oil filter clogging sensor.
8. Brakes - clutches low oil pressure sensor
(set at 11.5 bar, 166.8 psi). 6
9. Transmission oil low pressure sensor
(set at 1 bar, 14.5 psi). Hydraulic oil
10. Transmission oil temperature sensor reservoir
(119 °C, 247 °F).
Fuel
reservoir
D350R0046
Torque converter
10
SM9516
1. AIR CLEANER CLOGGING SENSOR

663 000
WIRES
663 To monitor
000 To ground
Setting: (closing of contact) 62 mbar ± 8°C (0.89 psi
± 46.4 °F).
LOCATION - Left front side of machine, over the air

cleaner.
Installation notes SM9517
The depression switch must be tightened manually,

without using tools.
2. ENGINE COOLANT
MAX. TEMPERATURE SWITCH 552 528
WIRES
528 To monitor
552 To monitor
Thread: M16 x 1.5

Setting: 100° ± 3°C (212 ± 37.4 °F)
Wrench: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Torque wrench: 2.5 daNm (18.4 lb.ft.)
LOCATION - Right front side of machine, on engine. D350R0040
3. ENGINE RPM Monitor Electronic

controller
Thread: 3/4 - 16 UNF
Torque wrench: 1.9 to 2.5 daNm
(14 to 18.4 lb.ft.)
LOCATION - On engine flywheel housing.
SM9519
4. ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE SENSOR

503
WIRES 000
503 To monitor
000 To ground
Thread: M10 x 1 taper

Setting: 0.7 bar (10.1 psi)
The sensor is normally closed, it opens when the pres-

sure drops or reaches the setting value.
SM9520
5. ALTERNATOR
To Link fuse 80 Amp
BRAND: DELCO - REMY 70A Batteries
Power voltage: 24V
LOCATION - On engine. 503
000
Grounding
wire SM9521
6. FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
WIRES
555 To monitor
557 To monitor 557
000 To ground 555
000
LOCATION - Rear side of machine over the fuel
reservoir.
SM9522
7. HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER CLOGGING SENSOR

000 580
WIRES
580 To monitor
000 To ground
Thread: M18 x 1.5

Setting: 2 to 2.2 bar (29 to 31.9 psi)
LOCATION - On hydraulic oil reservoir.
SM9523
8. BRAKES AND STEERING CLUTCHES

611
OIL LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
000
WIRES
611 To monitor
000 To ground

Setting: 12.5 to 11 bar
(181.29 to 159.5 psi)
The sensor is normally closed, it opens when the pres-

sure drops or reaches the setting value. SM9524
9. TRANSMISSION OIL LOW PRESSURE

581
SENSOR
000
WIRES
581 To monitor
000 To ground

Setting: 12.5 to 11 bar
(181.29 to 159.5 psi)
The sensor is normally closed, it opens when the

pressure drops or reaches the setting value. SM9525
10. TRANSMISSION OIL LOW PRESSURE

SENSOR
559
WIRES
559 To monitor
000 To ground
Thread: M16 x 1.5

Setting: 119° ± 3°C (246.2 ± 37.4 °F)
SM9526
7.4 DISPLAY
The display indicates three functions:

A) - Digital hourmeter, indicating the total hours work
and is automatically actuated when the engine
operates.
B) - Speed engaged
C) - Troubleshooting the transmission operation
DISPLAY D350R0050
7.4.1 DIAGNOSIS ON DISPLAY 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th digit
The display has 5 digit fields providing the following

messages.
D350R0049
A - Work hour indication

Or
B - Speed engaged indication + failure code
Segnalazione contaore lavoro

The engine hours are indicated when the instrument
panel is switched ON, for about one second, when
the instrument undergoes a general test. To return to
display the engine hours, it is necessary to discon-
nect and re-power with the starter key.
The hours stay on until the engine is cut-off.
Speed engaged signal + failure code

The first digit indicates the speed engaged (ex. 1st
speed).
The second indicates (in case of failure) letter E.
↑st ↑ nd
1 2 (digit) SM9528
The 3rd, 4th and 5th digits identify the failure code (ex.
failure code No. 024).
When the components failed is one only, the codes
listed in TABLE 1 appear.
For each failure code, identify the corresponding com-
ponent listed.
↑ ↑ ↑
3rd 4th 5th (digit) SM9528
TABLE 1
Failed component Failure code
Left proportional solenoid valve coil 001
Right proportional solenoid valve coil 002
Forward "F" speed solenoid 004
Rear "R" speed solenoid 008
1st speed solenoid 016
3rd speed solenoid 032
Left steering lever solenoid 064
TABLE 2
LH RH For. Rev. 1st 3rd LH RH
prop. prop. "F" "R" speed speed steer. steer.
Failed component
sol. sol. speed speed solen. solen. lever lever
valve valve solen. solen. solen. solen.
coil coil
Left prop. solenoid valve coil 001 003 005 009 017 033 065 129
Right prop. solenoid valve coil 002 006 010 018 034 066 130
Forward "F" speed solenoid 004 012 020 036 068 132
Reverse "R" speed solenoid 008 024 040 072 136
rd
3 speed solenoid 032 096 160
Example of identification of a trouble co As an example, code 024 indicates that two parts are
in trouble. On the top, the column identifies, in corre-
When the failed components are two, the display
spondence with the "1 st speed " solenoid (first failed
shows a trouble code listed in TABLE 2, (given by the
component).
addition of two single codes listed in TABLE 1).
TABLE 2
LH prop. sol. RH prop. sol. For. "F" Rever. "R" 1st speed 3rd speed LH steer LH steer
Failed component valve coil valve coil speed solen. speed solen. solen. solen. lever solen. lever solen.
Left prop. solenoid valve coil 001 003 005 009 017 033 065 129
Right prop. solenoid valve coil 002 006 010 018 034 066 130
Forward "F" speed solenoid 004 012 020 036 068 132
Reverse "R" speed solenoid" 008 024 040 072 136
3rd speed solenoid 032 096 160
Reverse "R" speed solenoid trouble code
Trouble code on display
1st speed solenoid trouble code
Whereas on the left reverse solenoid "R" is identified,

the crossing in TABLE 2 of these two components
determines failure code 024 given by the addition of
the two.
Reverse "R" speed solenoid trouble code = 008 +

1st speed solenoid trouble code = 016
Trouble code for both = 024
7.5 BUZZER
SM9529
LOCATION - Inside the cab, behind the instrument

panel.
7.6 RELAY GROUP - DIODE BOXES - DIVERTER BOX, POWER RELAY
The group is visible when opening the rear left panel of the machine, near the power batteries.
5 9 8 5 7 6 5 4
10
1 2
11
D350R0041
1. Engine cable complete with fuse - 2. Cable complete with sentinel system - 3. cable complete with relay - 4. Box ass.ly
- 5. Screw TE M6 x 12 with washer TR diam. 6 - 6. Bracket - 7. Nut EM 6 x 1 with washer TR diam. - 8. Diverter box C/Coper
- 9. Starter relay - 10. Washer w/ nut - 11. Battery 12V x 2.
CAB
SERVICES
F 801
RELAY D 163 H 907
891 A 50A
DIODE
MACHINE SERVICES
RELAY RELAY
50A 10/20A STARTER SAFETY
PROX. SENSORS 542 G 924
E
543 B DIODE DIODE 611 RELAY RELAY
10/20A 10/20A LOWERING
OPERATOR SAFETY IN FLOAT
E.V. TEMPOR
L
RELAY RELAY 930
10/20A 10/20A
SENTINEL SYSTEM
LOWERING
Engine centr.
IN FLOAT
fuses 10 Amp 037
Fuses
818/623
4 Amp
D350R0042
1. DIODE BOXES (Ref. B - D - L)

- For the wires and the connections of the components, please refer to the principle electrical diagram.
87a 87b 87c

30 87c
30
87a 87b 87c 87d
SM9532
2. RELAY 24 VOLT - 50 Amp (Ref. A - F - I - E)
85 30
86 87 87a
SM9533
3. RELAY 24 VOLT - 10/20 Amp (Ref. C - M - G - H)
87
24V-10/20A
1880 86 85
85 87 87a
87a
30
86 30
85 87 87a
Electrical diagram
86 30
Nominal current SM9534
4. DIVERTER BOX
OUTPUT INPUT
SM9535
5. POWER RELAY (ENGINE STARTING)
B G
g
e
WIRING DIAGRAM
14
G TERMINAL 2 B TERMINAL
D350R0045
7.7 MAIN CONNECTORS
24-21 24-23 24-19 24-31

H X
X J W K 19 31 20
8 9 30 8 21
W K V J L 19 9
G B 18 7
H B 2 10 29
18 2 10
22
V L U M 7 3
F A C G 17 6 17 1 11
A C 1 3 11 6 4
U M T N 28 23
16 16 5 12
E D F D 5 4 12 15 13
T N S E 27 24
O 14
14
15 26 25
S P R P 13
R Q
A B C D
D350R0043
A. A. MACHINE CABLE 24-21 WAYS
WIRE
CONTACT SECTION LAYOUT WIRE WIRE WIRE
NUMBER (CAB) NUMBER COLOUR SECTION
A 1 EMPTY - - -
B 2.5 ELECTRIC FAN III SPEED 706 B 2.5
C 1 CONDITIONER THERMOSTAT 824 M 1
D 2.5 ELECTRIC FAN II SPEED 709 M 2.5
E 2.5 GROUND FOR CAB 000 N 2.5
F 1 EMPTY - - -
G 2.5 ELECTRIC FAN I SPEED 745 L 2.5
H 1 EMPTY - - -
J 1 EMPTY - - -
K 1 ELECTRIC PUMP DOOR WASHER 885 G-V 1
L 1 ELECTRIC PUMP FRONT/REAR 886 C-B 1
M 1 DA RH PROX. SWITCH W/ DISCOUPLING DIODE 156 B 1
N 1 F/R TRANSMISSION SOLENOID VALVE 009 V-N 1
P 1.5 F INPUT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID VALVE 549 A-G 1
R 1 R INPUT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID VALVE 548 A-N 1
S 1 DA RH PROX. SWITCH W/ DISCOUPLING DIODE 157 G-N 1
T 1 1ST/3RD TRANSM. SOLENOID VALVE 008 C-B 1
U 1 1ST/3RD INPUT 1 ST SOLENOID VALVE 546 B-R 1
V 1 1ST/3RD INPUT 3RD ST SOLENOID VALVE 547 V-B 1
W 1 EMPTY - - -
X 1 EMPTY - - -
B. MACHINE CABLE 24 - 23 WAYS
WIRE
A 1 FROM BRAKE PEDAL S.V. TO CONTROLLER 166 C-L 1
B 1 AIR CLEANER CLOGGING 663 B-N 1
C 1 FROM ACCEL. TO BRAKE PEDAL VALVE PRESS. SWICTH (+) 143 M-N 1
D 1 COOLANT HIGH TEMPERATURE INDIC. LIGHT 528 V-B 1
E 1 EMPTY - -
F 1 COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR (TEMP. GAUGE) 552 V 1
G 1 LOWERING IN FLOAT RELAY 931 N-I -
H 1 TRANSM. OIL LOW PRESSURE IND. LIGHT 581 C-N 1
J 1.5 EMPTY - -
K 1 TRANSM. OIL HIGH TEMP. INDICATOR LIGHT 559 S-N 1
L 1.5 HORN + (1ST WIRE) 119 L-N 1
M 1.5 HORN GROUND (2ND WIRE) 000 N 1
N 1 LOWERING IN FLOAT S.V. 598 A -
O 1 ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE IND.LIGHT 503 H 1
P 1 EMPTY - -
Q 1 BRAKE OIL LOW PRESSURE IND. LIGHT 611 H-N 1
R - EMPTY - -
S 1 BACK-UP ALARM 163 A-B 1
T 1 EMPTY - -
U 1 EQUIPMENT OIL FILTER CLOGGING IND. LIGHT 580 M-B 1
V 1 FUEL RESERVE INDICATOR LIGHT 555 Z-N 1
W 1 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 557 Z -
X 1 EMPTY - - -
C. A. EXTENSION CABLE RELAY BOX - CAB 24 - 19 WAYS
WIRE
1 1 FROM FUSE 11 SWITCH "ACC" 801 H-L 1
2 1 OPERATOR SAFETY RELAY 904 S-G 1
3 1 FROM FUSE 17 SWITCH "ST" 907 L-B 1
4 1 TO FUSE 24 FOR S.V. 542 A-V 1
5 1 FROM ALTERNATOR "I" 637 S 1
6 1 FROM DISCOUPLING DIODES PROX. OPER. SAF. 164 L-N 1
7 1 STEERING S. V. ST. CONTR. VALVE + 27 563 L-R 1
8 2.5 AIR CONDITIONER RELAY 809 G-N 2.5
9 1 STEERING CONTR. VALVE RH OUT S.V. 27 519 L-G 1
10 2.5 KEY SWITCH POWER 724 R 2.5
11 1 STEERING CONTR. VALVE LH OUT S.V. + 28 565 A-V 1
12 2.5 SERVICES UNDER "ACC" 864 H-R 2.5
13 1 STEERING CONTR. VALVE LH OUT S.V. 28 517 L-B 1
14 2.5 30 AIR CONDITIONER RELAY 803 A 2.5
15 1 STEERING CONT. VALVE SAF. S.V. 543 Z-B 1
16 2.5 CAB SERVICES FROM RELAY 73 887 R-N 2.5
17 1 6W/BLADE 997 A-G 1.5
18 2.5 POWER TO SERVICES NOT UNDER KEY 772 R 2.5
19 1 COLD STARTING (NOT USED ON D350) 860 (ext. origin)
D. 24-31WAY ENGINE CONTROLLER WIRING
WIRE
1 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. PEDAL OUTPUT 47 47 0.5
2 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - DEC. PED. CONTACT OFF 3 3 0.5
3 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - DEC. PED. CONTACT ON 13 13 0.5
4 1 ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. GR. (DEC. PANEL) 9 9 1
5 1 ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. GR. (DEC. PANEL) 10 10 1
6 1 ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. POWER (FUSE A) R7 R7 1
9 - EMPTY
10 1 ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. POWER (FUSE B) R28 R28 1
11 1 ENG. CONTROLLER - KEY (FUSE C) 38 38 1
12 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - DIAGN. BUTTON 44 44 0.5
13 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - ENGINE STOP IND. LIGHT 6 6 0.5
14 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - ENGINE ALARM LIGHT 16 16 0.5
15 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - MAINTENANCE LIGHT 5 5 0.5
16 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - STARTER LIGHT 4 4 0.5
17 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - DAIGN. INCR. SWITCH 14 14 0.5
18 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - DIAGN. DECR. SWITCH 24 24 0.5
19 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - HOURMETER SIGNAL 11 11 0.5
20 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEV. ENG. BUTTON 43 43 0.5
21 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEV. ENG. BUTTON 20 20 0.5
22 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEVER (SIGN. POS.) 21 21 0.5
23 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEVER (RET. POS.) 48 48 0.5
24 0.5 ENG. CONTROLLER - POWER + 5 V 49 49 0.5
25 1 ENG. CONTROLLER - POWER + 24 V 781 ? 1
26 - EMPTY - -
27 - EMPTY - -
28 - EMPTY - -
29 - EMPTY - -
30 - EMPTY - -
31 - EMPTY - -
COLOUR CODE
A LIGHT BLUE
B WHITE
C ORANGE
G YELLOW
H GREY
L BLUE
M BROWN
N BLACK
R RED
S PINK
V GREEN
Z PURPLE
COPYRIGHT BY CNH Italia S.p.A.

Product Support
Viale delle Nazioni, 55 - 41100 Modena - Italy
Reproduction of text or illustration,

in whole or in part, is strictly prohibited.
Print No. 604.13.532.00 - English - II - 2005

Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy)
Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino

New Holland D350 EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Holland D350 EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Copyright © New Holland

THIS ALERT SYMBOL SIGNALS IMPORTANT MESSAGES INVOLVING YOUR SAFETY.

Most accidents, whether they occur in industry, on the

FINAL DRIVES SECT. 3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECT. 7

SAFETY RULES ................................................................................................................. III-X

TABLE OF TECHNICAL DATA ...................................................................................................

CONTROL DATA ON THE MACHINE ................................................................................... 0-19

LIST OF WEIGHTS FOR MAIN SERVICE COMPONENTS ................................................ 0-20

STABILITY .......................................................................................................................... 0-21

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................ 0-22

TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................................................... 0-26

UNITS OF MEASURE......................................................................................................... 0-27

TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES ................................................................................... 0-29

SAFETY RULES - Check brakes, steering and attachment controls before

- Be careful of slippery conditions on stepping points,

- Do not leave the machine until it is completely stopped. OPERATION

- Roll Over Protective Structures are required on loaders,

- When the machine is stopped for whatever reason,

- Steel cables are frayed after prolonged use; always

- Before any intervention, make sure that the main switch

- BATTERY GAS IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. Leave battery

- Loosen the radiator cap very slowly, to release pressure

TOOLS - Never perform adjustments with engine running, except

SAFETY RULES FOR SEALS

VITON SEALS (FLUOROELASTOMER)

TEST FOR THE DISCRIMINATION OF RUBBER (BUNA N) MATERIALS

NITRILIC/BUNA N RUBBER "VITON"

D350 GENERALITIES 0-1

TABLE OF TECHNICAL DATA

D350 GENERALITIES 0-3

A. Engine data plate

1. Serial number of the engine

B. Machine identification plate

The identification plate contains the main data of the

C. Marking and serial number of frame

The MARKING of the machine is seen on the left

ITEM Q.TY Fluids and lubricants VISCOSITY Ambient temperature International

Up to 0.5 % S Periodic change

D350 GENERALITIES 0-5

MAIN DIMENSIONS D350

3243 (127.7) 2134 (84)

Blade Blade Blade Tilt Pitch Digging Blade lifting

• Maximum angle: ± 25°.

Max Trazione alla Barra

Bearing pressure on ground

Climbing capacity (FWD) Maximum speed

Front equipment cycle times (ref. semi-U blade)

D350 GENERALITIES 0-7

cont.ed SPECIFICATIONS D350

Engine manufacturer - Cummins

Engine type: direct injection, turbocharged,

DIN 6270 224 257 300 345

SAE J1349 221 253 296 339

ISO9249 223 255 299 342

EEC 80/1269 224 257 300 345

Max. torque daNm (lb.ft.) 167.4 (1234.2)

cont.ed SPECIFICATIONS D350

Sound suppressed fan (blowing)/fan TRUFLO TECNOVENT

Rain protected pre-filter Donaldson

FUEL TANK Total volume lt (gal.) 675 (178.3)

Brand: Twin disc

Type: POWER SHIFT